SERVICE MANUAL

FIELD SERVICE

2007.04 Ver. 1.0

After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.

Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 to the left of the revised section. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. • To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted. • When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0: The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted. • When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0: The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.

2007/04 Date

1.0 Service manual Ver.

— Revision mark

Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007
bizhub 163/211/220

CONTENTS bizhub 163/211/220 Main body General
1. 2. 2.1 System configuration............................................................................................... 1 Product specification ............................................................................................... 3 Fax kit (FK-506): (Option) ..................................................................................... 6

Maintenance
3. 3.1 Periodical check ...................................................................................................... 7 Service schedule .................................................................................................. 7 Main body (bizhub 163) /PF-502/MB-501 ..................................................... 7 Main body (bizhub 211/220) /PF-502/MB-501 .............................................. 7 DF-502 .......................................................................................................... 7 DF-605 .......................................................................................................... 7 Parts to be replaced by users (CRU) ............................................................ 8 Periodical parts replacement/cleaning 1 (per 30,000-original feed).............. 8 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6 3.2.7 3.2.8 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.4 3.5

Maintenance items................................................................................................ 8

Periodical parts replacement/cleaning 3 (per 50,000-original feed).............. 9 Periodical parts replacement/cleaning 4 (per 80,000-print) .......................... 9 Periodical parts replacement/cleaning 5 (per 120,000-original feed)............ 9 Periodical parts replacement/cleaning 6 (per 150,000-print) ...................... 10 Periodical parts replacement/cleaning 7 (per 200,000-original feed).......... 10 Replacement parts...................................................................................... 11 Cleaning parts............................................................................................. 13

Maintenance parts .............................................................................................. 11
Troubleshooting Appendix

Concept of parts life............................................................................................ 14 Maintenance procedure (periodical check parts)................................................ 15 Cleaning of the original glass and original scanning glass ......................... 15 Replacing the separation roller assy ........................................................... 15 Replacing the feed roller ............................................................................. 17 Replacing the paper dust remover assy...................................................... 18 Replacing the toner bottle ........................................................................... 18 Replacing the imaging unit.......................................................................... 20 Disassembly of the imaging unit ................................................................. 20 Replacing the PC drum............................................................................... 22

3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5 3.5.6 3.5.7 3.5.8

i

Adjustment / Setting

Periodical parts replacement/cleaning 2 (per 40,000-original feed).............. 8

Maintenance

General

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007
bizhub 163/211/220

3.5.9 3.5.10 3.5.11 3.5.12 3.5.13 3.5.14 3.5.15 3.5.16

Replacing the ozone filter ........................................................................... 23 Replacing the PC drum charge corona assy .............................................. 24 Replacing the cleaning blade...................................................................... 24 Cleaning of the PC drum paper separator fingers ...................................... 25 Cleaning of the Ds collars........................................................................... 25 Cleaning of the developer scattering prevention plate ................................ 26 Replacing the developer / toner agitating seal............................................ 27 Cleaning of the pre-image transfer guide plate........................................... 29 Replacing the image transfer roller assy..................................................... 30 Replacing the fusing unit ............................................................................ 30

General

3.5.17 3.5.18 4. 4.1 4.2 5.

Service tool ........................................................................................................... 32 Service material list ............................................................................................ 32 CE tool list .......................................................................................................... 32 Firmware upgrade................................................................................................. 33 Preparations for firmware rewriting..................................................................... 33 Installing the driver...................................................................................... 33 Updating method ........................................................................................ 35 Procedure when upgrading the firmware has failed.................................... 37 Firmware rewriting.............................................................................................. 35 5.1.1

Maintenance

5.1 5.2

5.2.1 5.2.2
Adjustment / Setting

6. 6.1 6.2

Other ..................................................................................................................... 39 Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items .......................................................... 39 Disassembly/assembly/cleaning list (other parts) .............................................. 40 Disassembly/assembly parts list................................................................. 40 Cleaning parts list ....................................................................................... 41 Original glass/Original scanning glass........................................................ 42 Control panel .............................................................................................. 42 Front cover .................................................................................................. 43 Paper exit cover .......................................................................................... 44 Front door ................................................................................................... 44 Tray 1 .......................................................................................................... 44 Left cover .................................................................................................... 45 Paper exit tray ............................................................................................. 45 Rear inside cover ........................................................................................ 46 Upper rear cover ......................................................................................... 46 Left rear cover............................................................................................. 47 Rear cover .................................................................................................. 47 Right rear cover .......................................................................................... 47

6.2.1 6.2.2 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2

Disassembly/assembly procedure...................................................................... 42

Troubleshooting

6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6 6.3.7 6.3.8 6.3.9

Appendix

6.3.10 6.3.11 6.3.12 6.3.13

ii

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007
bizhub 163/211/220 Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General

6.3.14 6.3.15 6.3.16 6.3.17 6.3.18 6.3.19 6.3.20 6.3.21 6.3.22 6.3.23 6.3.24 6.3.25 6.3.26 6.3.27 6.3.28 6.3.29 6.3.30 6.3.31 6.3.32 6.3.33 6.3.34 6.3.35 6.3.36 6.3.37 6.3.38 6.3.39 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.4.5 6.4.6 6.4.7 6.4.8 6.4.9 6.4.10

Rear right cover........................................................................................... 48 Right cover .................................................................................................. 48 Printer control board (PRCB) ...................................................................... 48 MFP board (MFPB) ..................................................................................... 49 High voltage unit (HV1) ............................................................................... 50 Power supply unit (DCPU) .......................................................................... 51 Paper size detect board (PSDTB) ............................................................... 53 Heater relay board (RYB): 200 V areas only............................................... 54 Pre-image transfer register board (PITRB) ................................................. 54 Manual bypass tray ..................................................................................... 55 Toner hopper unit/Toner replenishing motor (M2) ....................................... 55 PH unit ........................................................................................................ 57 Disassembly of the fusing unit .................................................................... 58 CCD unit ..................................................................................................... 61 Scanner, exposure lamp, and inverter board (PU2) .................................... 63 Scanner motor (M4) .................................................................................... 65 Scanner drive cables................................................................................... 66 Main motor (M1).......................................................................................... 76 Power unit cooling fan motor (FM2) ............................................................ 77 Fusing cooling fan motor (FM1) .................................................................. 78 Paper size sensor (S5) assy ....................................................................... 79 Fusing unit interlock switch (S2) ................................................................. 80 Inch/metric sensor/1 (PS7) assy (3rd area only)......................................... 83 Flickerless resistor (R1) (Only for 200 V areas of bizhub 163) ................... 83 Replacing the TCR sensor (TCRS)............................................................. 84 Application of toner ..................................................................................... 85 Separation roller.......................................................................................... 86 Feed roller ................................................................................................... 87 Upper/Lower Synchronizing Rollers............................................................ 87 Paper dust remover..................................................................................... 88 Bypass transport roller/roll .......................................................................... 88 Mirrors ......................................................................................................... 89 Lens ............................................................................................................ 89 CCD Sensor................................................................................................ 90 Scanner rails/bearings ................................................................................ 91 PH window .................................................................................................. 91

Cleaning procedure ............................................................................................ 86

iii

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007
bizhub 163/211/220

6.4.11 6.4.12 6.5 6.5.1

Pre-Image transfer lower guide plate.......................................................... 92 Charge neutralizing plate............................................................................ 92 Installation of the key counter ..................................................................... 93

Option counter.................................................................................................... 93

Adjustment/Setting
7. 8.
General

How to use the adjustment section ....................................................................... 95 Utility Mode ........................................................................................................... 96 Utility Mode function tree .................................................................................... 96 Utility Mode function setting procedure .............................................................. 99 Procedure ................................................................................................... 99 Exiting ......................................................................................................... 99 Changing the setting value in Utility Mode functions .................................. 99 MACHINE SETTING................................................................................... 99 PAPER SOURCE SETUP......................................................................... 102 CUSTOM SIZE MEMORY ........................................................................ 103 USER MANAGEMENT ............................................................................. 103 ADMIN. MANAGEMENT........................................................................... 104 COPY SETTING 1 .................................................................................... 106 COPY SETTING 2 .................................................................................... 108 DIAL REGISTRATION .............................................................................. 109 FAX REGISTRATION................................................................................ 109 FAX TX OPERATION................................................................................ 109 FAX RX OPERATION ............................................................................... 109 REPORTING............................................................................................. 109 SCAN SETTING ....................................................................................... 109

8.1 8.2

8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.3
Maintenance

Setting in the Utility Mode................................................................................... 99

8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5

Adjustment / Setting

8.3.6 8.3.7 8.3.8 8.3.9 8.3.10 8.3.11 8.3.12

Troubleshooting

8.3.13 9. 10.

Adjustment item list............................................................................................. 110 Service Mode ...................................................................................................... 113 10.1.1 10.1.2 10.1.3 Procedure ................................................................................................. 113 Exiting ....................................................................................................... 113 Changing the setting value in Service Mode functions ............................. 113

10.1 Service Mode function setting procedure ......................................................... 113

Appendix

10.2 Service Mode function tree............................................................................... 114 10.3 Setting in the Service Mode ............................................................................. 117 10.3.1 10.3.2 10.3.3 SERVICE’S CHOICE ................................................................................ 117 ADJUST.................................................................................................... 126 COUNTER ................................................................................................ 132

iv

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007
bizhub 163/211/220 Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General

10.3.4 10.3.5 10.3.6 10.3.7 10.3.8 10.3.9

DISPLAY ................................................................................................... 136 FUNCTION ............................................................................................... 137 SOFT SWITCH ......................................................................................... 139 REPORT ................................................................................................... 139 ADMIN. REGISTRATION .......................................................................... 140 FIXED ZOOM CHANGE ........................................................................... 140

10.3.10 FACTORY TEST ....................................................................................... 141 10.3.11 CLEAR DATA ............................................................................................ 142 11. Security ............................................................................................................... 144 11.1.1 11.1.2 11.1.3 Procedure ................................................................................................. 144 Exiting ....................................................................................................... 144 Changing the setting value in Security functions ...................................... 144 11.1 Security function setting procedure .................................................................. 144

11.2 Security function tree ........................................................................................ 144 11.3 Setting in the Security....................................................................................... 144 11.3.1 11.3.2 11.3.3 11.3.4 12. TOTAL COUNTER COUNT....................................................................... 144 SIZE COUNTER COUNT ......................................................................... 144 PLUG-IN COUNTER COPY ..................................................................... 145 MACHINE COUNTER............................................................................... 145

Mechanical adjustment ....................................................................................... 146

12.1 Adjustment of the position of the scanner and 2nd/3rd mirrors carriage .......... 146 12.2 CCD unit position adjustment ........................................................................... 147 12.3 Adjustment of the gap between the doctor blade and sleeve roller (Db adjustment) ................................................................................................ 148 12.4 Manual bypass (for the optional AD-504) CD registration adjustment *bizhub 211/220 only ........................................................................................ 151

Troubleshooting
13. Jam display ......................................................................................................... 153 13.1.1 13.2.1 13.3.1 13.3.2 13.3.3 13.3.4 13.3.5 Display resetting procedure ...................................................................... 153 System mounted with PF-502 and MB-501. ............................................. 154 Initial check items...................................................................................... 155 Misfeed at tray1 paper feed section .......................................................... 156 Misfeed at the manual bypass tray paper feed section ............................. 157 Misfeed at the paper separating section ................................................... 158 Misfeed at the fusing/exit section .............................................................. 159 13.1 Misfeed display ................................................................................................. 153 13.2 Sensor layout .................................................................................................... 154 13.3 Solution............................................................................................................. 155

v

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007
bizhub 163/211/220

14.

Malfunction code................................................................................................. 160 14.1.1 Trouble code list ........................................................................................ 160

14.1 Trouble code ..................................................................................................... 160 14.2 How to reset ..................................................................................................... 164 14.3 Solution ............................................................................................................ 165 14.3.1 14.3.2 14.3.3 C0000: Main motor malfunction................................................................ 165 C0045: Fusing cooling fan motor malfunction........................................... 165 C004E: Power unit cooling fan motor malfunction .................................... 166 C0070: Toner replenishing motor malfunction .......................................... 166 C0210: Abnormal image transfer voltage ................................................. 167 C0500: Warm-up failure............................................................................ 167 C0501: Warm-up failure 2 (bizhub 211/220 Only) .................................... 167 C0510: Fusing failure (Abnormally low fusing temperature) ..................... 167 C0511: Fusing failure (Abnormally low fusing temperature 2) (bizhub 211/220 Only) .............................................................................. 167

General

14.3.4 14.3.5 14.3.6 14.3.7 14.3.8 14.3.9

Maintenance

14.3.10 C0520: Fusing failure (Abnormally high fusing temperature) ................... 167 14.3.11 C0521: Fusing failure (Abnormally high fusing temperature 2) (bizhub 211/220 Only) .............................................................................. 167 14.3.12 C0650: Faulty scanner home position sensor........................................... 169 14.3.13 C0F32: Faulty TCR sensor ....................................................................... 169

Adjustment / Setting

14.3.14 C0F33: Improperly adjusted TCR sensor ................................................. 169 14.3.15 C1038: Engine connection failure ............................................................. 170 14.3.16 C1200: Faulty ASIC/Memory .................................................................... 170 14.3.17 C1300: Polygon motor malfunction........................................................... 171 14.3.18 C13F0: Faulty HSYNC.............................................................................. 171 14.3.19 C14A3: IR fluorescent lamp fault .............................................................. 171 14.3.20 C3FFF: Flash ROM error .......................................................................... 172

Troubleshooting

15. 16.

Power supply trouble........................................................................................... 173 Image quality problem......................................................................................... 174 16.1.1 16.1.2 16.2.1 16.2.2 16.2.3 16.2.4 16.2.5 Initial check items ..................................................................................... 174 Identification of the faulty system.............................................................. 175 Image reading section: Blank copy ........................................................... 176 Image reading section: Black copy ........................................................... 177 Image reading section: Low image density............................................... 178 Image reading section: Foggy background or rough image...................... 179 Image reading section: Black streaks or bands ........................................ 180

15.1 The copier does not turn ON ............................................................................ 173 16.1 How to identify problematic part ....................................................................... 174

16.2 Solution ............................................................................................................ 176
Appendix

vi

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007
bizhub 163/211/220 Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General

16.2.6 16.2.7 16.2.8 16.2.9

Image reading section: Black spots .......................................................... 181 Image reading section: White streaks or bands ........................................ 182 Image reading section: Uneven image density ......................................... 183 Image reading section: Gradation reproduction failure ............................. 184

16.2.10 Image reading section: Periodically uneven image ................................... 185 16.2.11 Image reading section: Moire.................................................................... 186 16.2.12 Printer section: Blank copy........................................................................ 187 16.2.13 Printer section: Black copy........................................................................ 188 16.2.14 Printer section: Low image density ........................................................... 189 16.2.15 Printer section: Foggy background or rough image .................................. 190 16.2.16 Printer section: black streaks or bands ..................................................... 191 16.2.17 Printer section: Black spots....................................................................... 192 16.2.18 Printer section: Blank streaks or bands .................................................... 193 16.2.19 Printer section: Void areas ........................................................................ 194 16.2.20 Printer section: Smear on back ................................................................. 195 16.2.21 Printer section: Uneven image density...................................................... 196 16.2.22 Printer section: Gradation reproduction failure.......................................... 197 16.2.23 Printer section: Periodically uneven image ............................................... 198

Appendix
17. Parts layout drawing ............................................................................................ 199 17.1 Main body ......................................................................................................... 199 17.2 DF-502 (option)................................................................................................. 202 17.3 DF-605 (option)................................................................................................. 203 17.4 PF-502 (option)................................................................................................. 204 17.5 MB-501 (option) ................................................................................................ 205 17.6 AD-504 (option) ................................................................................................ 206 17.7 JS-503 (option) ................................................................................................. 207 17.8 SF-501 (option)................................................................................................. 208 18. 19. Connector layout drawing.................................................................................... 209 Timing chart ........................................................................................................ 210

19.1 Main body ......................................................................................................... 210 19.2 DF-605.............................................................................................................. 211 19.2.1 19.2.2 19.2.3 19.2.4 1-Sided Mode (A4 two sheets feeding) ..................................................... 211 2-Sided Mode (A4 two sheets feeding) ..................................................... 212 Fax Fine mode (A4 two sheets feeding).................................................... 214 Fax real-time transmission mode (A4 two sheets feeding) ....................... 215

vii

Appendix

Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General bizhub 163/211/220

viii
Blank Page Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007

1. System configuration
bizhub 163/211/220 [8] [9]
A08EE501AA

General
1. System configuration
[3] [2] [4]

1/2 System front view

[5]

[12] [6] [1] [13] [7]

[14] [11]

[10]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

bizhub 163/211/220 *1 Original cover (OC-504) *2 Automatic document feeder (DF-502) Reverse automatic document feeder (DF-605) *3 Shift tray (SF-501) Automatic duplex unit (AD-504) *3 *5

[8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13]

Paper feed unit (PF-502) Desk (DK-703) Desk (DK-702) Desk (DK-701) Job separator (JS-503) Key counter mount kit 1 (previous models for minolta.) Key counter mount kit 2 (previous models for konica) Mechanical counter (MC-503)

[7]

Multi bypass tray (MB-501) *4

[14]

*1: The standard bizhub 220 configuration is the main body plus 1-drawer paper feed unit. *2: Standard only on the bizhub 163 and bizhub 211/220 for china *3: To be mountable only on bizhub 211/220 *4: Standard only the main body for china (but separately packaged upon shipment from factory) *5: Standard only on bizhub 220 (but separately packaged upon shipment from factory)

1

General

0 Apr. 2 . 2007 2/2 System rear view [4] [3] [1] [2] General A08EE502AA [1] [2] Expanded memory unit (EM-103) Fax kit (FK-506) [3] [4] Image controller (IC-206) * Network interface card (NC-503) * * It is not possible to mount these units at the same time.1. 1. System configuration bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.

or less (Values in conditions of paper fed from tray 1 at a room temperature of 23°C and with a rated power source) 93 mm/s 21 cpm or more (bizhub 211: metric areas) Copying speed for multi-copy cycle (A4. Functions Types of original Max. Rear edge: 4 mm (1/4 inch). or less ADF scan: 11 sec. with the rated power source voltage and at a room temperature of 23°C) Leading edge: 4 mm (1/4 inch). x 0. 8-1/2 x 11) 22 cpm or more (bizhub 220) 20 cpm or more (bizhub 211: inch areas) 16 cpm or more (bizhub 163) Full size Fixed zoom ratios (Europe.410.000 x 1. china) Fixed zoom ratios (Latin america areas for inch) Reduction Enlargement Full size Reduction Enlargement Warming-up time Image loss First copy time (A4. Copier Original scanning system Photoconductor Copying system Resolution Paper feeding system Exposure system Developing system Charging system Image transfer system Paper separating system Fusing system Paper discharging system B. Type Platen Product specification Console/desktop type Stationary CCD line sensor Organic photoconductor Electrostatic dry powdered image transfer to plain paper with a laser 600 × 600 dpi Max. x 0. x 4. x 1.780 x 1.290. books. trailing edge: 4 mm (1/4 inch). in which the main power switch is ON and auxiliary power switch is OFF.150.250. 2007 2. or less: bizhub 211/bizhub 220 30 sec. original size Multiple copies Sheets.250. full size) Processing speed 3 General . or less: bizhub 163 (when the auxiliary power switch is turned ON from a stabilized state. and three-dimensional objects A3 or 11 × 17 1 to 99 15 sec.210.000. x 2. front edge: 4 mm (1/4 inch) Scan through glass: 7 sec.00 x 0.000.500. six-way system Mirror scanning HMT system Comb electrode DC negative corona with scorotron system Roller image transfer Paper separator fingers and charge neutralizing plate Heat roller Charge neutralizing brush A.00 x 0. x 0. x 0. Product specification bizhub 163/211/220 x 1. 1. x 2. x 4.700.0 Apr.500.640. x 1.000 2. x 0.810 x 1.Field Service Ver. x 0.

Paper Tray1 Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) Transparencies Type Thick Paper (91 to 157 g/m2) Postcards Labels Envelopes Size Width Length Paper feed unit Manual bypass ❍ *1 ❍ *1 ❍ *1 ❍ *1 ❍ *1 ❍ *1 ❍ (250 sheets) ❍ (20 sheets) ❍ (20 sheets) ❍ (20 sheets) ❍ (20 sheets) ❍ (10 sheets) 140 to 432 mm *2 90 to 297 mm *2 182 to 297 mm *2 90 to 297 mm *2 *1: Capacity of manual bypass: 1 sheet *2: If the width set 297 mm. 2007 x 1.500.700.780 x 1. 11 x 14.000 prints or 5 years.250 to ×4. length is to 420 mm. whichever is earlier (bizhub 211/bizhub 220) 240. If the length set 432 mm. LedgerS. postcards. Invoice.0 Apr. Letter. whichever is earlier (bizhub 163) Machine durability 4 .2. x 1.000 in 0. 16K. Maintenance 300. x 0. width is to 279 mm. x 4. D.00 x 0. Product specification bizhub 163/211/220 Full size Fixed zoom ratios (Latin america area for Reduction metric) Enlargement Variable zoom ratios Paper size used ×0.410.000 prints or 5 years. 1. 8K.000 Tray 1 Manual bypass Plain paper/recycled paper Paper capacity (Tray 1) Special paper (thick paper.000.001 increments A3 to A5S. overhead projector transparencies. FLS 250 sheets 20 sheets 10 sheets 1 sheets General C. x 2. x 0. label sheets) Envelopes Paper capacity (Manual bypass) Plain paper/recycled paper/special paper Field Service Ver. the max.150. the max.250. LegalS. x 0.

Product specification bizhub 163/211/220 AC100 V. 600 dpi) Memory Interface Printer language Font Complying OS Shared with the copier USB revision 2.0 Apr. 300 dpi) 12 printed pages/min (A4. Windows 98 SE 5 General .0 compatible GDI Windows Windows XP (SP2 or later). 2007 E. Windows ME.Field Service Ver. Machine specifications Power requirements Voltage Frequency 2. AC220-240V 50/60 Hz 100/110/120 area 1000 W ± 10% or less 1050 W ± 10% or less 940 W ± 10% or less 1100 W ± 10% or less 1200 W ± 10% or less 1250 W ± 10% or less 1350 W ± 10% or less bizhub 163 Max power consumption bizhub 211/220 127/230 area 220 area 240 area 110/120/220 area 127/240 area 230 area 599 (W) x 620 (D) x 520 (H) mm *1 Dimensions 760 (W) x 620 (D) x 604 (H) mm *2 (bizhub 220 for China) 760 (W) x 620 (D) x 520 (H) mm *2 (bizhub 163 for China) Space requirements Mass 998 (W) x 665 (D) mm (bizhub 211/220) 998 (W) x 620 (D) mm (bizhub 161) 89 kg (when fully equipped) *1: Including the original cover *2: Including MB-501 and original cover F. AC120V. 300 dpi) 12 printed pages/min (A4. Operating environment Temperature Humidity 10 to 30°C (with a fluctuation of 10°C or less per hour) 15 to 85% (with a fluctuation of 10%/h) G. 600 dpi) bizhub 163: 16 printed pages/min (A4. Built-in controllers Printing Speed bizhub 211: 21 printed pages/min (A4. 1. Windows 2000 (SP4 or later).

6. 2.2. banner documents (maximum 1000 mm (39-1/4 inches)) possible Metric: A3. 12.4. B5. 21.2. 24. Ledger (11 x 17) With built in memory (5 MB): 280 pages With expanded memory (64 MB): 1.8. Product specification bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.024 pages *With standard A4-size documents MH / MR / MMR / JBIG Transmission mode Compatible wiring Connection method Transmission speed Transmission time Scanning density General Document size Print paper size Scanning storage Compression encoding format *1: This is the speed for transmitting an A4-size.2. In addition.0 Apr.1 Fax kit (FK-506): (Option) G3 General subscriber telephone line. 31.7/15. *2: Real-time transmission is supported only with the document feeder. Legal (8-1/2 x 14). 2007 2. 4.0. The transmission time for only the image information and the communication control time are not included. NCC each line Direct connection (using a modular jack) 33. 14. 1.6.4 lines/mm.8.6. the actual transmission time differs depending on the contents of the document.0. A4. 28. 16 dots/mm x 15. A5 Inch: Invoice (8-1/2 x 5-1/2). 26. or Letter-size document containing approximately 700 characters at high-speed (33. B4.85 lines/mm (200 dpi x 100 lpi)).6 kbps) using the standard resolution (8 dots/mm x 3. 9.4.8.2. 16. the recipient’s fax machine and the condition of the wiring.4 lines/mm *2 Maximum A3 (Ledger). 19. Letter.4 kbps (automatic switching) 3 seconds *1 8 dots/mm x 3. 6 . 7.85/7.

000 150. of times 5 2 1 1 1 16 ● ● ● ● ● 20 ● 24 ● ● 28 ● No.000 Main body PF-502 80.1 3.1.000 120.000 originals feed Service item 30.000 originals feed Service item 50.000 x 10.000-originals feed 5 ● 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 7 .000 3.000-print 4 ● 8 ● ● 12 ● 15 MB-501 150. of times 19 4 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Maintenance 3.000 150.1 Periodical check Service schedule Main body (bizhub 163) /PF-502/MB-501 Guarantee period : 5-year or 240.000 x 10.1.000 150.000 200.000 150.000 prints Service item 40. 2007 3. of times 7 3 1 1 1 9 ● 12 ● ● No.000-print 4 ● 8 ● ● 12 ● MB-501 150.0 Apr.000 prints Service item 40.4 DF-605 Guarantee period: 5-year or 1000. 3.000-originals feed 3 ● 6 ● 3.3 DF-502 Guarantee period: 5-year or 150.000 x 10. of times 4 1 No.000 x 10.1.000 Main body PF-502 80.Field Service Ver. 1. Periodical check bizhub 163/211/220 15 16 ● ● ● ● ● 20 ● No.1.000 3.2 Main body (bizhub 211/220) /PF-502/MB-501 Maintenance Guarantee period : 5-year or 300.

2.000-original feed) Class Parts to be replaced Paper feed and image conditions Appearance Pick-up roller Paper take-up roller Separation roller Registration roller Qt.3.3 No. Periodical check bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.0 Apr.000 Clean Replace ● Descriptions 3.       1 1 1 1 1 1 Check Clean Replace ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Lubrication Descriptions Overall Processing sections 8 . 1. 2007 3.2 No. 1 2 3 4 Periodical parts replacement/cleaning 1 (per 30.            Check Clean Replace ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Lubrication Descriptions Overall Maintenance 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 DF-502 Registration roll Exit roller Exit roll Transport roll Length sensor/2 (PS7) 3.2.1 No 1 Maintenance items Parts to be replaced by users (CRU) Class Processing sections Parts to be replaced Toner bottle Cycle 11.2.000-original feed) Class Parts to be replaced Paper feed and image conditions Appearance Ds collars Developer scattering prevention plate Pre-image transfer guide plate PC drum paper separator fingers PC drum PC drum charge corona assy Cleaning blade Developer Toner agitating seal Cleaning pad assy Qt.2 3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Periodical parts replacement/cleaning 2 (per 40.

4 No. 1 2 3 4 5 Periodical parts replacement/cleaning 5 (per 120.   1 1 1 Check Clean Replace ● ● ● ● ● ● *1 Lubrication Descriptions Overall DF-502 Feed roller Separation roller *1: Replace those three parts at the same time.Field Service Ver.000-original feed) Class Parts to be replaced Paper feed and image conditions Appearance Pick-up roller Qt. Periodical check bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance Periodical parts replacement/cleaning 3 (per 50.0 Apr. 2007 3.2.    Check Clean Replace ● ● ● ● Lubrication Descriptions Overall Scanner section Original glass/original scanning glass 3.000-print) Class Parts to be replaced Paper feed and image conditions Appearance Qt.5 No. 9 . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DF-605 3. 1 2 3 Periodical parts replacement/cleaning 4 (per 80.2.2. 1.         Check Clean Replace ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Lubrication Descriptions Overall 3.000-original feed) Class Parts to be replaced Paper feed and image conditions Appearance Pick-up roller Paper take-up roller Separation roller Rollers and rolls Scanning guide Reflective sensor section Qt.6 No.

2.2.3.000-print) Class Parts to be replaced Paper feed and image conditions Appearance Feed roller Separation roller assy Qt. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Tray 1 Periodical parts replacement/cleaning 6 (per 150.0 Apr.8 No. 1 2 3 4 5 DF-605 Periodical parts replacement/cleaning 7 (per 200. 2007 3. 1.7 No.000-original feed) Class Parts to be replaced Paper feed and image conditions Appearance Pick-up roller Feed roller Separation roller Qt. 3. Periodical check bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. 10 .   2 1 1 Check Clean Replace ● ● ● ● ● ● *1 Lubrication Descriptions Overall *1: Replace those three parts at the same time.   1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 Check Clean Replace ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● *1 *1 Lubrication Descriptions Overall Image transfer Image transfer roller assy section Fusing section Fusing unit Processing sections PF-502 MB-501 Ozone filter Feed roller Feed roller Separation roller assy Maintenance *1: Replace those two parts at the same time.

*6: Taiwan only. 11 .23 P. it is recommended that the maintenance jobs described in this schedule be carried out as instructed.27 P.3.000 40.22 P.3 Maintenance parts • To ensure that the machine produces good copies and to extend its service life. 4034 3012 ## 4034 0151 ## 4034 R703 ##  1156 4118 ## A08E R702 ## 4034 5622 ##  A08E 3700 ## 4034 R706 ## 4035 0751 ## *3 4035 R700 ## *4 4035 R701 ## *5 A09A R700 ## *6 *2 Descriptions Ref. *2: Replace those two parts at the same time.18 P. *5: European areas only. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Image 10 transfer section Fusing 11 section Imaging unit section Classification Paper take-up section Parts name Feed roller Separation roller assy Qua ntity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Actual durable cycle *1 150.000 40.17 P.000 40. 3.0 Apr.000 40.15 P. Periodical check bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance 3. Main body No.24 P.30 *1: Actual durable cycle is the life counter value.000 150. *4: 220-240 V areas only.24 P.27 P.000 150.000 40. 2007 3.000 P.000 40.30 Transport Paper dust remover section assy PC drum Ozone filter PC drum charge corona assy Cleaning blade Developer Toner agitating seal Image transfer roller assy Fusing unit 1 150. *3: 110 V/120 V/127 V areas only. • Replace with reference to the numeric values displayed on the life counter.1 Replacement parts A.Field Service Ver.000 Pats No.page in this manual P. 1.000 150.

000 200. *4 *5 Maintenance *1: Actual durable cycle is the life counter value. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MB-501 PF-502 DF-605 DF-502 Classification Parts name Pick-up roller Feed roller Separation roller Pick-up roller Feed roller Separation roller Feed roller Paper take-up roller Separation roller assy Qua ntity 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 Actual durable cycle *1 120.page in this manual 4688 3032 ## Replace those 4688 3033 ## three parts at the *2 4688 3034 ## same time.000 150. 1.000 120. *3: See the DF-605 Service Manual.0 Apr.000 150. Descriptions Ref. *2: See the DF-502 Service Manual. *4: See the PF-502 Service Manual. 2007 B. 12 . Periodical check bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. 4344 5003 ## Replace those 4582 3014 ## three parts at the *3 4582 3047 ## same time. Options No.000 150.000 120. 4686 3371 ## 4687 3012 ## Replace those two parts at the 4034 0151 ## same time.000 200.000 200. *5: See the MB-501 Service Manual.000 Pats No.3.

1. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 DF-502 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 DF-605 Scanner section Imaging unit section 3.3.page in this manual P.000 30.0 Apr. Periodical check bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance *3 Cleaning parts Classification Ds collars Developer scattering prevention plate Pre-image transfer guide plate PC drum paper separator fingers Original glass/original scanning glass Pick-up roller Feed roller Separation roller Registration roller Registration roll Exit roller Exit roll Transport roll Length sensor/2 (PS7) Pick-up roller Feed roller Separation roller Rollers and rolls Scanning guide Reflective sensor section Parts name Actual cleaning cycle *1 40.000 50.25 P.000 30.15 *1: Actual cleaning cycle is the life counter value.000 50.26 P.000 30. *3: See the DF-605 Service Manual.000 30. 2007 3.000 40.2 No.000 50.000 40.000 30.000 30.000 80. 13 .000 30.Field Service Ver.000 40.000 30.000 50.000 50.25 P. *2: See the DF-502 Service Manual.29 P.000 30.000 *2 Descriptions Ref.000 50.

Fusing unit *1:The service mode can be used to set either enable or disable the initiation of a new copy/print cycle.4 Concept of parts life Description PC drum Life value (Specification value) 40.000 40.0 Apr.3. Max.000 The distance travelled by the PC drum is converted to a corresponding number of printed pages of A4 paper at 2P/J. It may therefore vary depending on the conditions.000 Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not inhibited *1 New copy/print cycle inhibited Cleaning blade PC drum charge corona Developer Image transfer assy Paper dust remover The number of sheets of paper fed out of the assy copier is counted. or a value translated to a corresponding number of copies made.000 40.000/month. 12.000/month Average 3. 40. in which the copiers are used among different users. 1.000 150. Maintenance A. Periodical check bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. 16.000 40.000/month. Max. Conditions for life specifications values • The life value represents the number of copies made in the conditions specified in the table shown below.000 150.000/month B/W 6% Description Original density 14 . 2007 3. Item Copying type Paper size CV/M bizhub 163 bizhub 211/220 2P/J A4 Average 2.

1. Procedure [2] [1] 1.0 Apr. and remove the mounting bracket [2].5. Procedure 1.5 Maintenance procedure (periodical check parts) NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Original glass/original scanning glass: Every 80. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Separation roller assy: Every 150.000 prints B. A09AF2C002DA 15 . Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. [1] [2] [1] 2.000 prints B. Remove two screws [1]. 3.5. wipe the original glass [1] and original scanning glass [2] clean of dirt. Periodical check bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance A09AF2C001DA 3.Field Service Ver.2 Replacing the separation roller assy A. 3. Slide out the tray/1. 2007 3.1 Cleaning of the original glass and original scanning glass A.

Take off the rubber stopper [1]. A09AF2C003DA [2] [4] 4. and guide plate [4] to remove the paper separation roller fixing bracket assy [5]. shaft [2]. 2007 3. Remove the separation roller fixing plate assy [1]. Maintenance [5] [1] [3] A09AF2C501DA 5. reverse the order of removal. spring [3]. 1. 16 . Snap off the E-ring [1]. [2] [1] A09AF2C502DA 6. and remove the tray 1paper separation roller assy [2]. To reinstall. Select [Service Mode] → [CLEAR DATA] → [PM COUNTER] and clear the counter value of [Tray 1]. Periodical check bizhub 163/211/220 [1] Field Service Ver. 7.3.0 Apr.

1. and remove the feed roller [2]. [2] A09AF2C639DA [2] 6. Snap off the C-clip [1]. Press down the paper lifting plate.5 mm).3 Replacing the feed roller 3. 4.Field Service Ver. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Feed roller: Every 150. Snap off the C-clip [2] from the feed roller assy [1]. 3.0 Apr.000 prints B. Loosen the set screw [1] with the hexagon wrench (2. [1] A09AF2C004DA [1] 5. Periodical check bizhub 163/211/220 A. [1] A09AF2C005DA 17 Maintenance . [2] 2. 2007 3. NOTE • When reinstall the weight.5. tighten the set screw with the weight slightly pushed against the feed roller. Procedure 1. Slide the feed roller assy [1] to the rear and pull it off the bearing at the front. Slide out the tray/1. and remove the weight [2].

[2] 2. and remove the toner bottle [2].5. Procedure 1. Periodical check bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. and remove the paper dust remover assy [2]. Pull the toner bottle holder [1]. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Toner bottle: Every 11. 1. Unhook the two tabs [1].000 prints B. 2007 3.20 3. Remove the imaging unit. Open the right door.5 Replacing the toner bottle A. Open the front door.3. [1] [1] Maintenance [2] A09AF2C006DA 3. See P. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Paper dust remover assy: Every 40.0 Apr. [1] A09AF2C531DA 18 .5. 2. Procedure 1.4 Replacing the paper dust remover assy A.000 prints B.

Tap the bottom of the toner bottle [1] 3 or 4 times. [1] A09AF2C534DA 19 Maintenance 4. 1. Turn up the sealing part [1] of the new toner bottle. Periodical check bizhub 163/211/220 [1] 3.0 Apr. . and remove the seal toward slowly.Field Service Ver. NOTE • Make sure that the convex part of the toner bottle is inserted into the concave part of the toner bottle holder [3]. 2007 3. A09AF2C532DA [1] [3] [1] A09AF2C533DA 5. Turn up the part with “UP” display of the toner bottle [1]. and put it into the toner bottle holder [2].

Procedure NOTE • When the developer is to be changed. Remove the screw [1] in the rear of the IU and remove the harness cover [2]. remove the toner bottle and run “ATDC AUTO ADJUST” twice. Remove two screws [1].0 Apr. Take care that. To do that. Maintenance 3. If this step is done all at once. Periodical check bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. Procedure 1. be sure to fully open the right door. push the IU all the way into position. 2007 3. • Before attempting to install the IU. the drum gear could be damaged.138 1. use care not to damage the PC drum. NOTE • When installing the IU. when you are sure that the drum gear contacts the mating part. and remove the IU [2].7 Disassembly of the imaging unit A. Open the right door.3. See P. 1.5. • When inserting the IU. 2.5. it may interfere with the transfer roller. do that slowly and. [1] [2] A09AF2C007DA 3. if the IU is installed with the right door locked halfway. [2] [1] A09AF2C535DA 20 . Open the front door. it is necessary that toner in the recycled toner recycling duct and toner conveying duct be fed into the developer mixing chamber.6 Replacing the imaging unit A.

[1] A09AF2C536DA 3.0 Apr. 1.Field Service Ver. [1] [1] A09AF2C537DA [2] 4. Widen flaps on both ends (marked with A in the photo on the left) [1] of the drum assy in the direction of the arrow and turn to take off the developing assy [2]. 2007 3. Remove two screws [1] in the rear of the IU. [1] [1] A09AF2C538DA 21 . Periodical check bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance 2. Remove two screws [1] at the front of the IU.

Periodical check bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.0 Apr.8 Replacing the PC drum A. Procedure 1. Remove two screws [1]. Unplug the connector [1] of the main erase. Remove the developing assy from the imaging unit.3. [1] A09AF2C540DA [1] 3. 2007 5. NOTE • Protect the PC drum that has been removed with a protective cloth. and remove the pivot shaft [2].85 A09AF2C541DA 22 . Periodically replaced parts/cycle • PC drum: Every 40. [1] A09AF2C539DA 3.000 prints Maintenance B. See P. See P. 1. • If the PC drum has been replaced with a new one.20 [2] 2. Remove the PC drum [1]. apply a coat of toner to the surface of the new PC drum. See IU disassemble procedure 1 to 4.5.

0 Apr. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Ozone filter: Every 150.9 Replacing the ozone filter 3.5. Remove the PC drum. Remove two screws [1]. A09AF2C542DA 3. 1. and remove the main erase [2]. See P. 2007 3. Periodical check bizhub 163/211/220 A.000 prints B. Remove the ozone filter [1].Field Service Ver. [1] A09AF2C543DA 23 Maintenance [1] [1] .22 [2] 2. Procedure 1.

1. apply a coat of toner to the surface of the PC drum. NOTE • When securing the cleaning blade. tighten screws in the order of one on one edge. • When the cleaning blade has been replaced. See P. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Cleaning blade: Every 40.24 [1] 2. Remove the PC drum charge corona assy.85 A09AF2C551DA [2] 24 . Procedure 1. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • PC drum charge corona assy: Every 40. and one on the other edge. Slide out the PC drum charge corona assy [1] in the direction of the arrow.22 2.000 prints B. Remove three screws [1]. Remove the main erase.5. See P.0 Apr.3. Maintenance A09AF2C544DA 3. and remove the cleaning blade [2]. Remove the PC drum. Procedure 1.11 Replacing the cleaning blade A. See P.10 Replacing the PC drum charge corona assy A. See P. 4. 2007 3. Turn the holder in the rear in the direction of the arrow to remove it from the side bracket. Periodical check bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.000 prints B. one at the center.5.23 [1] 3.

[1] [1] A09AF2C553DA 25 Maintenance . wipe the five paper separator fingers [1] clean of dirt.5. See P. See P. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Ds collars: Every 40.Field Service Ver. A09AF2C552DA 3. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • PC drum paper separator fingers: Every 40.5. Divide the image unit into the PC drum assy and the developing assy.24 [1] 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Procedure 1. Procedure 1.13 Cleaning of the Ds collars A. wipe the two Ds collars [1] clean of dirt.20 2.0 Apr. Periodical check bizhub 163/211/220 A.000 prints B. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Remove the cleaning blade. 2007 3.000 prints B.12 Cleaning of the PC drum paper separator fingers 3. 1.

20 [1] 2. 1.5. Remove three screws [1].000 prints B. and remove the developer scattering prevention plate [2]. Procedure 1.14 Cleaning of the developer scattering prevention plate A. tighten screws in the order of one on one edge. one at the center.3. See P. NOTE • When securing the developer scattering prevention plate. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Developer scattering prevention plate: Every 40. 2007 3. and one on the other edge. Using a brush. whisk dust and dirt off the surface of the developer scattering prevention plate [1].0 Apr. Periodical check bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. Divide the image unit into the PC drum assy and the developing assy. Maintenance [2] A09AF2C554DA 3. [1] A09AF2C555DA 26 .

Remove the toner agitating seal [1].000 prints B.Field Service Ver. NOTE • Make sure that the above-mentioned procedure is done after the old developer is removed.15 Replacing the developer / toner agitating seal 3. Procedure 1. • Dump developer until almost no developer sticks to the sleeve roller. NOTE • Turning the gear backward at this time could damage the mylar for cleaning the TCR sensor. Dump the developer. A09AF2C557DA [1] [1] 3. 2007 3. 1. and wipe the sealed surface with alcohol. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Developer: Every 40. A09AF2C629DA 27 Maintenance [1] . A09AF2C556DA [2] <<How to dump developer>> • Dump developer [1] on the surface of the sleeve roller by turning the gear [2] in the direction of the arrow with the developing unit tilted as shown.26 2.0 Apr. Remove the developer scattering prevention plate.5. Periodical check bizhub 163/211/220 A. See P.

NOTE • Put the toner agitating seal at the position shown the left. Periodical check bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. • Do not put the seal as the developer remains mounted. Turn the gear [1] to the direction shown the left (to the left). See P. and confirm the swing of the toner agitating seal [2].0 mm 0 Maintenance + - - + A09AF2C630DA [2] 5. • If the sealing is not done properly. [1] A09AF2C631DA [1] 6. make the ATDC AUTO ADJUST and enter the adjustment value on the adjust label. • When the developer has been changed. If not. • Check to make sure that the bottom of the toner agitating seal is on the transporting blade. [1] 0 +1.0 Apr.138 A09AF2C558DA 28 . do not use that seal again. 1.0 mm 0 0 +1. Pour one packet of developer [1]. place the bottom of the toner agitating seal on the transporting blade with tweezers. NOTE • Shake the packet of developer well before pouring. 2007 4.3. Put the new toner agitating seal [1].

Field Service Ver. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Pre-image transfer guide plate: Every 40. Periodical check bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance [1] 7. See P. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. wipe the pre-image transfer upper guide plate [1] clean of dirt. A09AF2C559DA 29 . [3] [2] A09AF2C632DA 3. Attach the developer scattering prevention plate and confirm through the opening [1] that the bottom of the toner agitating seal [2] is on the transporting blade [3]. Procedure 1.5. 1.000 prints B.0 Apr. Divide the image unit into the PC drum assy and the developing assy. 2007 3.16 Cleaning of the pre-image transfer guide plate A.20 [1] 2.

• Do not place a new image transfer roller directly on the floor. hold onto the shaft or bearings of the roller. Remove the rear cover and rear right cover. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Image transfer roller assy: Every 150.47. • When handling the image transfer roller.3. A. Unhook two tabs [1]. Procedure 1.P.18 Replacing the fusing unit CAUTION • The temperature gets high in the vicinity of the fusing unit.0 Apr. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Fusing unit: Every 150. Before replacement operations. 1.17 Replacing the image transfer roller assy A. See P. 3. You may get burned when you come into contact with the area. Open the right door.000 prints B. Do not therefore touch or dirty with toner the surface of the image transfer roller.5. [2] [1] Maintenance A09AF2C008DA 2. NOTE • Indentations or dirt on the surface of the image transfer roller adversely affect the printed image. and remove the image transfer roller assy [2]. Unplug two connectors [1] of the fusing unit. make sure that more than 20 minutes have elapsed since the main and sub power switches were turned off.5.000 prints B. A09AF2C009DA 30 . 2007 3. Periodical check bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. Procedure 1.48 [1] 2.

and remove the fusing unit [2]. 2007 [1] 3. bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance A09AF2C011DA [2] A09AF2C010DA NOTE • When removing the fusing unit. Remove four screws [1]. take care not to confuse the types of screw. 4. 1.Field Service Ver. NOTE When removing the fusing unit.0 Apr. 31 . make sure of the correct type of screws that must be removed. Open the right door. Periodical check 3.

2 CE tool list Tool name Shape Parts No.0 Apr.4. Remarks Isopropyl alcohol A00KF2C506DA  4. Personnel Remarks Maintenance Scanner/mirrors carriage positioning jigs 4034F2C501DA 4034 7901 ## 4034 7902 ## 1 for each Ds collar positioning jigs 4021 7903 ## 2 4034F2C502DA Db gap adjusting jigs 4021 7904 ## 2 4034F2C503DA PC positioning jig 4034F2C504DA 4021 4362 ## 2 Gauge 4034F2C505DA 1144 7910 ## 2 32 . 1. 2007 4. Service tool bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.1 Service tool Service material list Name Shape Material No. 4.

9.1 Firmware upgrade Preparations for firmware rewriting Installing the driver NOTE • The TWAIN driver must previously be installed in the host computer that is used to upgrade the firmware. choose “Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended)”. 7. The “Found New Hardware Wizard” dialog box will appear again: Repeat steps 4~7 to install all drivers. specify “\(name of any given language)\Win2000” in the folder in which the TWAIN driver is stored.35 A. Turn on the power switch of the machine. 5. Click [OK]. 10.1. 3. 8. In the “Locate Driver Files” dialog box. • If the TWAIN driver has not been installed. Click [Browse]. 8. 3. continue following the instructions in the dialog boxes that will appear until the “Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard” dialog box appears. In the “Found New Hardware Wizard” dialog box. (1) 1. Use a USB cable to connect the machine to host computer. choose “Specify a location”. Click [Next] and then [Finish]. Use a USB cable to connect the machine to host computer. and then click [OK]. choose “Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)”. Click [Finish]. 7. and then click [Next]. Turn on the power switch of the machine. 5. and copy them to PC. 4. Then. The “Found New Hardware Wizard” dialog box will appear. 1. In the “Install Hardware Device Printers” dialog box.1 5. and then click [Next]. Under “Search for the best driver in these locations”.Field Service Ver. 2007 5. use the procedure below to install it. 4. 6. 6. and then click [Browse]. 33 . 2. Specify “\(name of any given language)\WinXP” in the folder in which the TWAIN driver is stored. Start the host computer. The “Found New Hardware Wizard” dialog box will appear again: Repeat steps 4~8 to install all drivers. choose “Include this location in the search”. For Windows 2000 Prepare the files necessary for upgrading the firmware. (2) 1.0 Apr. Installation of the GDI printer/TWAIN driver For Windows XP Start the host computer. proceed with the section on “Firmware rewriting” to upgrade the firmware. 5. See P. • If the TWAIN driver has already been installed. Firmware upgrade bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance 5. 2. and then click [OK]. and then click [Next].

and then click [Browse]. Start the host computer. The “Add New Hardware Wizard” dialog box will appear again: Repeat steps 4~8 to install all drivers. 9. 8. Then. With Windows 98. click [Next].5. Choose “Specify a location”. in the dialog box that will then appear.0 Apr. and then click [OK]. Specify “\(name of any given language)\Win9X” in the folder in which the TWAIN driver is stored. choose “Search for the best driver for your device (recommended)”. Maintenance 34 . Firmware upgrade bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. 1. 6. choose “Specify the location of the driver (Advanced)”. Use a USB cable to connect the machine to host computer. For Windows Me/98SE Prepare the files necessary for upgrading the firmware. 10. and copy them to PC. With Windows Me. Click [Finish]. Click [Next]. 7. 2007 (3) 1. and then click [Next]. The “Add New Hardware Wizard” dialog box will appear. 2. 4. continue following the instructions in the dialog boxes that will appear until the “Finish” button appears. 5. 3. and then click [Next]. Then. Turn on the power switch of the machine.

Connect the machine to the host computer using a USB cable. Double-click the “Update” file in the “Update Software” folder. 1.2 5. Open “Properties” of “My Computer. (Wait until the hardware is detected. Copy the “Update Software” folder and “Update” file to drive C. Click the [Browse] button.” Then select System Properties/Hardware/Device Manager/Imaging devices to check that the “XXXXXXXXXXX” (Model Name) icon has been added. A09AF2C623DA 35 .) 4. 2. Then.2. 6.0 Apr.Field Service Ver.) 5. 2007 5. A09AF2C622DA 7. select the “Update” file that has been copied onto drive C in step 3. Turn ON the power switch of the machine. Firmware upgrade bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance A09AF2E627DA 5. Start the host computer. The “TenryuS Update F/W-VXXX” screen will appear. 3. (Copy them into the highest directory on drive C.1 Firmware rewriting Updating method 1.

” A09AF2C626DA 12. Turn OFF and ON the power switch of the machine. Check the display for status of the firmware upgrading sequence.5. (Wait until data transfer is completed. Click the [OK] button to quit “TenryuS Update F/W-VXXX. Click the [Update] button to start the transfer of the firmware data.0 Apr. When the following message appears in the display. and confirm the firmware version.) 9. 1. A09AF2E637DA 11. 36 . Firmware upgrade bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. Maintenance A09AF2E636DA NOTE • NEVER turn OFF and ON the power switch as long as the above screens are being displayed. it indicates that upgrading of the firmware has been completed. 2007 8. 10.

2007 5.Field Service Ver. Firmware upgrade bizhub 163/211/220 NOTE • Perform the following procedure only when upgrading from PC using ordinary USB connection has failed and the machine has not started properly. 1. Click the [Browse] button. The “TenryuS Update F/W-VXXX” screen will appear. Check to make sure that [TENRYU-S BOOTROM] is displayed on the control panel. 1. (The new hardware wizard dialog box will appear. Turn ON the power switch of the machine while pressing the Utility key on the control panel. (Copy them into the highest directory on drive C. Copy the “Update Software” folder and “Update” file to drive C. • Prepare the special USB device driver because it is not possible to upgrade the firmware with the usual TWAIN/printer driver.2.0 Apr.) 37 Maintenance . and install the driver that has been copied onto the host computer in step 1.) 7. Then. 5. Click the [Update] button to start the transfer of the firmware data. 2. A09AF2E638DA 4. 3. A09AF2C622DA 8. Prepare the USB device driver (TWAIN/printer driver) for the firmware upgrade. Connect the machine to the host computer using a USB cable. select the “Update” file that has been copied onto drive C in step 5.2 Procedure when upgrading the firmware has failed 5. Start the host computer.) 6. and copy the USB device driver to the host computer. A09AF2C623DA 9. Double-click the “Update” file in the “Update Software” folder. (Wait until data transfer is completed.

A09AF2E636DA Maintenance NOTE • NEVER turn OFF and ON the power switch as long as the above screens are being displayed. A09AF2E637DA 12. When the following message appears in the display. 2007 10.5. 38 . Check the display for status of the firmware upgrading sequence. 1. Firmware upgrade bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. Turn OFF and ON the power switch of the machine. and confirm the firmware version.0 Apr. Click the [OK] button to quit “TenryuS Update F/W-VXXX.” A09AF2C626DA 13. 11. it indicates that upgrading of the firmware has been completed.

• The screw lock is applied to the screws that may get loose due to the vibrations and loads created by the use of machine or due to the vibrations created during transportation. refer to “Handling of PWBs” and follow the corresponding removal procedures. Removal of PWBs CAUTION • When removing a circuit board or other electrical component. be sure to apply a screw lock after the screws are tightened. when two or more screws are used for a single part. D. • If the screw lock coated screws are loosened or removed. B. 39 . 2007 6. Variable resistors on board NOTE • Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting. • Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board. 6. 1.0 Apr. • The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint. Red-painted screws • The screws which are difficult to be adjusted in the field are painted in red in order to prevent them from being removed by mistake. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance 6. • Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also be noted that. Paint-locked screws • To prevent loose screws.1 Other Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items A. a screw lock in blue or green series color is applied to the screws. be sure to ground your body. C.Field Service Ver.

66 Maintenance 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 40 .45 P.48 P.2.42 P. 1.55 P.57 P.55 P.48 P.44 P.46 P.51 P.54 P.58 P. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.46 P.47 P.2 6. Power supply unit (DCPU) Paper size detect board (PSDTB) Heater relay board (RYB) Pre-image transfer register board (PITRB) Manual bypass tray Unit Toner hopper unit/Toner replenishing motor (M2) PH unit Disassembly of the fusing unit CCD unit Scanner IR Exposure lamp (LA1) Inverter board (INVB) Scanner motor (M4) Scanner drive cables Ref.63 P.44 P.63 P.63 P.53 P.45 P.44 P.6.43 P. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Disassembly/assembly/cleaning list (other parts) Disassembly/assembly parts list Section Part name Original glass/Original scanning glass Control panel Front cover Paper exit cover Front door Tray 1 Left cover Exterior parts Paper exit tray Rear inside cover Upper rear cover Left rear cover Rear cover Right rear cover Rear right cover Right cover Printer control board (PRCB) MFP board (MFPB) High voltage unit (HV1) Board and etc.47 P.54 P.50 P.0 Apr. 2007 6.page P.42 P.49 P.48 P.1 No.61 P.47 P.65 P.

0 Apr.2.Page P.83 P.2 No.92 41 Maintenance P.89 P.78 P.91 P.76 P.85 6.91 P.92 P.page P.84 P.89 P.79 P.88 P.83 P.90 P.88 P. 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 Others Section Main motor (M1) Power unit cooling fan motor (FM2) Fusing cooling fan motor (FM1) Paper size sensor (S5) assy Fusing unit interlock switch (S2) Inch/metric sensor/1 (PS7) assy Flickerless resistor (R1) TCR sensor (TCRS) Application of toner Part name 6.86 P. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Ref. 1.Field Service Ver.87 .77 P.87 Image transfer section Paper feed section P.80 P. 2007 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Cleaning parts list Section Paper feed section Separation roller Feed roller Upper/lower synchronizing rollers Paper dust remover Bypass transport roller/roll Mirrors IR Lens CCD sensor Scanner rails/bearings PH Image transfer section PH window Pre-image transfer lower guide plate Charge neutralizing plate Part name Ref.

Remove the original glass [3].0 Apr. 3. Remove the screw [1]. [2] A09AF2C013DA 6.48 [3] [1] 2.6. [1] Maintenance [2] A09AF2C012DA [1] 4.2 Control panel [1] 1. 2007 6. and remove the control panel left cover [2].1 Disassembly/assembly procedure Original glass/Original scanning glass 1.3 6. and remove two fixing holders [2].3. and remove the original scanning glass [2]. See P.3. Remove two screws [1]. 1. Remove the right cover. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. Remove two screws [1]. [2] A09AF2C014DA 42 .

[1] [2] A09AF2C016DA 6. [1] 4. Remove the control panel.0 Apr.3.3 Front cover 1.Field Service Ver. 1. Remove six screws [1]. 2007 [1] 6. Other bizhub 163/211/220 2. Disconnect the flat cable [1] and the connector [2]. 3. Open the front door. See P. Slide out the tray 1. Remove two screws [1].42 2. [1] [2] A09AF2C017DA 43 Maintenance . A09AF2C015DA [3] 3. and remove the front cover [2]. and remove the control panel [3].

1. 2007 Paper exit cover 6. Remove the screw [1]. and remove the paper exit cover [2]. See P.43 [1] 2.3. 1. Open the front door. [2] [1] [3] [2] A09AF2C020DA 44 . Remove two screws [1].4 1.6.3. Remove the C clip [1] and slide the front door [2] to the right to remove it. Remove the tray 1 [3].3. Slide out the tray 1. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.6 Tray 1 2. [2] A09AF2C018DA 6. 3. Remove the front cover.0 Apr. and remove two fixing plates [2]. [2] [1] A09AF2C019DA 6. 1.5 Maintenance Front door 2.

Remove five screws [1]. 1. and remove the left cover [2]. See P. 2007 6.Field Service Ver.3. See P.7 Left cover 6. Remove two screws [1]. [1] A09AF2C022DA 45 . [1] A09AF2C021DA 6.0 Apr. Remove the front cover. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance 1. Remove the front cover.43 [2] 2. and remove the paper exit tray [2].43 [2] 2.3.8 Paper exit tray 1.

9 1. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.10 Upper rear cover [1] [2] 1.3. [1] A09AF2C024DA 46 . Remove four screws [1]. Remove two screws [1]. Remove the paper exit tray.6. and remove the rear inside cover [2].0 Apr. 1.45 [1] 3. and remove the upper rear cover [2]. See P. [2] Maintenance A09AF2C023DA 6.45 2. See P. 2007 Rear inside cover 6. Remove the left cover.3.

[2] [1] A09AF2C027DA 47 . [1] A09AF2C025DA 6. Remove three screws [1]. Remove the upper rear cover.11 Left rear cover 6.46 [1] 2.0 Apr.12 Rear cover [1] [2] 1.Field Service Ver. 2007 6.3. 1. See P. [1] A09AF2C026DA 6. and remove the right rear cover [2]. Remove four screws [1].3.3. Remove nine screws [1]. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance 1. Remove the upper rear cover.13 Right rear cover 1.46 [2] [1] 2. and remove the rear cover [2]. and remove the left rear cover [2]. See P.

Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. 2007 Rear right cover [2] 6. Remove four screws [1].43 [2] 2. 1.3.15 Right cover Maintenance 1. Remove the front cover. Remove two screws [1].3. [1] A09AF2C029DA 6. See P. and remove the right cover [2].47 [1] 2. [1] A09AF2C028DA 6.0 Apr.16 Printer control board (PRCB) 1. Remove the rear cover.6. A09AF2C030DA 48 . See P. Unplug all connectors from the printer control board [1].14 1.3. and remove the rear right cover [2].

48 3.Field Service Ver. and remove the printer control board [2]. rewriting the firmware to the latest one. [2] [1] A09AF2C031DA 6. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance 3. See P. See P. Unplug all connectors from the MFP board [1].17 MFP board (MFPB) 1. [1] [1] [2] [1] A09AF2C033DA 49 . Remove the printer control board. 2007 [1] 6. [1] A09AF2C032DA [1] 4. 1. Remove four screws [1].47 2.0 Apr. Remove the rear cover.3. Remove five screws [1]. and remove the MFP board [2]. NOTE • When the printer control board is to be replaced.

0 Apr. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. 1. Unplug all connectors from the high voltage unit [1]. Remove the rear cover. 2007 NOTE • When the MFP board (MFPB) is replaced with a new one. parameter chip (U18) must be demounted from the old MFPB and remounted on the new MFPB. • When the MFP board is to be replaced. [3] [1] [2] A09AF2C503DA A A NOTE • Note the alignment notch marked with A on the parameter chip (U18) when mounting the IC.47 2. A09AF2C545DA 50 . Mount the parameter chip (U18) of the old MFPB on the new MFPB. See P. See P. rewriting the firmware to the latest one.48 [1] 3. Maintenance 4037F2C534DA 6.6.18 High voltage unit (HV1) 1.3. Remove the printer control board.

46 4. See P. Remove the left cover. and remove the protective cover 1 [2]. Remove the printer control board.0 Apr. Remove the MFP board. and remove the high voltage unit [2].Field Service Ver. Remove two screws [1].47 3. Remove the rear cover. See P.19 Power supply unit (DCPU) 1. Remove four screws [1].49 [1] [2] 6.48 5. See P. 1.45 2. [1] A09AF2C044DA 51 . Remove the harness from five wire saddles [1].3. [1] A09AF2C034DA [2] [1] 7. See P. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance 4. and remove the edge cover [2]. Remove the upper rear cover. See P. 2007 [1] [2] [1] 6. A09AF2C546DA 6.

Disconnect all connectors from the power supply unit [1].0 Apr. [2] [1] A09AF2C037DA 52 . and remove the power supply unit [2]. [1] [1] A09AF2C035DA 9. Remove six screws [1]. 2007 [1] [2] 8. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. and remove the protective cover 2 [2]. Maintenance [1] A09AF2C036DA [1] 10. Remove eight screws [1]. 1.6.

20 Paper size detect board (PSDTB) 6. Unhook two tabs [1]. See P. 1. Remove the rear cover. [1] [2] 5.0 Apr.Field Service Ver.3. [2] A09AF2C547DA [1] 4. 2007 6. and remove the holder [2]. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance A09AF2C548DA 1.47 2. Remove the lever [1]. Disconnect the connector [1]. and remove the paper size detect board [2]. [1] 3. A09AF2C549DA 53 . Slide out the tray 1.

[1] [1] [2] A09AF2C550DA 54 .45 [2] [3] 3. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. 1.22 Pre-image transfer register board (PITRB) 2. Remove the left cover.43 2. and remove the heater relay board [3]. Remove the front cover. See P.0 Apr. See P.21 1. Open the right door.3. [1] [2] Maintenance [1] A09AF2E628DA 6. 1. Remove two screws [1].6. 2007 Heater relay board (RYB): 200 V areas only 6. Disconnect two connectors [1] and remove three PWB supports [2].3. and remove the pre-image transfer register board [2].

See P.48 2. disconnect the connector [2].24 Toner hopper unit/Toner replenishing motor (M2) 1. See P. 2007 6. See P.Field Service Ver. Remove the paper exit tray.45 5. Remove three screws [1]. See P. Remove the toner bottle. Remove the rear right cover. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance 1. See P. Open the right door. Remove the front door.45 4.3.0 Apr.43 3. [3] [2] 3. Remove two screws [1]. and remove the manual bypass tray [3].3. See P. [1] A09AF2C038DA 6.18 [2] [1] 6. Remove the left cover. Remove the front cover. 1. and remove the unit cover [2].23 Manual bypass tray 6. [1] A09AF2C561DA 55 .44 2.

Remove the toner hopper unit [1]. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. Remove two screws [1]. [1] [1] A09AF2C562DA 8.0 Apr. [1] A09AF2C564DA 56 . 2007 7. [1] Maintenance A09AF2C563DA [2] [1] 9. 1. Disconnect two connectors [1].6. and remove the toner replenishing motor [2].

Laser beam generated during the above mentioned activity may cause blindness. [1] A09AF2C565DA [1] [1] 7.Field Service Ver. See P. Remove the left cover.3. 1. See P. Laser beam generated during the above mentioned activity may cause blindness. Disconnect the flat cable [2] and the connector [3] from the printer control board [1]. 1.45 3. See P. A09AF2C566DA 57 Maintenance . Remove the rear inside cover.47 4. Other bizhub 163/211/220 • Do not replace the printer head unit while the power is ON.45 5. Remove the front cover. Remove two cable holders [1] of the flat cable. See P. Remove the rear cover.46 [3] [2] 6.0 Apr. 2007 6. Remove the paper exit tray.25 PH unit CAUTION 6. See P. • Do not disassemble or adjust the printer head unit.43 2.

30 [1] [1] 2.6. See P.26 Disassembly of the fusing unit A. Remove the fusing unit. Maintenance [1] [1] A09AF2C568DA 6. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1]. A09AF2C569DA 58 .3. Remove three screws (with springs) [1]. 1. Removal of the thermistor and paper separator fingers 1. [1] A09AF2C567DA [2] [1] 9. 2007 8. Remove two pressure springs [1] on both ends of the unit.0 Apr. and remove the PH unit [2].

Remove the torsion coil spring [1]. 2007 [1] 6. [1] [2] [1] [2] A09AF2C571DA [1] [2] 5. three washers [2]. [1] A09AF2C572DA 59 . and remove the movable guide assy [2].Field Service Ver. Remove two bearings [1].0 Apr. A09AF2C570DA [1] [3] [2] 4. 1. and remove the fusing roller/rt [2]. Remove three shoulder screws [1]. and remove the fusing roller/rt cover [3]. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance [2] 3.

Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.0 Apr. Then. and remove the thermistor [2]. slide the paper separator finger assy cover [2] in the direction of the arrow and take it off. [1] [1] A09AF2C573DA [2] 6. [2] A09AF2C575DA 60 . 1. Remove the screw [1].6. 2007 NOTE • Install the right and left bearings [1] in the directions shown in the photo on the left. Maintenance [1] A09AF2C574DA [1] 7. Remove the screw [1].

1.42 [1] 2. Remove the original glass. and remove the CCD unit cover [2].3.0 Apr. [2] [1] A09AF2C577DA 61 .27 CCD unit A. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance 8. Removal procedure 1. 2007 [2] 6. [1] A09AF2C576DA 6. Remove four screws [1]. Unhook springs [1]. and remove the four paper separator fingers [2]. See P.Field Service Ver.

[2] [1] A09AF2C580DA 62 .0 Apr. Disconnect the connector [1]. 2007 3. Maintenance A09AF2C579DA [1] [1] 5. Remove three screws [1] (to which green paint has been applied). [1] A09AF2C578DA [1] 4. loosen or remove only these specified screws. NOTE • When removing the CCD Unit. 1. and remove the CCD unit [2]. Mark a line along the profile of the CCD unit mounting bracket [1] as shown on the left. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.6.

3. [2] [1] 3. [1] [1] [2] A09AF2C581DA NOTE • Removal of the scanner assy leaves the front and rear scanner drive cables attached with the fixing brackets. 1. 2. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance 1. Then. Remove the screw [1]. exposure lamp. and inverter board (PU2) 1. 2007 B. and remove the cable holder [2]. temporarily secure three screws [1] at the center of each of the screw slots.42 2. See P.28 Scanner.Field Service Ver. A09AF2C582DA 63 . Then. Remove two screws [1] (to which no red paint has been applied).146 [2] [1] A09AF2C580DA 6.0 Apr. Adjust the position of the CCD unit. Position the CCD unit [2] along the marking line. remove the scanner assy [2] from the scanner drive cables. See P. Remove the original glass and original scanning glass. Reinstallation procedure [1] [1] 6.

Remove two screws [1]. Maintenance [1] A09AF2C584DA [1] [2] [1] 6. Remove two screws [1].6. 1. and remove the exposure lamp [2]. 2007 4. and remove the scanner assy [2]. A09AF2C585DA 64 .0 Apr. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. disconnect the connector [2]. and remove the inverter board [3]. Disconnect the flat cable [1]. [1] [2] A09AF2C583DA [2] [1] [3] 5.

3. 1.29 Scanner motor (M4) 6.0 Apr. Remove the scanner motor harness from five wire saddles [1]. See P.47 [1] [1] [1] [1] 2. 2007 6. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance 1. A09AF2C586DA [2] 3. 5. Remove the right rear cover. [1] A09AF2C587DA [2] [1] [3] [2] 4. Loosen four screws [2]. and remove the scanner motor harness from the gear case assy [3]. Disconnect the connector [2] from the MFP board [1]. [2] [2] A09AF2C588DA 65 .Field Service Ver. Snap off the C-ring [1].

2007 6. See P.46 5.6. See P.0 Apr.47 4. Removal procedure 1. Remove the right rear cover. See P. Loosen two screws [1] (to which red paint has been applied) and remove the scanner assy [2]. Other bizhub 163/211/220 [2] [1] Field Service Ver. Remove the upper rear cover.47 6. Remove the rear cover.45 2. which differs from the removal procedure for the scanner assy as a single unit. and remove the scanner motor [2]. [1] A09AF2C589DA 6.43 3. Remove the left cover.30 Scanner drive cables A. Remove two screws [1]. Remove the front cover. See P.3. [1] [1] Maintenance [2] A09AF2C611DA NOTE • Loosen the two red painted screws to remove the scanner assy in this step. Remove the original glass and original scanning glass. 1. See P.42 7. 66 . See P.

1. A09AF2C612DA [2] [1] 9. Remove the rear cable [1] from the cable pulley [2]. Unhook the springs [1] from the cable hooks at the front and rear.Field Service Ver. A09AF2C613DA [2] [1] 10. Remove the front cable [1] from the cable pulley [2]. Other bizhub 163/211/220 8. A09AF2C614DA 67 Maintenance .0 Apr. 2007 [1] 6.

Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.0 Apr. [1] A09AF2C615DA [1] 12. Remove the screw [1] from the front cable pulley. Maintenance A09AF2C616DA [1] 13. Remove the screw [1] from the rear cable pulley. A09AF2C617DA 68 . Snap off the C-ring [1] from the front side of the pulley assy. 2007 11. 1.6.

Other bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance [1] 14. 2007 6. [1] A09AF2C620DA 69 . [2] [2] A09AF2C619DA [3] [2] [4] 16. Remove two screws [1] from the rear side of the pulley assy and remove the gear [2].Field Service Ver. Remove the cable [4] from the cable pulley [3]. and remove two bearings [2]. Pull out the shaft [1]. 1. A09AF2C618DA [1] 15. Snap off the C-ring [1] from the rear side of the pulley assy.0 Apr. 17.

1. [1] A09AF2C510DA 70 . Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. 2007 B. Wind the cable on side B around wire pulley 2 [1] four turns counterclockwise. starting with the slit at the bottom in the rear left of the pulley.6. Reinstallation procedure <Overall view> Wire pulley 2 Pulley D Wire pulley 1 Pulley C Pulley B Pulley A A09AF2C508DA Maintenance NOTE • The cables are color-coded and differ in type from each other: the front cable is silver. Pass the cable (black) through wire pulley 2 [1]. Side B Side A A09AF2C509DA 2. while the rear cable is black. [1] 1.0 Apr. • Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other.

Affix tape [1] to secure the cable to wire pulley 2 [2]. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance 3. starting with the slit at the top in the front left of the pulley. starting with the slit at the bottom in the front left of the pulley. [2] [1] A09AF2C512DA Side B 5. [1] Side A A09AF2C513DA 6. [1] A09AF2C511DA [1] 4. 1.0 Apr. Wind the cable on side A around wire pulley 1 [1] four turns counterclockwise. Wind the cable on side A around wire pulley 2 [1] four turns clockwise. 2007 6. Pass the cable (silver) through wire pulley 1 [1]. [1] A09AF2C514DA 71 .Field Service Ver.

NOTE • Make sure that the cable pulley is dowelled to the gear. Affix tape [1] to secure the cable to wire pulley 1 [2]. 2007 7. Fit two Bearings and snap on two C-rings. 1.0 Apr. 72 . [1] A09AF2C515DA [1] 8. 10. NOTE • Install the shaft as shown on the left. starting with the slit at the top in the rear left of the pulley. Use the two screws to secure the gear to wire pulley 2. Wind the cable on side B around wire pulley 1 [1] four turns clockwise. [2] Maintenance [1] A09AF2C516DA 9.6. Rear Side Front Side A09AF2C517DA 11. Mount the front and rear cable pulleys onto the shaft and install the shaft to the copier. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.

[1] A09AF2C519DA 14. 1. Wind the cable from pulley A [1] around pulley B [2]. NOTE • The direction in which the screw is installed differs between the front and rear.Field Service Ver.0 Apr. Wind the lower cable of wire pulley 1 around pulley A [1]. NOTE • Wind the cable around the outer groove in pulley B. 2007 6. bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance [2] [1] [1] [3] [2] A09AF2C518DA 13. Note the correct direction. Secure the front and rear cable pulleys [1] to the shaft [3] using the screw [2] each. [2] [1] A09AF2C520DA 73 . Other 12.

0 Apr. Wind the lower cable of wire pulley 2 around pulley C [1]. Pass the cable from pulley B [1] into the hole [2] in the IR frame.6. [2] [1] A09AF2C523DA 74 . Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. NOTE • Wind the cable around the outer groove in pulley D. 2007 15. Wind the cable from pulley C [1] around pulley D [2]. Maintenance [1] A09AF2C522DA 17. 1. [1] [2] A09AF2C521DA 16.

Pass the leading edge of each of the front and rear cables [1] into the space between the IR frame and copier frame. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance 18. [1] [1] A09AF2C525DA 21.Field Service Ver. [2] A09AF2C524DA 19.0 Apr. [1] A09AF2C526DA 75 . Affix tape to temporarily secure the cables to the copier frame. 2007 [1] 6. Pass the cable from pulley D [1] into the hole [2] in the IR frame. NOTE Wind the cable around the inner groove in pulley B. 20. Wind the upper cable of wire pulley 1 around pulley B [1] and hook it onto the hook. 1.

NOTE • Wind the cable around the inner groove in pulley D.3.0 Apr. 1. Hook a spring to the leading edges of the front and rear cables [1]. [1] A09AF2C527DA [1] Maintenance 23. 24. A09AF2C528DA 25. Adjust the position of the scanner and the 2nd/3rd mirrors carriage. 26.6.146 6. Temporarily secure the scanner to the front and rear cables. Remove the rear cover. and remove the metal plate [2]. See P. Wind the upper cable of wire pulley 2 around pulley D [1] and hook it onto the hook. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.31 Main motor (M1) 1. Peel off the tape used to temporarily secure the cables to the machine frame. 2007 22.47 [2] 2. Peel off the pieces of tape that secure the front and rear cable pulleys. See P. Remove two screws [1]. [1] A09AF2C053DA 76 .

[1] A09AF2C591DA 77 .32 Power unit cooling fan motor (FM2) 1. and remove the protective cover [2]. Remove the printer control board. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance 3. See P. Remove the left cover. Remove two screws [1].0 Apr. Remove the MFP board. 1. and remove the main motor [3]. Remove nine screws [1]. unplug the connector [2]. unplug the connector [2]. [1] A09AF2C039DA 6. and upper rear cover.Field Service Ver.47.46 2.3. P. See P. rear cover.48 3. P. and remove the power unit cooling fan motor [3]. [1] [1] [1] [2] [3] A09AF2C590DA 5.45.49 [1] [2] [1] 4. 2007 [1] [3] [2] 6. See P. Remove four screws [1].

1. Remove the rear right cover. Open the right door. [1] [1] [1] A09AF2C594DA 78 .30 4. See P. Remove the image transfer roller assy. 3. Remove seven screws [1]. [3] [2] [2] Maintenance [1] A09AF2C592DA NOTE • Use care not to lose the two springs. Remove the screw [1]. and remove the duct assy [2]. and remove the mounting bracket [2]. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. and remove the transport unit holder [3]. See P.48 2. [1] [2] [1] 5. Remove four screws [1].33 1.6.0 Apr. [1] [1] A09AF2C593DA [1] [2] [1] 6. unhook two tabs [2]. 2007 Fusing cooling fan motor (FM1) 6.3.

Remove two screws [1]. Unplug two connectors [1]. [2] A09AF2C597DA 79 . 2007 [1] [1] 6. Remove the rear cover. [2] [3] A09AF2C595DA 6.3. and remove the paper size sensor assy [2].Field Service Ver. and remove the fusing cooling fan motor [3]. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance 7. [1] 3.34 Paper size sensor (S5) assy 1.0 Apr. See P. A09AF2C596DA [1] [1] 4. Remove the screw [1]. Slide out the paper feed tray/1.47 2. 1. unplug the connector [2].

[1] A09AF2C040DA 3. Remove the rear cover. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1]. Maintenance [1] A09AF2C041DA [1] 4. See P.47 2. 1.35 1.0 Apr.6. 2007 Fusing unit interlock switch (S2) 6.3. Remove two screws [1] (to which red paint has been applied). make sure that the connectors are connected properly. Unplug four connectors [1]. [1] [2] A09AF2C042DA 80 . NOTE • When installing the fusing unit interlock switch assy. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. and remove the fusing unit interlock switch assy [2].

[2] A09AF2C043DA 81 . Unhook two tabs [1]. 1. Connect the four connectors to the fusing unit interlock switch assy. Temporarily secure the fusing unit interlock switch [1] using two screws [2] (to which red paint has been applied). Fit the switch holder to the fusing unit interlock switch. 2007 [2] 6. [1] 3.Field Service Ver. and remove the fusing unit interlock switch [2]. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance 5. [1] [1] A09AF2C598DA <Fusing unit interlock switch reinstallation procedure> 1.0 Apr. 2.

and then use a tester to make sure that the fusing unit interlock switch is conducting between 2A and 2B. and then use a tester to make sure that the fusing unit interlock switch is not conducting between 2A and 2B. 2007 4.5 mm thick portion of gauge. Close the right door. 1. Close the right door. insert the gauge [1] between the projection of lever and the top surface of fusing unit interlock switch [2]. and then use a tester to make sure that the fusing unit interlock switch is not conducting between 2A and 2B. 3A and 3B. Open the right door. With the right door closed. and then use a tester to make sure that the fusing unit interlock switch is conducting between 2A and 2B. 82 .5 mm. 6. <for bizhub 211/220> 7. 8. repeat adjustment again from step 4. NOTE • Use the 0. 3A and 3B. NOTE • If there is any abnormality in conducting check.0 Apr.6. <bizhub 163> [2] <bizhub 211/220> Maintenance [1] A09AF2E633DA <for bizhub 163> 5. Open the right door. • Insert the gauge between the rear side (projection) of lever and the top surface of fusing unit interlock switch. and then secure the switch holder so that the gap is 0. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.

Remove the screw [1].47 2. Remove the harness from the wire saddle. See P. and remove the flickerless resistor [3].3.48 [2] 3.Field Service Ver.37 Flickerless resistor (R1) (Only for 200 V areas of bizhub 163) Maintenance 1. 4. 2007 6. See P. Remove the rear cover. See P. Other bizhub 163/211/220 1.0 Apr.47 [2] 2. disconnect the connector [2]. 1.3. disconnect the connector [2]. Remove the rear cover.36 Inch/metric sensor/1 (PS7) assy (3rd area only) 6. [1] [3] A09AF2E634DA 6. Remove the screw [1]. [1] [3] A09AF2E635DA 83 . and remove the inch/metric sensor/1 assy [3]. Remove the printer control board.

6.138 8. Separate the IU into the drum assy and developing assy. 2007 Replacing the TCR sensor (TCRS) 6.20 2. See P. Install the IU in the copier and run “ATDC AUTO ADJUST” of the Service Mode. Install the TCR sensor and the developer scattering prevention plate.26 3. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.38 1. and remove the screw [2] and the TCR sensor [3]. Maintenance A09AF2C560DA 5.27 [2] [3] [1] 4. Assemble the drum assy to the developing assy to reconstruct the IU. Remove the developer scattering prevention plate. See P. 84 . Dump the developer. See P. Disconnect the connector [1].6. 7.0 Apr. 1. See P. Enter the adjustment value on the adjust label.3.

3.39 Application of toner 6.0 Apr. With the IU divided into the drum assy and developing assy. 1. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance NOTE • Perform these steps when the PC drum and/or cleaning blade have been replaced. install the PC positioning jig [1] in the rear of the developing assy. [1] A09AF2C506DA 85 . 1. (See the Parts Guide Manual. Using a brush.) [1] A09AF2C504DA <<Area to which toner is to be applied>> 10-15 mm 20-30 mm 20-25 mm PC drum A09AF2C505DA 2. NOTE • Ready the PC positioning jig (pivot shaft) separately. 2007 6. apply a light coat of toner to the surface of the PC drum [1].Field Service Ver.

Hold both ends [1] of the PC drum with your both hands and turn the PC drum a half turn in the direction of the arrow. wipe the separation roller [1] clean of dirt. [1] [1] A09AF2C507DA 6. A09AF2C599DA 86 .0 Apr. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.15 [1] 2. 1. Maintenance 6. See P.6.1 Separation roller 1. 2007 3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.4.4 Cleaning procedure NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol. Remove the separation roller assy.

4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Open the right door.0 Apr. See P. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance 1. 2. [1] 2. 2007 6. wipe the feed roller [1] clean of dirt. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. wipe the upper and lower synchronizing rollers [1] clean of dirt. Slide out the tray 1.Field Service Ver.20 [1] 3.2 Feed roller 6. Remove the imaging unit.4. 1. A09AF2C600DA 6. A09AF2C601DA 87 .3 Upper/Lower Synchronizing Rollers 1.

0 Apr. [1] A09AF2C038DA [1] 4. Remove the rear right cover.4.18 [1] 2. Open the right door. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 1. [3] [2] 3. Remove the paper dust remover assy.6.4 1.4. See P.48 2. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. disconnect the connector [2]. Using a brush. 2007 Paper dust remover 6. See P.5 Maintenance Bypass transport roller/roll 1. A09AF2C045DA 88 . Remove two screws [1]. and remove the manual bypass assy [3]. whisk dust and dirt off the paper dust remover [1]. wipe the bypass transport roller [1] clean of dirt. A09AF2C602DA 6.

A09AF2C604DA 89 .7 Lens 1. See P.4. wipe the mirrors clean of dirt. A09AF2C603DA 6. wipe the lens [1] clean of dirt.6 Mirrors 1. wipe the bypass transport roll [1] clean of dirt. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.Field Service Ver. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance 5. See P. [1] A09AF2C046DA 6. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.42 2.42 [1] 2.0 Apr. 2007 6. Remove the original glass.4. Remove the original glass. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 1.

Remove four screws [1]. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. A09AF2C605DA [1] 4. A09AF2C606DA 90 .6. Pulling the tabs [1] on both sides of the lens cover. wipe the CCD sensor [1] clean of dirt. Remove the original glass.0 Apr. See P.42 [1] 2. 1. and remove the CCD unit cover [2]. [2] [1] A09AF2C577DA [1] Maintenance 3.4. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.8 1. 2007 CCD Sensor 6. remove the lens cover [2].

9 Scanner rails/bearings 6. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Maintenance 1.10 PH window 1. apply oil (copier lubricant A or FLOIL 947P). See P. See P. [1] A09AF2C608DA 91 . 1. wipe the PH window [1] clean of dirt.0 Apr. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.45 4.43 2. NOTE • After the scanner rails and bearings have been cleaned.45 3. See P.Field Service Ver. 2007 6. A09AF2C607DA 6. Remove the paper exit tray. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Remove the front cover. See P.42 2.4. Remove the left cover. Remove the original glass.4. wipe the scanner rails and bearings clean of dirt.

6. [1] 1.12 Maintenance Charge neutralizing plate 2. • Do not allow the soft cloth to be caught by the tip of the charge neutralizing plate. [1] A09AF2C609DA 6. 2007 Pre-Image transfer lower guide plate 2.4. Open the right door. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. wipe the charge neutralizing plate [1] clean of dirt. wipe the pre-image transfer lower guide plate [1] clean of dirt.6.0 Apr. Other bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. A09AF2C610DA 92 .11 1. Open the right door. NOTE • Use care not to allow the image transfer roller to be touched with alcohol. 1.

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007

6. Other
bizhub 163/211/220

6.5
6.5.1

Option counter
Installation of the key counter
[1]

1. Cut out the knockout [1] from the right cover.

A09AF2C047DA

[1]

2. Using two screws [1], secure the counter mounting bracket [2].
Maintenance

[2]

A09AF2C048DA

[1]

3. Connect the key counter socket connector [1].

A09AF2C049DA

93

6. Other
bizhub 163/211/220

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007 4. Using two screws [1], secure the key counter socket [2].

[2]

[1]

A09AF2C050DA

[2]

5. Using two screws [1], secure the key counter cover [2].

Maintenance

[1]

A09AF2C051DA

6. Plug in the key counter [1]. NOTE • When the Key Counter is mounted, set “MACHINE COUNTER” of the Security mode to “DISABLE.” See P.145

[1]

A09AF2C052DA

94

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007

7. How to use the adjustment section
bizhub 163/211/220 Adjustment / Setting

Adjustment/Setting
7. How to use the adjustment section
• “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. A. Advance checks • Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made. Check to see if: 1. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. 2. The power supply is properly grounded. 3. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). 4. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity, direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the installation site. 5. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. 6. The density is properly selected. 7. The original glass, slit glass, or related part is dirty. 8. Correct paper is being used for printing. 9. The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC drum, etc.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. 10. Toner is not running out. B. Precautions for service jobs 1. To unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures. 2. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, use utmost care not to be caught in the scanner cables or gears of the exposure unit. 3. Special care should be used when handling the fusing unit which can be extremely hot. 4. The developing unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. 5. Take care not to damage the PC drum with a tool or similar device. 6. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands.

95

8. Utility Mode
bizhub 163/211/220

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007

8.
8.1

Utility Mode
Utility Mode function tree
Utility Mode Ref. page P.99 P.99 P.99 P.100 P.100 P.100 P.100 P.101 P.101 P.101 P.101 P.101 P.102 P.102 P.103 P.103

• Utility mode is used to make settings for the utility functions.

MACHINE SETTING

AUTO PANEL RESET ENERGY SAVE MODE AUTO SHUT OFF DENSITY (ADF) DENSITY (BOOK) PRINT DENSITY LCD CONTRAST KEY SPEED SETTING LANGUAGE BUZZER VOLUME *1 INITIAL MODE *1 SCAN THRESHOLD *2

PAPER SOURCE SETUP

INCH/METRIC TRAY1 PAPER PAPER TYPE

CUSTOM SIZE MEMORY

MEMORY1 MEMORY2

Adjustment / Setting

USER MANAGEMENT

DRUM DEHUMIDIFY TONER REPLENISHER

P.103 P.104 P.104 P.104 ACCOUNT TRACK MODE ACCOUNT NO. REG. ACCOUNT TRACK DATA P.105 P.105 P.105 P.105 IP ADDRESS SETTING *3 DNS CONFIG. *3 GATEWAY TX *4 WEB SETTING *3 LPD SETTING *3 SLP SETTING *3 SNMP SETTING *3 P.105

ADMIN. MANAGEMENT

ADMINISTRATOR NO. AUTO SHUT OFF ACCOUNT TRACK

REMOTE MONITOR *1 NETWORK SETTING *3

96

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007
Utility Mode ADMIN. MANAGEMENT E-MAIL SETTING 1 *3 SENDER NAME *3 E-MAIL ADDERSS *3

8. Utility Mode
bizhub 163/211/220 Adjustment / Setting
Ref. page P.106

SMTP SERVER ADDR. *3 SMTP PORT NO. *3 SMTP TIMEOUT *3 TEXT INSERT *3 DEFAULT SUBJECT *3 POP BEFORE SMTP *3 E-MAIL MODE *4 E-MAIL SETTING 2 *3 POP3 SERVER ADDR. *3 POP3 PORT NO. *3 POP3 TIMEOUT *3 POP3 ACCOUNT *3 POP3 PASSWORD *3 AUTO RECEPTION *4 REPLY ADDRESS *4 HEADER PRINT *4 COMM. SETITNG *1 TONE/PULSE *1 LINE MONITOR *1 PSTN/PBX *1 USER SETTING NTP SERVER ADDRESS *5 P.106 TIME ZONE *5 DATE&TIME *1 USER FAX NO. *1 USER NAME *1 COPY SETTING 1 PAPER PRIORITY QUALITY PRIORITY DENSITY PRIORITY DENSITY LEVEL AUTO MANUAL BINDING POSITION MARGIN SETTING ERASE SETTING SMALL ORIGINAL COPY SETTING 2 COPY PRIORITY OUTPUT PRIORITY 4IN1 COPY ORDER MIXED ORIGINAL DUPLEX COPY CRISSCROSS MODE P.106 P.106 P.106 P.106 P.106 P.107 P.107 P.107 P.107 P.107 P.107 P.108 P.108 P.108 P.108 P.108 P.109 P.109 P.109 P.106 P.106

97

8. Utility Mode
bizhub 163/211/220
Utility Mode DIAL REGISTRATION *1 ONE-TOUCH DIAL *1 SPEED DIAL *1 GROUP DIAL *1 PROGRAM DIAL *1 FAX REGISTRATION *1 MAIL BOX *1 RELAY BOX *1 FAX TX OPERATION *1 DENSITY LEVEL *1 QUALITY PRIORITY *1 DEFAULT TX *1 HEADER *1 FAX RX OPERATION *1 MEMORY RX MODE *1 NO. of RINGS *1 REDUCTION RX *1 RX PRINT *1 RX MODE *1 FORWARD *1 FOOTER *1 SELECT TRAY *1 CLOSED NETWORK *1 REPORTING *1 ACTIVITY REPORT *1 RESERVATION REPORT *1

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007
Ref. page P.109

P.109

P.109

P.109

P.109

Adjustment / Setting

TX RESULT REPORT *1 RX RESULT REPORT *1 SCAN SETTING *3 RESOLUTION *3 IMAGE FORMAT *3 CODING METHOD *3 P.109

*1: It will be displayed only when the FK-506 is mounted. *2: It will be displayed only when the NC-503 or FK-506 is mounted. *3: It will be displayed only when the NC-503 is mounted. *4: It will be displayed only when the NC-503 and FK-506 is mounted. *5: It will be displayed only when the NC-503 is mounted. (It will not be displayed only when the NC-503 and FK-506 is mounted.)

98

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007

8. Utility Mode
bizhub 163/211/220
4min 5min OFF

8.2
8.2.1

Utility Mode function setting procedure
Procedure

1. Press the Utility key. 2. The Utility Mode screen will appear. 8.2.2 Exiting

• Press the Back key. 8.2.3 Changing the setting value in Utility Mode functions ▼ ▼ ▲ ▲

• Select the appropriate item using [ ▲ / ▼ / / ] key, or the 10-key pad. • Select the setting value using [ ▲ / ▼ / / ] key, or the 10-key pad. 1. Validate the selected setting value using the OK key. 2. To go back to the previous screen, press the Back key.

8.3
8.3.1

Setting in the Utility Mode
MACHINE SETTING

A. AUTO PANEL RESET
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the time it takes the auto panel reset function, which resets the panel settings when the set period of time elapses after a copy cycle has been completed or the last key operated, to be activated. • The default setting is 1 min. OFF 30sec “1min” 2min 3min

B. ENERGY SAVE MODE
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the time it takes the machine to enter the energy saver mode after a copy cycle has been completed or the last key operated. • The default setting is 15 min. 1 to 240 min.

C. AUTO SHUT OFF
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the time it takes the auto shut OFF function, which shuts down the machine when the set period of time elapses after a copy cycle has been completed or the last key operated, to be activated. • The default setting is OFF. ON

• If selecting “ON”, set the time that the AUTO SHUT OFF function is turned ON. 15 to 240 min.

99

Adjustment / Setting

8. Utility Mode
bizhub 163/211/220

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007

D. DENSITY (ADF) • This setting is available when the optional DF-502 or DF-605 is mounted.
Functions Use • To set the reading image density level when the automatic document feeder is used. MODE1 : To lower the image density to prevent a dirty copy from being produced. MODE2 : To produce a copy having an image density equivalent to that of the original. • The default setting is MODE1. “MODE1” MODE2

Setting/ Procedure

NOTE • The low image density is set as the default value to prevent a dirty copy from being produced.

E. DENSITY (BOOK)
Functions Use • To set the reading image density level when the original glass is used. MODE1 : To produce a copy having an image density equivalent to that of the original. MODE2 : To lower the image density to prevent a dirty copy from being produced. • The default setting is MODE1. “MODE1” MODE2

Setting/ Procedure

F. PRINT DENSITY
Functions

Adjustment / Setting

Use Setting/ Procedure

• To set the print density in 5 scales. • The default setting is displayed with LIGHT . DARK

G. LCD CONTRAST
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the LCD display contrast in 4 scales. • The default setting is displayed with LIGHT . DARK

100

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007 H. KEY SPEED SETTING
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

8. Utility Mode
bizhub 163/211/220 Adjustment / Setting

• To set the time that the repetitive input gets started when keeping on pressing the key. • To set the cycle time of the repetitive input. <TIME TO START> • The default setting is 1.0 sec. 0.1sec 0.3sec 0.5sec “1.0sec” 1.5sec 2.0sec 2.5sec 3.0sec

<INTERVAL> • The default setting is 0.1sec. “0.1sec” 0.3sec 0.5sec 1.0sec 1.5sec 2.0sec 2.5sec 3.0sec

I.

LANGUAGE
• To select the language displayed on the control panel. • Select the desired language and touch [OK] to set the language.

Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

J. BUZZER VOLUME See P.19 of the FK-506 service manual K. INITIAL MODE See P.19 of the FK-506 service manual L. SCAN THRESHOLD See P.19 of the FK-506 service manual

101

8. Utility Mode
bizhub 163/211/220

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007

8.3.2

PAPER SOURCE SETUP

A. INCH/METRIC
Functions Use • To set the paper size unit of each tray. • To change the size unit of the paper to be used. NOTE • If it is not set appropriately, auto detection of paper size cannot be made. • Tray 2 to 5 can be set only when the optional PF-502 is mounted. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is METRIC. <Step> 1. Select the tray. 2. Select the appropriate paper size type. INCH

“METRIC”

B. TRAY1 PAPER (1) PAPER SIZE
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the paper size loaded in the tray/1. • The default setting is AUTO. <Step> 1. Select the type of paper. “AUTO” SIZE INPUT

POSTCARD

MEMORY1

MEMORY2

Adjustment / Setting

• When selecting “SIZE INPUT”, enter the size with the numeric keypad. Setting range : 140 to 432 mm (Width) : 90 to 297 mm (Length) • The size registered on [COUSTOME SIZE MEMORY] of [Utility] is set for [Memory1]/ [Memory 2]. NOTE • When the type of paper is set other than “AUTO”, the paper set to the tray 1 cannot be used with Fax mode.

(2) MEDIA TYPE
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the media type loaded in the tray/1. • The default setting is PLAIN. “PLAIN” TRANSPARENCY CARD ENVELOPE

NOTE • When the media type is set other than “PLAIN”, the paper set to the tray 1 cannot be used with Fax mode.

102

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007 C. PAPER TYPE
Functions Use • To set the special paper type of each tray.

8. Utility Mode
bizhub 163/211/220 Adjustment / Setting

• To set whether [Auto paper select]/[Auto tray change] is used for each tray according to the paper type to be used. • The combination of [Auto paper select]/[Auto tray change] can be selected according to the paper type (“PLAIN”, “RECYCLE”, “SPECIAL”). PLAIN: Auto paper select can be selected. Auto tray change is available. RECYCLE: Auto paper select cannot be selected. Auto tray change is available. SPECIAL: Auto paper select cannot be selected. Auto tray change is not available. NOTE • Tray 2 to 5 can be set only when the optional PF-502 is mounted.

Setting/ Procedure

• The default setting is PLAIN. <Step> 1. Select the paper source. 2. Select the type of paper. “PLAIN” RECYCLE

SPECIAL

1-SIDE*

* Appears only when the AD-504 (bizhub 211 only) is installed. 8.3.3
Functions Use

CUSTOM SIZE MEMORY
• To set the custom size paper commonly used. • When setting the paper size of Tray 1 after selecting [Utility] → [PAPER SOURCE SETUP] → [TRAY1 PAPER], the size registered with this memory setting will be available. • Up to 2 digits can be set (MEMORY 1/MEMORY 2) 1. Select [CUSTOME SIZE MEMORY] and press OK key. 2. Select [MEMORY 1] or [MEMORY 2] and press OK key. 3. Input the paper size with the numeric keypad.

Setting/ Procedure

8.3.4

USER MANAGEMENT

A. DRUM DEHUMIDIFY
Functions Use • To run a drum dry sequence. • The drum dry sequence is run when an image problem occurs due to condensation formed on the surface of the PC drum as a result of a sudden change in temperature or an increased humidity. <Step> 1. Select [DRUM DEHUMIDIFY] and press the [OK] key. 2. The drum dry sequence is automatically terminated after the lapse of a predetermined period of time and the initial screen reappears.

Setting/ Procedure

103

8. Utility Mode
bizhub 163/211/220

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007

B. TONER REPLENISHER
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To execute Toner replenishment forcibly to adjust the tone to the T/C level set. • To be used when a large number of copies are made for the original with high density and ID is deteriorated due to the decrease of T/C ratio. • When [TONER REPLENISHER] is executed, the machine first detects the current toner density. If it is found that the density is lower than the reference value, supply of toner is replenished and then toner is agitated. If the density is found to be higher than the reference value, the machine simply agitates toner to complete the sequence. <Step> 1. Select [TONER REPLENISHER] and press the [OK] key. 2. The toner replenisher sequence is automatically terminated after a given period of time or when the specified toner density is recovered. Then, the initial screen reappears.

8.3.5

ADMIN. MANAGEMENT

• The ADMIN. MANAGEMENT will be available by entering the administrator number (6 digits) set by the ADMIN. MANAGEMENT or SERVICE MODE. (The administrator password is initially set to “000000.”) <ADMIN. MANAGEMENT mode setting procedure> 1. Press the Utility key. 2. Select “ADMIN. MANAGEMENT.” 3. Type the 6-digit administrator number and press the [OK] key. A. ADMINISTRATOR NO.
Adjustment / Setting
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To change the Administrator number currently registered to the other number. 1. Select [ADMINISTRATOR NO.] and press OK key. 2. Input the administrator number currently registered with the numeric keypad, and press OK key. 3. Input the administrator number newly registered with the numeric keypad, and press OK key. 4. Input the administrator number currently registered again with the numeric keypad, and press OK key.

B. AUTO SHUT OFF
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To enable or disable the setting of auto shut OFF. • The default setting is ENABLE. DISABLE “ENABLE”

104

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007 C. ACCOUNT TRACK (1) ACCOUNT TRACK MODE
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To select whether to turn ON or OFF the account track function. • The default setting is OFF. ON “OFF”

8. Utility Mode
bizhub 163/211/220

(2) ACCESS NO. REG.
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register a 3-digit (001 to 999) account number used for the account track function, or to change or delete a previously set account number. <Registration procedure> 1. Select [ACCESS NO. REG.] and press OK key. 2. Input any account number with the numeric keypad, and press OK key. • Select [ADD] to continue the registration (Up to 50 number can be registered) • Select [RETURN] to finish the registration. <Change/delete procedure> 1. Select [ACCESS NO. REG.] and press OK key. 2. Input the corresponding account number with the numeric keypad, and press OK key. 3. Select [CHECK/EDIT] and press OK key. 4. Select the number to be changed or deleted. • Press OK key and input the new number to change the setting. • Press Clear/Stop key and select [YES] to delete the setting.

Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

• To display or clear the total count value of a specific account. • To clear the total count values of all accounts under control. • Output the account track list. <Display/clear procedure> 1. Select [ACCOUNT TRACK DATA] and press OK key. 2. Select [DISPLAY] and press the [OK] key. 3. Select the account number, for which the count is to be checked, and press the [OK] key. 4. The total count value of the account number selected will be displayed. • To clear the count value, press the Clear/Stop key. <All clear procedure> 1. Select [ACCOUNT TRACK DATA] and press OK key. 2. Select [ALL COUNTER CLEAR] and press the [OK] key.

D. REMOTE MONITOR See P.20 of the FK-506 service manual E. NETWORK SETTING See P.14 of the IC-206/NC-503 service manual

105

Adjustment / Setting

(3) ACCOUNT TRACK DATA

8. Utility Mode
bizhub 163/211/220

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007

F. E-MAIL SETTING 1 See P.15 of the IC-206/NC-503 service manual G. E-MAIL SETTING 2 See P.18 of the IC-206/NC-503 service manual H. COMM.SETTING See P.21 of the FK-506 service manual I. USER SETTING (1) NTP SERVER ADDRESS See P.19 of the IC-206/NC-503 service manual (2) TIME ZONE See P.19 of the IC-206/NC-503 service manual (3) DATE&TIME See P.19 of the IC-206/NC-503 service manual (4) USER FAX NO. See P.22 of the FK-506 service manual (5) USER NAME See P.22 of the FK-506 service manual 8.3.6 COPY SETTING 1

Adjustment / Setting

A. PAPER PRIORITY
Functions Use • To set the tray to be prioritized when AUTO ZOOM setting is selected. NOTE • Tray 2 to 5 can be set only when the optional PF-502 is mounted. • MULTIBYPASS can be set only when the optional MB-501 is mounted. • The default setting is TRAY1. “TRAY1” TRAY2 TRAY3 TRAY4 TRAY5 MULTI BYPASS

Setting/ Procedure

106

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007 B. QUALITY PRIORITY
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

8. Utility Mode
bizhub 163/211/220

• To set the priority image quality mode that is selected when the power switch is turned ON or the Panel Reset key is pressed. • The default setting is TEXT/PHOTO. “TEXT/PHOTO” TEXT PHOTO

C. DENSITY PRIORITY
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the priority density that is selected when the power switch is turned ON or the Panel Reset key is pressed. • The default setting is AUTO. “AUTO” MANUAL

D. DENSITY LEVEL (1) AUTO
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the density level when the auto density is selected. • The default setting is displayed with LIGHT . DARK

(2) MANUAL
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

• The default setting is displayed with LIGHT

. DARK

E. BINDING POSITION
Functions Use • To set the first page to be scanned when copies are made from a book, whether it is on the left or on the right. LEFT: Scanned from the left page (Bound on the left side) RIGHT: Scanned from the right page (Bound on the right side) • The default setting is LEFT. “LEFT” RIGHT

Setting/ Procedure

F. MARGIN SETTING
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the file margin width when making copies with a file margin. • The default setting is 10 mm. 0 to 20 mm (1 step: 1 mm)

107

Adjustment / Setting

• To set the density level when the manual density is selected.

8. Utility Mode
bizhub 163/211/220

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007

G. ERASE SETTING
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • For copies made using CENTER/FRAME ERASE function, you can set an erase width individually on LEFT, UPPER, and FRAME. • The default setting is 10 mm for all the positions. <Step> 1. Select the erase position. 2. Set the erase width. 5 to 20 mm (1 step: 1 mm)

H. SMALL ORIGINAL
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable copying when an original of a size smaller than the detectable one is loaded in the auto paper mode. • The default setting is DISABLE. “DISABLE” ENABLE

8.3.7

COPY SETTING 2

A. COPY PRIORITY
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the priority copy mode, either auto paper, auto zoom, or manual, selected when the power switch is turned ON or Panel Reset key is pressed. • The default setting is AUTO PAPER SELECT “AUTO PAPER SELECT” AUTO ZOOM MANUAL

Adjustment / Setting

B. OUTPUT PRIORITY
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the priority finishing function, either non-sort, sort, or group. • The default setting is NON-SORT. “NON-SORT” SORT GROUP

C. 4IN1 COPY ORDER
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the layout of copy images in 4in1 copies. • The default setting is PATTERN1. PATTERN1 PATTERN2

108

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007 D. MIXED ORIGINAL • This setting is available only when the optional DF-502 is installed.
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

8. Utility Mode
bizhub 163/211/220 Adjustment / Setting

• To set whether or not to select the mixed original mode when the power switch is turned ON or Panel Reset key is pressed. • The default setting is OFF. “OFF” ON

E. DUPLEX COPY (bizhub 211/220 only)
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To select whether or not double-sided printing is used. The optional duplex unit must be installed • The default setting is OFF. “OFF” ON

F. CRISSCROSS MODE
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • When conditions necessary for crisscross sorting are met, crisscross sorting can be set to ON or OFF. • The default setting is ON. “ON” OFF

8.3.8

DIAL REGISTRATION

See P.22 of the FK-506 service manual 8.3.9 FAX REGISTRATION

See P.23 of the FK-506 service manual 8.3.10 FAX TX OPERATION

See P.23 of the FK-506 service manual 8.3.11 FAX RX OPERATION

See P.24 of the FK-506 service manual 8.3.12 REPORTING

See P.36 of the FK-506 service manual 8.3.13 SCAN SETTING

See P.20 of the IC-206/NC-503 service manual

109

9.0 Apr. Adjustment item list bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. 4 5 3 6 2 Replacement Part/Service Job Tray1 Replace paper dust remover assy Replace PC drum charge corona assy Adjustment/Setting Items ID ADJUST VG ADJUST LEADING EDGE SERVICE’S CHOICE TRAILING EDGE VERTICAL EDGE LOOP Ad. Adjustment item list Cleaning scanner rail/bushing Replace developer and toner agitating seal 5* 1* 3 1. 2007 9. (TRAY1) FUSER TEMP. 1. 110 Replace cleaning blade Replace separation roll assy Replace feed roller Replace PC drum . CCD APS SIZE PRN MAIN REGIST PRN SUB REGIST Service Mode CCD MAIN ZOOM CCD SUB ZOOM ADJUST CCD MAIN REGIST CCD SUB REGIST ADF SUB ZOOM ADF MAIN REGIST ADF SUB REGIST 1 ADF SUB REGIST 2 CLEAR DATA PM COUNTER SUPPLIES COUNETER PAPAER FEED TEST ATDC AUTO ADJUST FUNCTION PRN TEST PATTERN ADF FEED TEST SCAN TEST Mechanical No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 3* 4* 3* 3* Adjustment / Setting 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 Focus-positioning of scanner and 2nd/ 26 3rd mirrors carriage CCD unit position adjustment Utility Mode Service Mode Parameter chip (U18) 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 1 1 1 Others FW update Application of toner to PC drum Application of lubricant Change of developer *: Check when setting is changed.

*: Check when setting is changed.0 Apr.9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 24 19 10 No Field Service Ver. 2007 34 1 Replace image transfer roller assy Replace fusing unit Replace ozone filter 4 3 2 Replace CCD assy Replace MFP board 4* 1. 1. Items are numbered by the priority if there is any. Adjustment item list 111 bizhub 163/211/220 . Adjustment / Setting 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 9. 3 Replace TCR sensor Replace PH unit Memory Clear 4 3 Install scanner drive cable 1 Add original size sensor Replace pick-up roller Replace feed roller Replace separation roller Replace pick-up roller Replace feed roller Replace separation roller 2* 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 13 12 11 1 DF-605 1 1 1 DF-502 1 1 PF-502 3* 2 1 Replace feed roller 3* 2 1 Replace feed roller 3* Replace separation roller assy MB-501 2 1 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 21 20 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 23 22 1 2 1 2 ✽ This table shows the list of adjustment items when replacing a part.

. be sure to take notes of the settings and adjustment data of Utility Mode. After the memory clear has been executed. Service Mode. (PRN MAIN REGIST/PRN SUB REGIST/CCD MAIN ZOOM/CCD SUB ZOOM/CCD MAIN REGIST/CCD SUB REGIST) • The ATDC value at the time of setting up of the PC drum unit is also entered on the adjust label at installation. Adjustment item list bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.9. 2007 NOTE • Before executing a memory clear. • The setting value after ATDC adjustment is written down in a adjust label. and adjust modes. re-enter those data. Security Mode. 1.0 Apr. • The following data of “ADJUST” are indicated at the factory on the adjust label located inside the front door (The other side of the toner replacement label). Adjustment / Setting 112 .

2. Press the Utility key. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Adjustment / Setting 10.1 Procedure 1. 3. To go back to previous screen.1 Service Mode function setting procedure NOTE • Care must be used to ensure that only the personnel who are involved in service jobs know the procedure to enter the Service Mode. 113 . 10. 10. 2007 10.Field Service Ver. Changing the setting value in Service Mode functions ▼▼ ▲▲ Select the desired item using [ ▲ / ▼ / / ] key.0 Apr.1. Select the setting value using [ ▲ / ▼ / / ] key. 4. 2. Service Mode 10.3 1. or the 10-key pad. 10. Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1 3.1. Press the following keys in this order. The Service Mode menu screen will appear. 1. Validate the selection by pressing the OK key. press the Back key.1.2 Exiting • Press the Panel Reset key as many times as it is required to display the initial screen.

122 P.117 P.117 P.126 Adjustment / Setting RX SPEED *1 TX LEVEL *1 RX LEVEL *1 DTMF LEVEL *1 CNG LEVEL *1 CED LEVEL *1 ECM MODE *1 CODING SCHEME *1 REPORT DESTINATION *1 TONER EMPTY REPORT *1 IU LIFE REPORT *1 MAINTENANCE REPORT *1 PROTOCOL REPORT *1 CCD APS SIZE GDI TIMEOUT 114 .119 P.123 P.122 P. (PLAIN) FUSER TEMP.124 P.123 P.123 P.124 P. (DUPLEX) *2 LOOP Ad.122 P.123 P. (OHP) LEADING EDGE TRAILING EDGE VERTICAL EDGE LOOP Ad.124 P.123 P. (BYPASS) FLS PAPER SIZE FLS/LEGAL CHANGE TX SPEED *1 Ref.124 P.123 P.10. IU LIFT STOP MODE ID ADJUST VG ADJUST FUSER TEMP. page P.121 P.125 P.118 P.0 Apr. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.120 P.121 P.124 P.124 P.117 P.124 P.118 P. 1.118 P. (THICK) FUSER TEMP.117 P.2 Service Mode function tree Service Mode SERVICE’S CHOICE MARKETING AREA *1 SHIPMENT MAINTENANCE COUNT. (TRAY1) LOOP Ad.124 P. 2007 10.123 P. (TRAY2-5) LOOP Ad.123 P.122 P.124 P.

CUSTOMER ID 10.134 P. LOOP 2 *4 ATDC GAIN MODEL SETTING COUNTER TOTAL COUNTER SIZE COUNTER PM COUNTER MAINTENANCE COUNT.131 P.131 P.133 P. SUPPLIES COUNTER APPLICATION COUNT. *5 NIC F/W VER.136 P.134 P.128 P.135 P.136 P.137 P.132 P.136 P.137 P.0 Apr.132 P.132 P.131 P. PCL F/W VER.127 P.126 P.132 P.137 115 . Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Adjustment / Setting Ref. ENGINE F/W VER.129 P.137 P. *6 ADF F/W VER.131 P. 1.136 P. page P.130 P. *4 MAIN RAM SIZE SERIAL NO.133 P.132 P.137 P.133 P. LOOP 1 *3 ADF REG.132 P.131 P. 2007 Service Mode ADJUST PRN MAIN REGIST PRN SUB REGIST CCD MAIN ZOOM CCD SUB ZOOM CCD MAIN REGIST CCD SUB REGIST ADF SUB ZOOM *3 ADF MAIN REGIST *3 ADF SUB REGIST 1 *3 ADF SUB REGIST 2 *4 ADF REG. SCAN COUNTER PAPER SIZE COUNTER MISFEED COUNTER TROUBLE COUNTER DISPLAY TONER DENSITY LEVEL PROCESS CONTROL MAIN F/W VER.133 P.Field Service Ver.136 P.134 P.

139 P.143 P. 1. APPLICATION COUNTER SCAN COUNTER PAPER SIZE COUNTER MISFEED COUNTER TROUBLE COUNTER ADF BACKUP CLEAR *4 *1: It will be displayed only when the FK-506 is mounted. 116 .142 P. *4: It will be displayed only when the DF-605 is mounted. 2007 Ref.141 P. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Service Mode FUNCTION PAPER FEED TEST PROCESS CHECK ATDC AUTO ADJUST PRN TEST PATTERN ADF FEED TEST *3 COPY ADF GLASS CCD MOVE TO HOME UPLOAD F/W FAX RES. *2: It will be displayed only when the AD-504 is mounted.30 PROTOCOL LIST *1 ADMIN.143 P. REGISTRATION FIXED ZOOM CHANGE FACTORY TEST SIGNAL TEST *1 RELAY TEST *1 Field Service Ver.140 P.138 P. *5: It will be displayed only when the IC-206 is mounted.10.138 P.142 P. page P.137 P.143 P.141 P.139 P.138 P. (bizhub 211/220 only) *3: It will be displayed only when the DF-502 or DF-605 is mounted.142 P.143 P.139 P. (Min) *3 ADF SENSOR ADJUST *4 SOFT SWITCH *1 REPORT *1 SERVICE DATA LIST *1 ERROR CODE LIST *1 T. SUPPLIES LIFE COUNT.143 P.139 P.143 P.139 P.139 P.0 Apr. (Max) *3 ADF WIDTH Ad.143 P. COPY TEST *1 SCAN TEST ADF WIDTH Ad.142 P.141 P.139 P.139 P.140 P.139 P.142 P.143 Adjustment / Setting DIAL TEST *1 VOLUME TEST *1 PANEL BUZZER TEST RAM TEST CLEAR DATA DRAM CLEAR *1 FLASH ROM CLEAR *1 MEMORY CLEAR PM COUNTER MAINTENANCE COUNT.142 P.141 P.138 P. *6: It will be displayed only when the NC-503 is mounted.138 P.

service. 1. Functions Use • To enter an appropriate counter value (0 to 999999) as the tentative maintenance time. call display is given and the initiation of any new copy cycle is inhibited. • Specify the setting on maintenance counter to “1” or “2”: If the maintenance life is reached. • The default setting is METRIC. • The mode when the IU life is reached.3. D. MARKETING AREA See the FK-506 Service Manual.40 of the FK-506 service manual B.) • When “1” or “2” is selected. however.AMERICA (INCH) C. a screen will then appear to allow the counter value to be entered. “CONTINUOUS” 117 Adjustment / Setting . Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is 0.0 Apr. 2007 10. the IU life will be detected. Maintenance call display is given.AMERICA (METRIC) L. In this case. IU LIFE STOP MODE Functions Use • When the supplies life count. SHIPMENT Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To select the display of the fixed zoom ratios and paper sizes according to the applicable marketing area. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is CONTINUOUS. “METRIC” INCH JAPAN CHINA L. “0” : Not counted 1 : Counted (The maintenance call display is given when the counter reaches 0. MAINTENANCE COUNT. reaches the life value. See P. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 STOP 10. the maintenance call (M1) or service call [Call Service (M1)] will appear.1 SERVICE’S CHOICE A.Field Service Ver. NOTE • The counter value is decremented until it reaches -999999 even after it has counted 0.) 2 : Counted (The service call display is given and the initiation of any new copy cycle is inhibited when the counter reaches 0. NOTE • The counter value is decremented until it reaches -999999 even after it has counted 0. no image quality is guaranteed. is specified by this setting. STOP : Disables copying. CONTINUOUS : Enables copying.3 Setting in the Service Mode 10.

ID ADJUST Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the image density by varying Vg and Vb on the engine side. thereby making up for fusing performance that changes with the operating environment or type of paper. void) occur. • Used when the type of paper is changed. • The default setting is 0. -2 to +2 G. 1. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is 0. -3 to +3 F. • Used when fusing failure occurs. -1 to +2 Adjustment / Setting <Temperature table for adjusting fusing temperature for plain paper> For bizhub 163 Paper width Setting value Main scanning direction 251 mm or more 250 mm or less 251 mm or more 250 mm or less 251 mm or more 250 mm or less 251 mm or more 250 mm or less Sub scanning direction 361 mm or more 360 mm or less – 361 mm or more 360 mm or less – 361 mm or more 360 mm or less – 361 mm or more 360 mm or less – Mode selected in SERVICE’S CHOICE Mode 1 Mode 3 Fusing heater lamp temperature 200 °C 200 °C 200 °C 200 °C 200 °C 190 °C 190 °C 190 °C 180 °C 180 °C 180 °C 170 °C 190 °C 190 °C 185 °C 180 °C 180 °C 175 °C 170 °C 170 °C 165 °C 160 °C 160 °C 155 °C 2 1 0 (default value) -1 118 . • Used when the image density is high or low. FUSER TEMP.10. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. Increase the setting value to eliminate void.0 Apr. VG ADJUST Functions Use • To adjust image density by varying Vg with changing sensitivities as the PC drum is used for an extended period of time. • The default setting is 0. • Used when image problems (fog. (PLAIN) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the temperature of the fusing roller for each type of paper. Decrease the setting value to eliminate fog. 2007 E. • Used when the PC drum unit has been replaced.

(THICK) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the fusing temperature when thick paper is used. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Mode selected in SERVICE’S CHOICE Setting value Paper width Mode 1 Mode 3 Fusing heater lamp temperature (main/sub) 2 221 mm or more 220 mm or less 221 mm or more 220 mm or less 221 mm or more 220 mm or less 221 mm or more 220 mm or less 200 °C 190 °C 180 °C 170 °C 1 0 (default value) -1 H. FUSER TEMP.Field Service Ver. 2007 For bizhub 211/220 10. -1 to +1 <Temperature table for adjusting fusing temperature for special paper> For bizhub 163 Adjustment / Setting Paper width CD 1 251 mm or more 250 mm or less 251 mm or more 250 mm or less 251 mm or more 250 mm or less Mode selected in SERVICE’S CHOICE Mode 1 210 °C 210 °C 210 °C 200 °C 200 °C 190 °C Mode 3 200 °C 200 °C 190 °C 190 °C 180 °C 180 °C Setting value Fusing heater lamp temperature 0 (default value) -1 For bizhub 211/220 Mode selected in SERVICE’S CHOICE Setting value Mode 1 210 °C 200 °C 190 °C Mode 3 Fusing heater lamp temperature (main/sub) 1 0 (default value) -1 119 . 1. • The default setting is 0. • Used when fusing failure occurs.0 Apr.

1. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.10. • Used when fusing failure occurs. -1 to +1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure <Temperature table for adjusting fusing temperature for OHP film> For bizhub 163 Paper width Main scanning direction 1 251 mm or more 250 mm or less 251 mm or more 250 mm or less 251 mm or more 250 mm or less Mode selected in SERVICE’S CHOICE Mode 1 180 °C 165 °C 180 °C 155 °C 170 °C 145 °C Mode 3 175 °C 165 °C 165 °C 155 °C 155 °C 145 °C Setting value Fusing heater lamp temperature 0 (default value) -1 For bizhub 211/220 Mode selected in SERVICE’S CHOICE Setting value Mode 1 175 °C 165 °C 155 °C Mode 3 Fusing heater lamp temperature (main/sub) Adjustment / Setting 1 0 (default value) -1 120 .0 Apr. • The default setting is 0. 2007 I. FUSER TEMP. (OHP) • To set the fusing temperature when OHP film are used.

A09AF3C501DA Call SERVICE’S CHOICE of Service Mode to the screen. Select [LEADING EDGE] and press the OK key. • Used when the PH Unit has been replaced. Press the OK key to validate the setting value selected in step 3. To make the erase width greater. select the desired setting value. 2. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Adjustment / Setting • To adjust the erase width on the leading edge of the image by varying the laser emission timing. Adjustment Procedure Set the erase width on the leading edge of the paper (width A). 0 mm 1 mm 2 mm 3 mm “4 mm” 5 mm • Adjustment Instructions To make the erase width smaller. decrease the setting value. TRAILING EDGE Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To adjust the erase width on the trailing edge of the image by varying the laser emission timing. Using [ ▲ / ▼ ] key. 3. increase the setting value. Press the OK key to validate the setting value selected in step 3. increase the setting value. 4. Call SERVICE’S CHOICE of Service Mode to the screen.0 Apr. To make the erase width greater. 0 mm 1 mm 2 mm 3 mm “4 mm” 5 mm • Adjustment Instructions To make the erase width smaller. 121 . 3. B A09AF3C502DA 1. 2. 4.Field Service Ver. 1. A 1. Adjustment Procedure Set the erase width on the trailing edge of the paper (width B). LEADING EDGE Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 10. Select [TRAILING EDGE] and press the OK key. • The default setting is 4 mm. decrease the setting value. Using [ ▲ / ▼ ] key. select the desired setting value. • Used when the PH unit has been replaced. • The default setting is 4 mm. 2007 J. K.

0 Apr. 3. VERTICAL EDGE Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To adjust the erase width on both edges of the image (in CD direction) by varying the laser emission timing. 4. 2. fold. 3. fold. or misfeed.9 to 3. Select [VERTICAL EDGE] and press the OK key. Call SERVICE’S CHOICE of Service Mode to the screen. 2. Select [LOOP Ad. (TRAY1)] and press the OK key. increase the setting value. select the desired setting value. -3. C C A09AF3C503DA 1. LOOP Ad.13 of the PF-502 service manual O. • Used when variations in the amount of void on the leading edge occurs. (TRAY2-5) See P. • Used when the PH Unit has been replaced.10. The default setting is 4 mm. Adjustment Procedure Set the erase width on both edges of the paper (width C). • Try a different setting value until there are no variations in the amount of void on the leading edge. decrease the setting value. 1. and paper skew. (DUPLEX): bizhub 211/220 only See P. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. 0 mm 1 mm 2 mm 3 mm “4 mm” 5 mm • Adjustment Instructions To make the erase width smaller. Call SERVICE’S CHOICE of Service Mode to the screen. (TRAY1) Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Adjustment Procedure • To adjust the length of the loop formed in the paper feed from the tray1 before the synchronizing roller.9 mm (1 step: 0. • Used when a skew feed. LOOP Ad. Press the OK key to validate the setting value selected in step 3. N. M. select the desired setting value. 2007 L. To make the erase width greater. Using [ ▲ / ▼ ] key. or misfeed of paper occurs.12 of the AD-504 service manual 122 .6 mm) 1. Press the OK key to validate the setting value selected in step 3. LOOP Ad. Using [ ▲ / ▼ ] key. 4.

• Used when a skew feed.40 of the FK-506 service manual V. 4. Press the OK key to validate the setting value selected in step 3. fold. Select [LOOP Ad. select the desired setting value. Call SERVICE’S CHOICE of Service Mode to the screen. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Adjustment / Setting • To adjust the length of the loop formed in the paper feed from the manual bypass tray before the synchronizing roller. LOOP Ad. NORMAL FLS LEAGAL S.41 of the FK-506 service manual W. 2007 P.0 Apr. or misfeed. -3.9 mm (1 step: 0. or misfeed of paper occurs. fold. TX LEVEL See P.6 mm) 1.40 of the FK-506 service manual T. Using [ ▲ / ▼ ] key. (BYPASS)] and press the OK key. (BYPASS) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Adjustment Procedure 10. • Default setting depend on the marketing area setting. TX SPEED See P. • Used at setup.41 of the FK-506 service manual 123 . DTMF LEVEL See P. 2. RX SPEED See P. and paper skew. 1. 3. 330✽203 “330✽210” 330✽216 330✽220 337✽206 R. RX LEVEL See P. • Used when variations in the amount of void on the leading edge occurs. FLS PAPER SIZE Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To select the paper size for FLS.Field Service Ver.40 of the FK-506 service manual U. FLS/LEGAL CHANGE Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To let LEGAL originals be detected as FLS ones. Q. • The default setting is 330✽210.9 to 3. • Try a different setting value until there are no variations in the amount of void on the leading edge. • Used when the FLS paper size is changed.

1.0 Apr.42 of the FK-506 service manual AC. CED LEVEL See P.41 of the FK-506 service manual AA.42 of the FK-506 service manual AF. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. CNG LEVEL See P.41 of the FK-506 service manual AB.42 of the FK-506 service manual AE.42 of the FK-506 service manual AD.TONER EMPTY REPORT See P. MAINTENANCE REPORT See P. ECM MODE See P. PROTOCOL REPORT See P.REPORT DESTINATION See P. 2007 X.41 of the FK-506 service manual Z.41 of the FK-506 service manual Y.10.43 of the FK-506 service manual Adjustment / Setting 124 .IU LIFE REPORT See P.CODING SCHEME See P.

9 mm Letter S Legal S ~221.9 ~153.0 Apr.5 mm~ • To change the original size detection pattern that is used for CCD scan.0 mm B5 FLS S ~262. 2007 AG. “PATTERN1” PATTERN2 125 Adjustment / Setting • For Metric.0 mm B5 S FLS S ~200.4 284.9 ~225.0 Sensor mm ~187.0 ~213. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 mm~ A4 A3 A3 A3 275.0 ~187.0 mm 16K 8K S PS101 OFF ON PS102 – – A5 S FLS S <Pattern 2> Original Size Sensor PS 101 *PS 102 Invoice S ~143.0 ~187.Field Service Ver.0 mm A4 S FLS S ~225.0 ~262.7 ~284.5 Sensor mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm ~144.0 mm Letter 11×17 S PS102 – – PS101 OFF ON OFF ON PS102 OFF OFF ON ON Invoice S FLS S Legal S Legal S A5 S FLS S Legal S Legal S B5 S FLS S Legal S Legal S A4 S FLS S Legal S Legal S Letter S FLS S Legal S Legal S B5 FLS S B4 S B4 S B5 B4 S B4 S B4 S Letter 11×17 S 11×17 S 11×17 S Original Size ~153.0 mm 16K S FLS S ~215. • For Inch and Latin America (Inch) areas <Pattern 1> Original Size Sensor PS101 OFF ON <Pattern 2> Original Size ~143.0 mm B5 B4 S ~275.9 ~225. 1.0 ~220.0 ~200.4 mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm OFF OFF ON OFF ON A5 S B5 S 16K S A4 S Letter S B5 B5 B4 S B4 S B4 S 16K 8K S 8K S 8K S Letter 11×17 S 11×17 S 11×17 S A4 A3 A3 A3 OFF FLS S FLS S FLS S FLS S FLS S FLS S FLS S ON ON Legal S Legal S Legal S Legal S Legal S Legal S Legal S Legal S Legal S Legal S Legal S Legal S B4 S B4 S Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is PATTERN1. • To change the original size detection performance settings.CCD APS SIZE Functions Use 10.0 ~262.7 mm Invoice S Legal S ~220.9 ~153.0 ~274.0 ~213.0 ~284.1 mm~ A4 A3 284.0 ~220. China and Latin America (Metric) areas <Pattern 1> .

7. 60 (-4. 8. 1.GDI TIMEOUT Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To specify the time for timeout when data from PC is interrupted during GDI printing. If width A on the test pattern is shorter than the specifications. This will produce a test pattern. Select [PRN MAIN REGIST] of [ADJUST]. 6.) “6 (60 sec.) 4 (40 sec.3.) 1 (10 sec. Then. repeat steps 5 through 7.0 Apr. 2007 AH. select the appropriate setting value. 126 . Enter function of the Service Mode. If a single adjustment procedure does not successfully bring width A into the specified range.10.1 mm) • Adjustment instructions If width A on the test pattern is longer than the specifications. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.0 mm) (1 step: 0. 4. decrease the setting value.0 mm) to 140 (+4. 2. PRN MAIN REGIST Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To adjust by varying the starting position of image writing in the main scanning direction. Adjustment Procedure Adjust so that width A on the test pattern produced falls within the specified range.0 mm Adjustment / Setting A A09AF3C504DA 1. • Used when the image on the copy deviates in the main scanning direction. If width A falls outside the specified range. Using [ ▲ / ▼ ] key. 5.) 2 (20 sec. Load the tray 1 with A4 paper.) 3 (30 sec. • Used when the PH unit has been replaced. Press the OK key to validate the setting value selected in step 6. increase the setting value. perform the following steps to make an adjustment. 3.2 ADJUST A. Check to see if width A on the test pattern falls within the specified range.)” 10. Specifications 20 ± 2. press the Start key. • The default setting is 6.) 5 (50 sec. Select [PRN TEST PATTERN] and then [TEST PATTERN1]. 0 (5 sec.

2007 B. • Used when the PH unit has been replaced. 127 . 8. Select [PRN TEST PATTERN] and then [TEST PATTERN1].5 mm B A09AF3C505DA 1. decrease the setting value. 84 (-5. repeat steps 5 through 7. If width B falls outside the specified range. 1. Press the OK key to validate the setting value selected in step 6. press the Start key.37 mm) • Adjustment instructions If width B on the test pattern is longer than the specifications. This will produce a test pattern. 6. Using [ ▲ / ▼ ] key.95 mm) (1 step: 0. perform the following steps to make an adjustment.0 Apr. PRN SUB REGIST Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 10. Select [PRN SUB REGIST] of [ADJUST]. Adjustment Procedure Adjust so that width B on the test pattern produced falls within the specified range. If width B on the test pattern is shorter than the specifications. • Used when the image on the copy deviates in the sub scanning direction. Enter function of the Service Mode.Field Service Ver. increase the setting value. 2. 7. 5. Check to see if width B on the test pattern falls within the specified range. Load the tray 1 with A4 paper. 4. Specifications 10 ± 1. If a single adjustment procedure does not successfully bring width B into the specified range. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Adjustment / Setting • To adjust by varying the starting position of image writing in the sub scanning direction. select the appropriate setting value. 3. Then.95 mm) to 116 (+5.

repeat steps 3 through 6.Measure the length of the scale on the copy. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. 6. Adjustment Procedure • Adjust so that the amount of error falls within ±1.Enter adjust of the Service Mode.0%) (1 step: 0. Using [ ▲ / ▼ ] key. • Adjust so that the following specifications are met when the length of the scale is 200 mm. If the amount of error falls outside the specified range.0%) to 105 (+2. • Used when the CCD unit has been replaced (After the CCD unit has been adjusted for correct position). select the appropriate setting value.10. Press the OK key to validate the setting value selected in step 5.0% of the length to be measured. decrease the setting value.00) Specifications: 200 ± 2. 2007 C. If the length on the copy is shorter than the actual one. CCD MAIN ZOOM Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To adjust variations in machining and installation accuracy of different IR parts by varying the scanning zoom ratio in the main scanning direction. Select [CCD MAIN ZOOM] of [ADJUST]. 7.0 Apr. 5.0 mm 1. • The default setting is 100. 1. Adjustment / Setting A09AF3C506DA 4. 128 . increase the setting value.4%) • Adjustment instructions If the length on the copy is longer than the actual one. 2. 95 (-2. Place a scale on the original glass in parallel with the original width scale and make a copy. perform the following steps to make an adjustment. Zoom Ratio/Specifications Zoom Ratio: Full size (× 1. If a single adjustment procedure does not successfully bring the amount of error into the specified range. 3.

• The default setting is 100.Field Service Ver. and copy it. repeat steps 3 through 6.0 Apr. Adjustment Procedure • Adjust so that the amount of error falls within ±1. increase the setting value. 3.00) Specifications: 300 ± 3. Enter adjust of the Service Mode. select the appropriate setting value. If the amount of error falls outside the specified range. 1. 5. 2. Measure the length of the scale on the copy. Place a scale so that it is at right angles to the original width scale. 95 (-2.4%) • Adjustment instructions If the length on the copy is longer than the actual one. • Used when the scanner drive cables have been replaced. Select [CCD SUB ZOOM] of [ADJUST]. 129 . CCD SUB ZOOM Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 10. Press the OK key to validate the setting value selected in step 5. 6. If a single adjustment procedure does not successfully bring the amount of error into the specified range. If the length on the copy is shorter than the actual one.0% of the length to be measured. 7. 2007 D. A09AF3C507DA 4. Zoom Ratio/Specifications Zoom Ratio: Full size (× 1.0%) to 105 (+2. Using [ ▲ / ▼ ] key. • Adjust so that the following specifications are met when the length of the scale is 300 mm.0%) (1 step: 0. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Adjustment / Setting • To adjust variations in machining and installation accuracy of different IR parts by varying the scanning zoom ratio in the sub scanning direction. decrease the setting value. perform the following steps to make an adjustment.0 mm 1.

• Used when the PH unit has been replaced. increase the setting value. repeat steps 5 through 7. If the deviation in width A falls outside the specified range. If a single adjustment procedure does not successfully bring the deviation into the specified range. press the Start key.1 mm) • Adjustment instructions If the deviation is longer than the specifications. and CCD MAIN ZOOM have been adjusted) • Used when the CCD unit has been replaced. Then. 9. Press the OK key to validate the setting value selected in step 7. Enter function of the Service Mode. Adjustment / Setting 130 . decrease the setting value. Select [CCD MAIN REGIST] of [ADJUST]. 5. (After the CCD unit has been adjusted for correct position) 20 (-8. Select [PRN TEST PATTERN] and then [TEST PATTERN1]. 2. This will produce a test pattern. perform the following steps to make an adjustment. 1. Place the test pattern (original) on top of the copy and check for deviation in width A. Place the test pattern produced in step 3 on the original glass and make a copy of it. If the deviation is shorter than the specifications.0 Apr. Load the tray 1 with A4 paper.0 mm Setting/ Procedure A A09AF3C504DA 1. 8. Using [ ▲ / ▼ ] key. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.0 mm) to 180 (+8. Adjustment Procedure Adjust so that deviation between width A on the test pattern produced and that on the copy produced falls within the specified range.0 mm) (1 step: 0. 2007 E. 6. (After PRN MAIN REGIST.10. 4. PRN SUB REGIST. CCD MAIN REGIST Functions Use • To adjust variations in machining and installation accuracy of different IR parts by varying the starting position of image scanning in the main scanning direction. Specifications 0 ± 2. select the appropriate setting value. 3. 7.

increase the setting value. Specifications 0 ± 1.0 Apr. ADF SUB ZOOM See P. If the deviation in width B falls outside the specified range. 7.23 of the DF-605/MK-501 service manual H. Select [CCD SUB REGIST] of [ADJUST]. G.21 of the DF-502 service manual See P. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Adjustment / Setting • To adjust variations in machining and installation accuracy of different IR parts by varying the starting position of image scanning in the sub scanning direction. Load the tray 1 with A4 paper. (After the CCD unit has been adjusted for correct position) 60 (-4. Then.0 mm) (1 step: 0. ADF MAIN REGIST See P. 4.26 of the DF-605/MK-501 service manual 131 . Setting/ Procedure Adjustment Procedure Adjust so that deviation between width B on the test pattern produced and that on the copy produced falls within the specified range. Place the test pattern (original) on top of the copy and check for deviation in width B.0 mm) to 140 (+4.1 mm) • Adjustment instructions If the deviation is longer than the specifications. 6. press the Start key. 8. 5. (After PRN MAIN REGIST. Using [ ▲ / ▼ ] key. If a single adjustment procedure does not successfully bring the deviation into the specified range. perform the following steps to make an adjustment. ADF SUB REGIST1 See P. 2.5 mm B A09AF3C505DA 1. ADF SUB REGIST2 See P. repeat steps 5 through 7. 9. and CCD MAIN ZOOM have been adjusted) • Used when the CCD unit has been replaced.Field Service Ver. Place the test pattern produced in step 3 on the original glass and make a copy of it. CCD SUB REGIST Functions Use 10. PRN SUB REGIST. select the appropriate setting value.20 of the DF-502 service manual See P. • Used when the PH unit has been replaced. Press the OK key to validate the setting value selected in step 7. 2007 F. Select [PRN TEST PATTERN] and then [TEST PATTERN1]. 3. decrease the setting value. If the deviation is shorter than the specifications.24 of the DF-605/MK-501 service manual I. Enter function of the Service Mode. 1.25 of the DF-605/MK-501 service manual J.19 of the DF-502 service manual See P. This will produce a test pattern.

27 of the DF-605/MK-501 service manual M. LOOP2 See P.144 COPY : Total count value in copy mode COPY DUPLEX : Total count value of duplex copies PRINT : Total count value in PC print mode PRINT DUPLEX: Total count value of duplex prints Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure B. • To change the original size detection performance settings. the Tech.3 COUNTER A. 1. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.0 Apr. ADF REG. LOOP1 See P. ATDC GAIN Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To manually adjust the ATDC sensor voltage. • Paper sizes on which counting can be made are different depending on the setting of [SECURITY] → [SIZE COUNTER] in the service mode. • Counting method is different depending on the settings of [SECURITY] → [TOTAL COUNTER COUNT] in the service mode. Rep. N.39 V) to 186 (8. TOTAL COUNTER Functions Use • To display the total count value of the selected mode. • If it is changed. • To clear the count. 132 . See P. 123 (5. SIZE COUNTER Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To display the count of the size counter.10. call (C03FF) will appear.26 of the DF-605/MK-501 service manual L. MODEL SETTING Functions Use Setting/ Procedure NOTE • Never change this setting.3.15 V) • The adjusted value of the ATDC auto adjust is the setting value. • Default setting depend on the marketing area setting. 20 ppm 18 ppm 16 ppm 10. use [CLEAR DATA] of the Service Mode. ADF REG. • To check total count value in each mode. 2007 K.

0 Apr. See P. use [CLEAR DATA] of the Service Mode. 1 : BYPASS 2 : TRAY1 3 : TRAY2 4 : TRAY3 5 : TRAY4 6 : TRAY5 7 : ADF FEED 8 : ADF REVERSE 9 : IR 10 : OZONE 11 : CLEANING • To clear the count. When the counter reaches “0”. use [CLEAR DATA] of the Service Mode.Field Service Ver. Setting/ Procedure E. Functions Use • To display the count of the maintenance counter. D. use [CLEAR DATA] of the Service Mode. • This function is used at the time of maintenance work for the main body and options. 2007 C. and the countdown system is used. MAINTENANCE COUNT. according to the setting on MAINTENANCE COUNT. The initial value is 40. F. PM COUNTER Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 10. life 1 will be detected and maintenance call M2 will appear. maintenance call M1 or the service call will appear. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Adjustment / Setting • To display the count of the number of times each of different parts of the machine has been used. 1. When the counter reaches “0”. use [CLEAR DATA] of the Service Mode.117 • To clear the count. APPLICATION COUNTER Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To display the count of the number of sheets of paper used for each of different applications. 133 .000. COPY PRINT : Number of copies made FAX RX PRINT: (Used only when FK-506 is mounted) REPORT PRN : (Used only when FK-506 is mounted) PC PRINT : Number of printed pages produced from PC FAX TX : (Used only when FK-506 is mounted) MAIL TX : (Used only when IC-206/NC-502 is mounted) • To clear the count. of SERVICE’S CHOISE. • The count should be cleared when the corresponding PM part is replaced. Setting/ Procedure • To clear the count. SUPPLIES COUNTER Functions Use • To display the count of the supplies life counter.

• The number of scan motions carried out for copying is not counted. use [CLEAR DATA] of the Service Mode. SCAN COUNTER Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To display the count of the scan counter. H.10. PAPER SIZE COUNTER Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To display the count of the number of sheets of paper used for each size and type. I. MISFEED COUNTER • To display the count of the number of paper misfeeds that have occurred at different parts of the machine.0 Apr. Functions Adjustment / Setting Use Setting/ Procedure 134 . Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. 8 : DUPLEX (ENTRANCE) (Used only when AD-504 is mounted) 9 : DUPLEX (FEED) (Used only when AD-504 is mounted) 10 : FUSER 11 : SEPARATOR 12 : ADF (PICK-UP) 13 : ADF (TSPT.) 14 : ADF (EXIT) 15 : ADF (REVERSE) (Used only when AD-504 is mounted) • To clear the count. 1 : BYPASS 2 : TRAY1 3 : TRAY2 (Used only when PF-502 is mounted) 4 : TRAY3 (Used only when PF-502 is mounted) 5 : TRAY4 (Used only when PF-502 is mounted) 6 : TRAY5 (Used only when PF-502 is mounted) 7 : PICK-UP/TSPT. 1. use [CLEAR DATA] of the Service Mode. 2007 G. 1: A3 3: A4 L 5: B5 7: FLS 9: 11 × 14 11: LETTER L 13: INVOICE 15: PLAIN 17: SPECIAL 19: OHP 21: ENVELOPE 2: B4 4: A4 C 6: A5 8: LEDGER 10: LEGAL 12: LETTER C 14: OTHER 16: RECYCLE 18: 1-SIDE (Used only when AD-504 is mounted) 20: THICK • To clear the count. use [CLEAR DATA] of the Service Mode. • To clear the count.

1.Field Service Ver. 135 . C0000: Main motor malfunction C0044: ADF cooling fan failure (bizhub 211/220 only) C0045: Fusing cooling fan motor malfunction C004E: Power unit cooling fan motor malfunction C0070: Toner replenishing motor malfunction C0210: Abnormal image transfer voltage C0500: Warm-up failure C0501: Warm-up failure 2 (bizhub 211/220 only) C0510: Fusing failure (abnormally low temperature) C0511: Fusing failure (abnormally low temperature 2) (bizhub 211/220 only) C0520: Fusing failure (abnormally high temperature) C0521: Fusing failure (abnormally high temperature 2) (bizhub 211/220 only) C0650: Faulty scanner home position sensor C0B60: Bin switching motor malfunction C0B80: Shift motor malfunction C0F32: Faulty TCR sensor C0F33: Improperly adjusted TCR sensor C1038: Engine connection failure C1200: Faulty ASIC/memory C1300: Polygon motor malfunction C133B: Communication with option error C133C: Modem fault (bizhub 211/220 only) C133D: ROM checksum error C13F0: Faulty HSYNC C1468: Faulty parameter chip C14A3: IR fluorescent lamp fault • To clear the count. TROUBLE COUNTER Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 10. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Adjustment / Setting • To display the count of the number of malfunctions detected according to the malfunction code.0 Apr. 2007 J. use [CLEAR DATA] of the Service Mode.

Functions Use • To display the PCL firmware version information.9% 14.0%~13.4% 13. Functions Use • To display the engine firmware (PRCB) version information.0%~8.4% 14. • Refer to the following table for actual T/C values. 136 . E. 2007 10. 1.0%~14.5%~13. Functions Use • To display the main firmware (MFPB) version information. TONER DENSITY LEVEL Functions Use • To display the current output value of TCR sensor. • Used to check the T/C ratio when the image density is defective. MAIN F/W VER.0%~10. • This function is available only when the optional IC-205 is installed.10.9% ··· Vb (V) -300 -400 -500 Vg (V) -450 -550 -650 ··· ··· ··· B. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.5%~14. PCL F/W VER. Display ··· 80 ··· 100 ··· 130 135 140 145 ··· T/C 8. PROCESS CONTROL Functions Use • To display the Vg and Vb values. ENGINE F/W VER.4% 13. D.3.0 Apr.4% 10.4 DISPLAY A. Display Adjustment / Setting -5 0 +5 C.

2007 F. Select the paper source. SERIAL NO. No counters are activated. Press the Stop key to stop the paper feed test. TRAY1 2. ADF F/W VER. This test cannot be run with the manual bypass or multiple bypass (option). NIC F/W VER. • Here are the details of operation involved in the paper passage motion. 3. 10. Functions Use J. H. 1. Functions Use • To display the NIC firmware version information. PAPER FEED TEST Functions • To check for correct paper passage of the paper take-up and transport system by letting the machine consecutively take up and feed paper without involving actual printing action. • This function is available only when the optional DF-605 is installed. The scanner does not make any scan motion.Field Service Ver. Use Setting/ Procedure TRAY2 137 Adjustment / Setting .0 Apr. • This function is available only when the optional NC-503 is installed. MAIN RAM SIZE Functions Use • To display the main memory size. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 G. • Used when a paper misfeed occurs <Step> 1. I.3. Functions Use • To display the ADF firmware version information. Press the OK key to start the paper feed test. 10. Paper is fed until the corresponding paper source runs out of paper.5 FUNCTION A. CUSTOMER ID Functions Use • To display the customer ID of the machine. • To display the serial number of the machine.

0 Apr. The adjustment sequence automatically stops as soon as the adjustment is made. • Used when checking for gradation reproducibility. Select the type of test pattern. • Used when a dirty image occurs.22 of the DF-502 service manual See P. <Step> 1. 2. PROCESS CHECK Functions Use • HV output (for factory setting only) *Should not be used C. Select the type of test pattern. • Used at setup. PRN TEST PATTERN (1) PATTERN1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To produce a test pattern for image adjustments. or zoom ratio has been adjusted. Press the OK key to let the machine produce the test pattern. Press the OK key to let the machine produce the test pattern. Setting/ Procedure D. Press the OK key to start the adjustment. COPY ADF GLASS Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To check for scratches and dirt on the original scanning glass. <Step> 1. Select the paper source. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. • Used when IU has been replaced. • When skew. ADF FEED TEST See P. ATDC AUTO ADJUST Functions Use • To make an automatic adjustment of the TCR sensor. 1. 2. • Used when developer has been changed.27 of the DF-605/MK-501 service manual F.22 of the DF-502 service manual See P. registration. See P. (2) PATTERN2 Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To produce halftone and gradation test patterns. 3.10. • Used when checking for uneven density or uneven pitch. Select the paper source.27 of the DF-605/MK-501 service manual 138 . 3. 2. <Step> 1. E. 2007 B.

(Max) See P.44 of the FK-506 service manual 10. COPY TEST See P. UPLOAD F/W See P. CCD MOVE TO HOME Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 10. ADF SENSOR ADJUST See P.6 SOFT SWITCH See P. • Used when the scan motion is faulty.44 of the FK-506 service manual 139 .28 of the DF-605/MK-501 service manual 10. 2007 G. H. SCAN TEST Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To check that the exposure lamp turns ON properly and the scanner moves properly. 2. • Used when transporting the machine.Field Service Ver. 2.43 of the FK-506 service manual I.27 of the DF-605/MK-501 service manual L. Select [HOME POSITION] and touch OK to move the scanner from the standby position to the home position. K.3.3. Pressing the Stop key will stop the scan test. Select [STANDBY POSITION] and touch OK to move the scanner from the home position to the standby position.43 of the FK-506 service manual J. Press the OK key to start the scan test.7 REPORT See P. (Min) See P. ADF WIDTH Ad. 1. <Step> 1. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Adjustment / Setting • To move the scanner to its home position and fix it at the home position.0 Apr. ADF WIDTH Ad. FAX RES. <Step> 1.28 of the DF-605/MK-501 service manual M.

0 Apr. • The default setting is 000000. 2.10. Select the particular fixed zoom ratio to be changed.3. this function can be used when an administrator forgets the current registered administrator number. enter the desired fixed zoom ratio. Setting/ Procedure 10. Using the 10-key pad. <Step> 1. 2. Default values and setting range of fixed zoom ratios (1) Japan Setting name REDUCTION2 REDUCTION1 EXPANSION1 EXPANSION2 Default fixed zoom ratio 70% 81% 122% 141% Setting range 51% to 70% 71% to 99% 101% to 140% 141% to 199% Adjustment / Setting (2) Metric Setting name REDUCTION2 REDUCTION1 EXPANSION1 EXPANSION2 Default fixed zoom ratio 70% 81% 115% 141% Setting range 51% to 70% 71% to 99% 101% to 140% 141% to 199% (3) Inch Setting name REDUCTION2 REDUCTION1 EXPANSION1 EXPANSION2 Default fixed zoom ratio 64% 78% 121% 129% Setting range 51% to 64% 65% to 99% 101% to 128% 129% to 199% 140 .3. • To change administrator number. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. • A new administrator number can be set without entering the current registered administrator number. REGISTRATION • To register or change administrator number. 1. Enter the administrator number (6 digits) using the 10-key pads. Therefore.9 FIXED ZOOM CHANGE • FIXED ZOOM CHANGE is used to change the fixed zoom ratios. A. 1. Touch OK key and register the number. 2007 10.8 Functions Use ADMIN.

Field Service Ver. DIAL TEST See P. SIGNAL TEST See P.0 Apr.44 of the FK-506 service manual C. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Setting range 51% to 70% 71% to 99% 101% to 140% 141% to 199% (5) Latin America (Metric) Setting name REDUCTION2 REDUCTION1 EXPANSION1 EXPANSION2 Default fixed zoom ratio 70% 78% 115% 141% Setting range 51% to 70% 71% to 99% 101% to 140% 141% to 199% (6) Latin America (Inch) Setting name REDUCTION2 REDUCTION1 EXPANSION1 EXPANSION2 Default fixed zoom ratio 64% 78% 121% 129% Setting range 51% to 64% 65% to 99% 101% to 128% 129% to 199% (7) OEM1 US Setting name REDUCTION2 REDUCTION1 EXPANSION1 EXPANSION2 Default fixed zoom ratio 64% 77% 129% 155% Setting range 51% to 64% 65% to 99% 101% to 154% 155% to 199% 10.44 of the FK-506 service manual 141 Adjustment / Setting . 1.44 of the FK-506 service manual B.44 of the FK-506 service manual D. RELAY TEST See P. 2007 (4) China Setting name REDUCTION2 REDUCTION1 EXPANSION1 EXPANSION2 Default fixed zoom ratio 70% 81% 115% 141% 10.3. VOLUME TEST See P.10 FACTORY TEST A.

FLASH ROM CLEAR See P. 10. be sure to turn OFF and ON the power switch. F. 1. Pressing the OK key will start the check.10. • To release the test. • • • • • • • Settings of the Utility Mode Settings of SERVICE’S CHOICE in the Service Mode Settings of ADJUST of the Service Mode Setting of ADMIN. resetting them to the default values. MEMORY CLEAR Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To clear the setting values listed on the right.45 of the FK-506 service manual Adjustment / Setting C. PANEL BUZZER TEST Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To test LEDs and keys on control panel PANEL LED TEST • Make sure that all LEDs on control panel light (for 5 seconds). Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. After approx. 142 . press the panel reset key twice: The initial screen will be restored. D.11 CLEAR DATA A. PANEL SWITCH TEST • Press the control keys and numeric keys. RAM TEST Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Write or read data to/from RAM memory to make sure of normal operation. REGISTRATION of the Service Mode Settings of FIXED ZOOM CHANGE of the Service Mode Settings of SECURITY of the Service Mode Settings of copy programs NOTE • After memory clear has been executed.0 Apr.45 of the FK-506 service manual B. and make sure that the names of switches appear in the LCD display.3. 2007 E. “RAM Chip is OK” will appear. 2. 1. DRAM CLEAR See P. PM COUNTER Functions Use • To clear each of the counts of the PM counter. 30 seconds.

10. Service Mode bizhub 163/211/220 F. 1.Field Service Ver. SCAN COUNTER Functions Use • To clear the count of the scan counter. MISFEED COUNTER • To clear each of the counts of the misfeed counter. I. Functions Use J. MAINTENANCE COUNTER Functions Use • To clear the count of the maintenance counter. L. H. PAPER SIZE COUNTER • To clear each of the counts of the paper size counter. 2007 E.0 Apr. Use K. G. ADF BACKUP CLEAR (bizhub 211/220 only) See P. APPLICATION COUNTER Functions Use • To clear each of the counts of the application counter. SUPPLIES LIFE COUNT.28 of the DF-605/MK-501 service manual 143 Adjustment / Setting Functions . TROUBLE COUNTER Functions Use • To clear each of the counts of the trouble counter. Functions Use • To clear the count of the supplies life counter.

Validate the selection by pressing the OK key. 2. • The default setting is 0. press the Back key. 11. 11.1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure TOTAL COUNTER COUNT • To set the count-up method. 0 : Not counted “1” : A3/LEDGER L 2 : A3/B4/LEDGER L/LEGAL L/8K L 3 : A3/B4/FLS/LEDGER L/LEGAL L/11 × 14 L/8K L 144 .1. 11. 1. 2007 11.3 Setting in the Security 11. Changing the setting value in Security functions ▼▼ ▲▲ Select the desired item using [ ▲ / ▼ / / ] key. The Security mode screen will appear. page P.145 P.144 P. • The default setting is 1. or the 10-key pad. To go back to previous screen.145 Adjustment / Setting MACHINE COUNTER 11.3. 3. 11.2 Exiting • Press the Panel Reset key as many times as it is required to display the initial screen. Security bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.1 Security function setting procedure 11.0 Apr.1.1 Procedure 1.3 1.2 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure SIZE COUNTER COUNT • To set the paper size to be counted.3. “0” : One count-up for each copy cycle (ordinary mode) 1 : Multiple count-up according to the paper size and copy mode.11. Security 11.1. 2. Call the Service mode to the screen. 4. Select the setting value using [ ▲ / ▼ / / ] key. Press the following keys in this order: Stop → 9 3.2 Security function tree Security SECURITY TOTAL COUNTER COUNT SIZE COUNTER COUNT PLUG-IN COUNTER COPY Ref.144 P. 2 : Multiple count-up according to the paper size and copy mode.

3. “ENABLE” DISABLE 11. • The default setting is ENABLE.4 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure MACHINE COUNTER • To select whether to enable or disable copying according to whether the machine counter is mounted or not.3 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 11.Field Service Ver. ENABLE “DISABLE” <Count-up Table> Size counter count mode Total counter count mode Total counter Size counter Size other than those set 0 1 1 Not count 2 0 1 1 Set size 1 2 1 2 2 2 1: 1 count 2: 2 counts 145 Adjustment / Setting . Security bizhub 163/211/220 PLUG-IN COUNTER COPY • To select whether to enable or disable copying according to whether the plug-in counter is mounted or not. • The default setting is DISABLE.0 Apr. 1.3. 2007 11.

[1] [2] A09AF3C518DA 146 . See P.42 [1] [2] [1] 2. [2] [2] A09AF3C517DA 4. Press the scanner [1] up against the jigs [2] and tighten the fixing screws.1 Adjustment of the position of the scanner and 2nd/3rd mirrors carriage NOTE • This adjustment is to be made when the scanner drive cables has been replaced or rewound. Then.12. Fit the scanner/mirrors carriage positioning jigs [1] in position. 1. A09AF3C516DA [3] Adjustment / Setting [1] [1] [3] 3.0 Apr. press the 2nd/3rd mirrors carriage [2] up against the jigs. 2007 12. 1. Mechanical adjustment 12. Remove the original glass. Mechanical adjustment bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. Loosen the fixing screws [1] and adjust as necessary so that there is no clearance between the 2nd/3rd mirrors carriage [2] and the jigs [3].

0% of the length to be measured.Field Service Ver. 2007 12. If the amount of error falls outside the specified range. make sure that the cables are located as shown on the left.0 mm 1. 1. Mechanical adjustment NOTE • When the scanner assy is secured to the scanner drive cables [1] using the fixing brackets.00) Specifications: 200 ± 2. Zoom ratio/specifications Zoom ratio: Full size (× 1. resulting an image problem. Measure the length of the scale on the copy. perform the following steps to make an adjustment. bizhub 163/211/220 Adjustment / Setting [1] A09AF3C508DA 12. the scanner assy can move askew. 2.2 CCD unit position adjustment NOTE • This adjustment is to be made when the CCD unit has been replaced. • Adjust so that the following specifications are met when the length of the scale is 200 mm. Place a scale on the original glass in parallel with the original width scale and make a copy. <Adjustment standard> • Adjust so that the amount of error falls within ±1. A09AF3C509DA 147 .0 Apr. If the cables are not positioned properly.

See P. Mechanical adjustment bizhub 163/211/220 [1] [1] Field Service Ver. main erase.0 Apr. and ozone filter. PC drum charge corona assy.) occurs. Install the Ds collar positioning jigs [1]. If a single adjustment procedure does not successfully bring the amount of error into the specified range.3 Adjustment of the gap between the doctor blade and sleeve roller (Db adjustment) NOTE • This adjustment is to be made when an image problem (uneven density. move the CCD unit to the right. etc.20 4. Remove the PC drum. [2] [1] A09AF2C580DA 12. 2. (For details. See P. repeat steps 1 through 3. 3. Adjustment Instructions If the length on the copy is longer than the actual one.12.39 ± 0. <Adjustment standard> • The gap between the doctor blade and the sleeve roller should meet the following specifications.) [1] A09AF3C510DA 5.04 mm (as set using the jigs) 1. see the Parts Guide Manual. move the CCD unit to the left. 2007 3. If the length on the copy is shorter than the actual one. gradation reproducibility failure. NOTE • Ready one PC positioning jig (pivot shaft) separately.26 148 . Remove the imaging unit. slide the CCD unit [2] to the right or left. and secure it in position. 1. Adjustment / Setting Specifications 0. Loosen the three CCD unit mounting screws [1] (painted in green). Separate the imaging unit into the drum assy and developing assy. low ID. Remove the developer scattering prevention plate.

Mechanical adjustment bizhub 163/211/220 Adjustment / Setting [1] 6.0 Apr. remove developer from the shaded area on the surface of the sleeve roller [1] and put it in the developer mixing chamber. NOTE • Whenever a Db adjustment is made. Remove three screws [1] and the doctor blade [2]. Remove the developer left on the surface of the sleeve roller. Using a small piece of paper. A09AF3C512DA [1] 9. [2] A09AF3C535DA 149 . Temporarily secure the doctor blade [2] using three new screws [1]. 1. 2007 12. 8.Field Service Ver. use new screws (to which lock paint has been applied). [2] A09AF3C511DA [1] 7.

[1] [1] A09AF3C514DA 11. 12. If the job extends more than that time.0 Apr.12. 2007 10. (2) at the center. [1] [1] [1] Adjustment / Setting A09AF3C515DA 150 . and (3) in the rear. Install the Db gap adjusting jigs [1] in a space between the sleeve roller and doctor blade. Press the doctor blade tightly up against the Db gap adjusting jigs and tighten the screws [1] in the order of (1) at the front. Put the developing assy and drum assy together. 1. NOTE • The doctor blade mounting screws have been coated with lock paint and the job must be completed within 30 min. Mechanical adjustment bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. change the screws for new ones.

press the Start key. 2007 12. 1. <Adjustment procedure> 1. 5. [2] A09AF3E537DA 151 Adjustment / Setting 7.0 mm A09AF3E536DA [1] [1] 8. A Specifications 20 ± 2.Field Service Ver. Place the test pattern produced on the original glass. 3. Select “PRN TEST PATTERN” and then “PATTERN1. Mechanical adjustment bizhub 163/211/220 12. Enter function of the Service Mode. Remove two screws [1] and the manual bypass cover [2]. Check width A on the copy of the test pattern. If width A falls outside the specified range. Open the right door. Load A4 paper in the manual bypass and make a test copy. Load the paper feed tray/1 with A4 paper. 6. .4 Manual bypass (for the optional AD-504) CD registration adjustment *bizhub 211/220 only NOTE • This adjustment is to be made when the PH unit has been replaced. perform the following steps to make an adjustment. 4.” Then. 2. This will produce a test pattern.0 Apr.

Adjustment Instructions If width A on the copy is smaller than width A on the test pattern. 10.0 Apr. Loosen two screws [1] on the manual bypass and adjust the position of the manual bypass. Mechanical adjustment bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.12. 2007 9. move the manual bypass toward the front of the machine. If width A on the copy is greater than width A on the test pattern. Make another copy of the test pattern and check for any error in width A. 1. move the manual bypass toward the rear of the machine. [1] [1] A09AF3E538DA Adjustment / Setting 152 .

13. the error indicator lights up steadily and the display gives a corresponding message. A09AF4E504DA Display message Misfeed/paper location Tray 1 paper feed section Manual bypass tray paper feed section Ref. 2007 13.157 OPEN 1st SIDE COVER Multiple bypass tray paper feed section See P. and close the cover.1 Misfeed display • When a paper misfeed occurs.156 P. Jam display bizhub 163/211/220 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 13.1.158 P. See P.25 of the MB-501 service manual.Field Service Ver. page P.17 of the PF-502 service manual.1 Display resetting procedure • Open the corresponding cover. See P. FEED COVER See P. 1. clear the sheet of paper misfed. Paper separating section Fusing/paper exit section P. Jam display 13. 153 .0 Apr.159 OPEN 2nd SIDE COVER OPEN 3rd SIDE COVER OPEN 4th SIDE COVER OPEN 5th SIDE COVER OPEN DOC.31 of the DF-605/MK-501 service manual.27 of the DF-502 service manual.

0 Apr. Jam display bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.2 Sensor layout 13.1 System mounted with PF-502 and MB-501. 1. [1] [2] [3] A09AF4C502DA [1] [2] Exit paper sensor (PS3) Registration sensor (PS1) [3] Paper set sensor/bypass (PS2) Troubleshooting 154 .13.2. 2007 13.

wavy. 155 Troubleshooting . 2007 13. or worn? Are rolls/rollers dirty. or worn? Are the edge guide and trailing edge stop at the correct position to accommodate the paper? Are the actuators operational and checked for correct operation? Clean or replace the defective paper separator finger.3.0 Apr. deformed. or damp? Replace paper. or is the Clean or change the paper path. first perform the following initial checks. Jam display bizhub 163/211/220 13. paper path deformed or worn? Are the paper separator fingers dirty. Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures. Correct or replace the defective actuator. Set as necessary.1 Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs.3 Solution 13. Replace paper. Action Is a foreign object present along the paper path. 1. Check item Does paper meet product specifications? Is the paper curled.Field Service Ver. deformed. Clean or replace the defective roll/roller.

• The registration sensor (PS1) is blocked before the lapse of a given period of time.3.2 Misfeed at tray1 paper feed section A. Detection timing Type Tray1 paper feed section misfeed detection Description • The leading edge of the paper does not unblock the registration sensor (PS1) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper feed solenoid/1 (SD1) has been energized. 2007 13.13. 1. Size error detection B.0 Apr. Action Relevant electrical components Registration sensor (PS1) Paper feed solenoid/1 (SD1) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Operations Control signal – PRCB PJ17PRCB-3 (ON) PRCB PJ9PRCB-2 (REM) – Location (Electrical components) – C-5 C-14 – 1 2 3 4 Initial checks PS1 sensor check SD1 operation check Replace PRCB Troubleshooting 156 . • The registration sensor (PS1) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has unblocked the PS1. Jam display bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.

paper feed section B. Action Relevant electrical components Registration sensor (PS1) Paper feed solenoid/bypass (SD2) Paper set sensor/bypass (PS2) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Operations Control signal – PRCB PJ17PRCB-3 (ON) PRCB PJ12PRCB-2 (REM) PRCB PJ12PRCB-5 (ON) – Location (Electrical components) – C-5 K-18 K-17 – 1 2 3 4 5 Initial checks PS1 sensor check SD2 operation check PS2 sensor check Replace PRCB 157 . Detection timing Type Description Manual bypass tray • The leading edge of the paper does not unblock the registration sensor (PS1) paper feed section even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper feed solenoid/ misfeed detection bypass (SD2) has been energized.3 Misfeed at the manual bypass tray paper feed section 13. • The registration sensor (PS1) is blocked before the lapse of a given period of time. the cover is opened and closed.Field Service Ver. 2007 13. or a paper misfeed or malfunction is reset.0 Apr. 1. • The registration sensor (PS1) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has unblocked the PS1. Jam display bizhub 163/211/220 Troubleshooting A. Size error detection Paper left at the • The paper set sensor/bypass (PS2) is blocked at timing when the power switch manual bypass tray is turned ON.3.

or a paper misfeed or malfunction is reset. • The registration sensor (PS1) is blocked before the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has unblocked the PS1.4 Misfeed at the paper separating section A. 1.0 Apr. Action Relevant electrical components Registration sensor (PS1) Exit paper sensor (PS3) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Operations Control signal – PRCB PJ17PRCB-3 (ON) PRCB PJ15PRCB-3 (ON) – Location (Electrical components) – C-5 C-18 – 1 2 3 4 Initial checks PS1 sensor check PS3 sensor check Replace PRCB Troubleshooting 158 . Paper left at the paper separating section • The registration sensor (PS1) is unblocked at timing when the power switch is turned ON. Paper separating section misfeed detection • The registration sensor (PS1) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has unblocked the PS1. 2007 13. Jam display bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.13. Detection timing Type Description • The exit paper sensor (PS3) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has unblocked the registration sensor (PS1). B.3. the cover is opened and closed.

1. Jam display bizhub 163/211/220 Troubleshooting A. Detection timing Type Fusing/exit section misfeed detection Paper left at the fusing/exit section Description • The exit paper sensor (PS3) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the registration sensor (PS1) has been blocked.0 Apr. • The exit paper sensor (PS3) is blocked at timing when the power switch is turned ON.3. 2007 13.5 Misfeed at the fusing/exit section 13. the cover is opened and closed. or a paper misfeed or malfunction is reset.Field Service Ver. B. Action Relevant electrical components Registration sensor (PS1) Exit paper sensor (PS3) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Operations Control signal – PRCB PJ17PRCB-3 (ON) PRCB PJ15PRCB-3 (ON) – Location (Electrical components) – C-5 C-18 – 1 2 3 4 Initial checks PS1 sensor check PS3 sensor check Replace PRCB 159 .

• The toner bottle home position sensor (PS6) outputs a LOW signal for a continuous 2-sec. Malfunction code 14.14. A09AF4E505DA 14.1 Trouble code • The copier’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that. period while the toner bottle is turning.160 of the DF-605/MK-501 service manual. Malfunction code bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. Code C0000 Item Main motor malfunction ADF cooling fan failure (Only when the optional DF-605 is mounted) Fusing cooling fan motor malfunction Description • The main motor (M1) lock signal remains HIGH for a continuous 1-sec. after the main motor has started turning. • The image transfer voltage remains more than 100 V continuously for a given period of time while the PC drum remains stationary. • The power supply cooling fan motor (FM2) lock signal remains HIGH for a continuous 1-sec. period while the fusing cooling fan motor is turning at full speed or decelerated speed.1. C0044 C0045 C004E Power supply cooling fan motor malfunction Troubleshooting C0070 Toner replenishing motor malfunction C0210 Abnormal image transfer voltage Faulty model setting C03FF C0500 Warm-up failure 160 .0 Apr. See the FK-506 Service Manual for these. 1. period at any time 1 sec.1 Trouble code list NOTE • Error codes having no prefix “C” are for the fax machine. gives the corresponding malfunction code and maintenance call mark on the control panel. • The surface temperature of the fusing roller does not reach a given level even after the lapse of a given period of time during a warm-up cycle. 2007 14. • The toner bottle home position sensor (PS6) outputs a HIGH signal for a continuous 3.5-sec. period while the toner bottle is turning. • The fusing cooling fan motor (FM1) lock signal remains HIGH for a continuous 1-sec. • “Model Setting” of “Adjust” available from the Service mode is incorrectly set. period while the power supply cooling fan motor remote signal remains ON (for full-speed rotation) or OFF (for decelerated-speed rotation). See P. on detecting a malfunction.

0 Apr. 161 . • The temperature detected by the thermistor (TH1) remains higher than 240°C for a given period of time. after a warm-up cycle has been (for the model having two started and thus the warm-up cycle is not completed. 1.12 of the JS-503 service manual. • The scanner home position sensor (PS100) does not go from LOW to HIGH when the scanner motor (M4) is energized for a given number of steps after a scan motion has been started at the end of a PS100 home check scan motion and during re-shading. 2007 Code Item Description 14. fusing roller heater lamps) • The surface temperature of the fusing roller does not reach *bizhub 211/220 only a given level even after the lapse of a given period of time during a warm-up cycle. C0B60 Bin switching motor malfunction (Only when the optional JS-503 is mounted) Shift motor malfunction (Only when the optional SF-501 is mounted) See P. • The temperature detected by the thermistor (TH1) remains lower than 120°C (105°C for the model having two fusing roller heater lamps) for a given period of time during a print cycle. • The temperature detected by the sub thermistor (TH2) remains lower than 105°C for a given period of time during the standby state.9 of the SF-501 service manual. • The temperature detected by the thermistor (TH1) remains lower than 120°C (105°C for the model having two fusing roller heater lamps) for a given period of time during the standby state. C0501 C0510 Fusing failure (abnormally low fusing temperature) C0511 Fusing failure (abnormally low fusing temperature 2) *bizhub 211/220 only Fusing failure (abnormally high fusing temperature) Fusing failure (abnormally high fusing temperature 2) *bizhub 211/220 only C0520 C0521 C0650 Faulty scanner home position sensor • The scanner home position sensor (PS100) does not go from HIGH to LOW when the scanner motor (M4) is energized for a given number of steps after the sequence to bring the scanner back to its home position has been started at the end of a scan motion and during re-shading. • The sub thermistor (TH2) does not detect a predetermined Warm-up failure 2 temperature within 30 sec. Malfunction code bizhub 163/211/220 Troubleshooting C0500 • The thermistor (TH1) does not detect a predetermined Warm-up failure temperature within 30 sec. C0B80 See P.Field Service Ver. fusing roller heater lamps) • The surface temperature of the fusing roller does not reach *bizhub 211/220 only a given level even after the lapse of a given period of time during a warm-up cycle. • The temperature detected by the sub thermistor (TH2) remains lower than 105°C for a given period of time during a print cycle. • The temperature detected by the sub thermistor (TH2) remains higher than 240°C for a given period of time. after a warm-up cycle has been (for the model having two started and thus the warm-up cycle is not completed.

C0F32 Faulty TCR sensor C0F33 Improperly adjusted TCR sensor C1038 Printer control board (PRCB) to MFP board (MFPB) connection failure • There is no acknowledge signal transmitted from the printer control board (PRCB) to MFP board (MFPB) for 1. Faulty ASIC/memory ASIC/memory (for image and control) fault • A write or read error occurs with SRAM on the MFP board (MFPB). the next LOW polygon motor lock signal is not detected. after the main motor (M1) has started turning is less than 5% (greater than 4.5 Engine connection failure sec. Laser scanning system malfunction • The SOS sensor does not detect a rising edge of SOS within a given period of time after the polygon motor has started turning and a laser output has been started. after the polygon motor has started turning. • An error command signal is transmitted from the MFP board (MFPB) to printer control board (PRCB). 1. Lock signal fault: Lock signal out-of-timing • A LOW polygon motor lock signal is not detected for a continuous given period of time while the rotation of the polygon motor remains stabilized.0 Apr. Startup failure • A LOW polygon motor lock signal is not detected within a given period of time that begins 1 sec. Malfunction code bizhub 163/211/220 Code Item Field Service Ver. C13F0 Faulty HSYNC 162 .117 of the FK-506 service manual. after the main motor (M1) has started turning is 19% or more (1. • The SOS sensor detects no rising edges of SOS while VIA (image area control) is ON.63 V). • An error status signal is transmitted from the printer control board (PRCB) to MFP board (MFPB). or more.14. after sampling has started of the TCR sensor (TCRS) as part of an operation of TCRS sensor automatic adjustment. 2007 Description • The measurement taken by the TCR sensor (TSRS) at a time 2. • The measurement taken by the TCR sensor (TCRS) at a time 2.0 sec.39 V to 8.41 V or less). Faulty lock signal • A LOW polygon motor lock signal is detected for a given period of time or more when the polygon motor remains deenergized.15 V during an operation of TCR sensor automatic adjustment. after the first LOW polygon motor lock signal (first Lock) has been detected.0 sec. Lock signal fault: Unstable after the first lock signal has been detected • For a period of 1 sec. • The adjustment of the TCR control voltage is not completed within 1 sec. C1200 C1300 Polygon motor malfunction Troubleshooting C133B C133D Communication with option error ROM check error See P. • The TCR sensor control voltage falls outside the range of 5.

• The intensity of the exposure lamp is a predetermined value or less during shading and re-shading. 1. • If this error message appears. Malfunction code bizhub 163/211/220 Troubleshooting • Contact the responsible people of KMBT before taking some countermeasures. 2007 Code C1468 Item Faulty parameter chip Description 14. The exposure lamp (LA1) of the scanner fails to turn ON.Field Service Ver. no operations can then be performed. • The copier determines that there is an error if writing to the flash ROM fails during upgrading of the firmware. • When the power switch is turned ON.0 Apr. either. C14A3 IR fluorescent lamp fault C3FFF Flash ROM error 163 . It is not possible to upgrade the firmware from a PC connected through USB connection. the error indicator lights up steadily and a corresponding message appears on the display.

Procedure C004E Power supply cooling fan motor malfunction C0070 C0210 Toner replenishing motor malfunction Abnormal image transfer voltage C03FF Faulty model setting • Make the correct setting for “MODEL SETTING” of “ADJUST” available from the Service mode. C0B60 Bin switching motor malfunction C0B80 Shift motor malfunction C0F32 C0F33 C1038 C1200 C1300 Faulty ATDC sensor Improperly adjusted ATDC sensor Engine connection failure Faulty ASIC/memory Polygon motor malfunction • Turn OFF and ON the power switch.14.132 C0500 C0501 C0510 C0511 C0520 C0521 C0650 Warm-up failure Warm-up failure 2 Fusing failure (abnormally low fusing temperature) Fusing failure (abnormally low fusing temperature 2) Fusing failure (abnormally high fusing temperature) Fusing failure (abnormally high fusing temperature 2) Faulty scanner home position sensor • Turn ON the power switch with the Stop key held down. 2007 14. 1.0 Apr. See P. Malfunction code bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. C133B Communication with option error Troubleshooting C133D ROM check error C13F0 C1468 Faulty HSYNC Faulty parameter chip C14A3 IR fluorescent lamp fault C3FFF Flash ROM error 164 .2 How to reset Code C0000 C0044 C0045 Description Main motor malfunction ADF cooling fan failure Fusing cooling fan motor malfunction • Turn OFF and ON the power switch.

FM1 operation check Change PRCB. Check M1 for correct drive coupling and correct as necessary. – – PRCB PJ8PRCB-8 (LOCK) – – 14. 1. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. Change PU1.3 Solution 14.Field Service Ver.2 C0045: Fusing cooling fan motor malfunction Relevant electrical components Fusing cooling fan motor (FM1) Printer control board (PRCB) Power supply unit (DCPU) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Operations Control signal 1 2 3 4 5 Check FM1 connectors for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change DCPU. M1 operation check. Malfunction code bizhub 163/211/220 Location (Electrical components) – – C-14 – – Location (Electrical components) – – C-8 – – 14.1 C0000: Main motor malfunction Relevant electrical components Main motor (M1) Printer control board (PRCB) Power supply unit (DCPU) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Operations Control signal 1 2 3 4 5 Check M1 connectors for proper connection and correct as necessary.3. Change PRCB. 2007 14.0 Apr.3. – – PRCB PJ22PRCB-1 (REM) PRCB PJ22PRCB-3 (LOCK) – – 165 Troubleshooting .

3.3 C004E: Power unit cooling fan motor malfunction Relevant electrical components Power unit cooling fan motor (FM2) Printer control board (PRCB) Power supply unit (DCPU) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Operations Control signal Location (Electrical components) – – L-16 – – 1 2 3 4 5 Check FM2 connectors for proper connection and correct as necessary.4 C0070: Toner replenishing motor malfunction Relevant electrical components Toner replenishing motor (M2) Toner bottle home position sensor (PS6) Printer control board (PRCB) Power supply unit (DCPU) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Operations Control signal Location (Electrical components) – – C-6 to 7 C-6 to 7 – – 1 2 3 Check M2 connectors for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change DCPU. Change DCPU.3. 1. Check M2 for correct drive coupling and correct as necessary. M2 operation check PS6 sensor check Change PRCB.14. Malfunction code bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. FM2 operation check Change PRCB.0 Apr. – – PRCB PJ16PRCB-1 (REM) PRCB PJ16PRCB-5 (ON) – – Troubleshooting 4 5 6 166 . 2007 14. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. – – DCPU CN7DCPU-1 (REM) DCPU CN7DCPU-3 (LOCK) – – 14.

Check the fusing roller thermostat for operation. <Check procedure> Check the resistance of fusing roller thermostat.7 14.5 C0210: Abnormal image transfer voltage Relevant electrical components Image transfer roller High voltage unit (HV1) 14.3. . – 3 – 167 Troubleshooting Check that the fusing roller heater lamp turns ON when the power switch is turned ON and correct the lamp as necessary.8 14. 1.6 14. Fusing roller thermostat is opencircuited if its resistance is infinity.11 C0500: Warm-up failure C0501: Warm-up failure 2 (bizhub 211/220 Only) C0510: Fusing failure (Abnormally low fusing temperature) C0511: Fusing failure (Abnormally low fusing temperature 2) (bizhub 211/220 Only) C0520: Fusing failure (Abnormally high fusing temperature) C0521: Fusing failure (Abnormally high fusing temperature 2) (bizhub 211/220 Only) Relevant electrical components Thermistor (TH1) Sub thermistor (TH2) Fusing unit interlock switch (S2) Printer control board (PRCB) Power supply unit (DCPU) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Operations Control signal Location (Electrical components) 1 – 2 Check that the fusing roller sub heater lamp turns ON when the power switch is turned ON and correct the lamp as necessary.3.9 14.0 Apr.3. Malfunction code bizhub 163/211/220 – – – – – – Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Operations Control signal Location (Electrical components) 1 2 3 Check the image transfer roller for installation.3. 2007 14.10 14. Change HV1. – – – 14.3. Change PRCB.3.3.Field Service Ver.

– L-8 to 9 5 – – 6 – C-18 7 – T-17 to 18 8 9 10 11 – – – – – – – – Troubleshooting 168 . Check the thermistor (TH1) for operation. 1. TH2 is open-circuited if the resistance is infinity. 2007 WIRING DIAGRAM Step Operations Control signal Location (Electrical components) 4 Check the fusing unit interlock switch (S2) for operation. TH1 is open-circuited if the resistance is infinity. Change PRCB. <Check procedure> Disconnect CN15 (4P) and check the resistance across CN15-2 and 3 on the thermistor side. Check the sub thermistor (TH2) for operation. • Across S2-1A and S2-1B • Across S2-2A and S2-2B Check the thermistor (TH1) and sub thermistor (TH2) for installation and correct or clean as necessary. Check the fusing roller sub heater lamp for continuity and correct as necessary. Malfunction code bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.0 Apr. Change DCPU.14. <Check procedure> Disconnect CN22 (4P) and check the resistance across CN22-2 and 3 on the thermistor side. <Check procedure> Check continuity across the following terminals when S2 is ON. Check the fusing roller heater lamp for continuity and correct as necessary.

3. – – MFPB P105MFPB-1 to 4 – MFPB P114MFPB-3 (ON) – 14. 2007 14. Check M4 for correct drive coupling and correct as necessary. Run “ATDC AUTO ADJUST.Field Service Ver. M4 operation check Scanner operation check PS100 sensor check Change MFPB. Change TCRS. 169 Troubleshooting – .3.12 C0650: Faulty scanner home position sensor Relevant electrical components Scanner motor (M4) Scanner home position sensor (PS100) MFP board (MFPB) 14. Malfunction code bizhub 163/211/220 – – L-12 – L-14 – – – – – – WIRING DIAGRAM Step Operations Control signal Location (Electrical components) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Check M4 connectors for proper connection and correct as necessary.0 Apr.3.” Change PRCB. Check the TCR sensor connectors for proper connection and correct as necessary.13 14. Change DCPU.14 C0F32: Faulty TCR sensor C0F33: Improperly adjusted TCR sensor Relevant electrical components TCR sensor (TCRS) Printer control board (PRCB) Power supply unit (DCPU) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Operations Control signal – – – – – – Location (Electrical components) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Check to see if developer is available. 1.

Check the MFPB connectors for proper connection and correct as necessary. Malfunction code bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.3.14. 1. Check memory on MFPB for connection and correct as necessary. Troubleshooting 170 . Change MFPB. Check the PRCB connectors for proper connection and correct as necessary. 4 5 6 – – – – – – 14. Check for proper connection between PRCB and MFPB and correct as necessary. Change PRCB. Change MFPB. 2007 14.15 C1038: Engine connection failure Relevant electrical components Printer control board (PRCB) MFP board (MFPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Operations Control signal – – – Location (Electrical components) – – – 1 2 3 Turn OFF and ON the power switch.0 Apr.16 C1200: Faulty ASIC/Memory Relevant electrical components MFP board (MFPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Operations Control signal – – – Location (Electrical components) – – – 1 2 3 Turn OFF and ON the power switch.3.

14. Change the PH unit. 1. Check connectors on CCDB for proper connection and correct as necessary.3.18 C1300: Polygon motor malfunction C13F0: Faulty HSYNC Relevant electrical components PH unit 14.19 C14A3: IR fluorescent lamp fault Relevant electrical components Exposure lamp (LA1) Inverter board (INVB) CCD board (CCDB) MFP board (MFPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Operations Control signal 1 Check that the exposure lamp (LA1) turns ON when the power switch is turned ON and correct or replace as necessary. Check connectors on INVB for proper connection and correct as necessary. – 2 3 4 – – – 171 Troubleshooting – . Change PRCB.Field Service Ver. 2007 14.17 14. Check for proper connection between the PH unit and master board and correct as necessary. Malfunction code bizhub 163/211/220 Location (Electrical components) – – – – Location (Electrical components) – – – Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Operations Control signal – – – – 1 2 3 4 Turn OFF and ON the power switch.3.3. Change MFPB.0 Apr.

– – 2 3 4 5 – – – – – – – – Troubleshooting 172 . Change MFPB. Perform upgrading of the firmware through BIOS. MFPB. 1. 2007 14. control panel): If there is any abnormality. Unplug parameter chip (U18) from MFPB and then plug it back in.20 C3FFF: Flash ROM error Relevant electrical components Printer control board (PRCB) MFP board (MFPB) Control panel WIRING DIAGRAM Step Operations Control signal Location (Electrical components) 1 Check the connection status of connectors on each board (PRCB. Malfunction code bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.0 Apr. Identify the specific firmware that is responsible for the error. correct it.3.14.

2 3 NO • Check wall outlet for voltage.1 The copier does not turn ON Step 1 Check A malfunction code appears when the power switch is turned ON. 6 NO • Change power supply unit (DCPU) NO 7 • Check MFP board (MFPB). • Change power supply unit (DCPU) • Change control panel.Field Service Ver. • Voltage across P110MFPB-1 and GND • Voltage across P110MFPB-2 and GND DC0 V when the power switch is OFF DC24 V when the power switch is turned ON Check of output of DC24 V to printer control board (PRCB) <Check procedure> Check voltage across a printer control board (PRCB) pin and GND when the power switch is turned ON. 2007 15. • Change power supply unit (DCPU). • Change power supply unit (DCPU). The malfunction is temporarily reset when the power switch is turned OFF and ON with the Stop key held down. • Voltage across PJ6PRCB-9 and GND DC0 V when the power switch is OFF DC24 V when the power switch is turned ON Check of output of DC5 V to control panel <Check procedure> Check voltage across a MFP board (MFPB) pin and GND when the power switch is turned ON. Power supply voltage check <Check procedure> Check voltage across pins of power supply unit (DCPU) when the power switch is turned ON. • Check power cord for continuity. Voltage across P102MFPB-1 and GND DC0 V when the power switch is OFF DC5 V when the power switch is turned ON Result YES NO YES Action • Go to step 2. • Check power switch. Power supply trouble 15. • Voltage across CN1DCPU-1 and CN1DCPU2 AC0 V when the power switch is OFF Rated AC voltage when the power switch is turned ON Check of output of DC24 V to MFP board (copier: MFPB) <Check procedure> Check voltage across a MFP board (MFPB) pin and GND when the power switch is turned ON. 5 NO • Check front door interlock switch (S3). • Voltage across PJ2PRCB-2 and GND DC0 V when the power switch is OFF DC24 V when the power switch is turned ON Check of output of DC 5 V to printer control board (PRCB) <Check procedure> Check voltage across a printer control board (PRCB) pin and GND when the power switch is turned ON. • Perform the troubleshooting procedure according to the malfunction code. YES 173 Troubleshooting . • Change printer control board (PRCB). 4 NO • Check front door interlock switch (S3). • Check right door interlock switch (S4). Power supply trouble bizhub 163/211/220 15. • Check right door interlock switch (S4). • Go to step 3. 1.0 Apr.

• Change original glass. 1.). • Reposition original. Then.1. troubleshooting is divided into “initial checks” and “troubleshooting procedures classified by image failures. then proceed to the corresponding image failure troubleshooting procedure. • Clean PM parts. • Instruct user to use original with appropriate image density. 2007 16. The PM parts relating to image formation have reached the end of cleaning/replacement cycles. Original is transparent (OHP film. • Clean original glass. first make the initial checks.1 Initial check items • Determine if the failure is attributable to a basic cause or causes. 16. YES Check Paper meets product specifications. Image quality problem 16. • Change paper for one that is dry.” • If any image failure has occurred. Image quality problem bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. Adjustment item in which readjustment is made to improve the image faulty. 3 4 Original 5 6 Original is placed correctly. etc. Original glass is dirty or scratchy. • Instruct user to use originals that meet specifications. Original is written in light pencil. NO YES YES YES PM parts 7 YES Adjustment items 8 YES • Re-adjustment Troubleshooting 174 .0 Apr. • Change PM parts.16. Result NO Action • Instruct user to use paper that meets specifications and is recommended. Section Step 1 Paper 2 Paper is damp.1 How to identify problematic part • In this chapter. instruct user to use paper that meets specifications and in how to store paper.

Check Full-size Result Reduced Action Copy made at a reduced ratio Input system (scanner) A09AF3C520DA Full-size Reduced A09AF3C519DA Output system (printer) A09AF3C521DA 175 Troubleshooting .2 Identification of the faulty system 16.Field Service Ver.0 Apr. 1. Image quality problem bizhub 163/211/220 • Determine if the failure is attributable to an input system (scanner) or output system (printer). 2007 16.1.

16. • Reconnect. 2007 16.2.0 Apr. • Change printer control board (PRCB). NO Troubleshooting 176 .1 Image reading section: Blank copy A. Result YES YES 2 MFP board (MFPB) connector is loose. 1. Action • Reconnect. Troubleshooting procedure Step 1 Check CCD board (CCDB) connector is loose. Image quality problem bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. • Change MFP board (MFPB).2 Solution 16. Typical faulty images A09AF3C522DA B.

Typical faulty images B. Result NO NO YES NO YES YES Action Go to step 3. 2007 16. Reconnect. Change exposure lamp. Exposure lamp is abnormally lit (flickers or abnormally dark) when the power switch is turned ON. Troubleshooting procedure Step 1 2 3 4 Check Exposure lamp turns ON when the power switch is turned ON. Inverter board (INVB) connector is loose. • Change inverter board (INVB). Reconnect.2 Image reading section: Black copy 16. 5 MFP board (MFPB) connector is loose. • Change CCD unit.0 Apr. NO 177 Troubleshooting . CCD board (CCDB) connector is loose. • Change MFP board (MFPB). Reconnect. 1. Go to step 4. Image quality problem bizhub 163/211/220 A09AF3C523DA A.2.Field Service Ver.

16. • Clean.3 Image reading section: Low image density A. • Reconnect.0 Apr. Troubleshooting procedure Step 1 2 Check Shading sheet reading portion (the portion on the backside of the original glass to which original width scale is affixed) is dirty. 1. • Change MFP board (MFPB). • Change printer control board (PRCB). • Reconnect. 2007 16. Result YES YES YES 3 MFP board (MFPB) connector is loose. Action NO Troubleshooting 178 . Image quality problem bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.2. CCD board (CCDB) connector is loose. Typical faulty images A09AF3C524DA B.

Troubleshooting procedure Step 1 2 3 4 Original glass is dirty. • Change inverter board (INVB).0 Apr.Field Service Ver. Inverter board (INVB) connector is loose. Exposure lamp (LA1) is dirty. • Change exposure lamp (LA1). Typical faulty images B.2.4 16. Exposure lamp is abnormally lit (flickers or abnormally dark) when the Start key is pressed. Action 5 NO YES • Go to step 7. • Reconnect. 1. • Clean. 2007 16. Scanner mirrors are dirty. • Clean. 6 NO YES 7 CCD board (CCDB) connector is loose. CCD unit lens and CCD surface are dirty. • Clean. Image quality problem bizhub 163/211/220 A09AF3C525DA Image reading section: Foggy background or rough image A. Check Result YES YES YES YES • Clean. • Change MFP board (MFPB). <Check procedure> Remove lens cover to check for possible contamination. NO 179 Troubleshooting . • Reconnect.

16. Image quality problem
bizhub 163/211/220

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007

16.2.5

Image reading section: Black streaks or bands

A. Typical faulty images
Black streaks Black bands

A09AF3C526DA

B. Troubleshooting procedure
Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Check Original glass is dirty, scratchy, worn, or damaged. Shading sheet reading portion (the portion on the backside of the original glass to which original width scale is affixed) is dirty. Scanner mirrors are dirty, scratchy, or damaged. Exposure lamp (LA1) is dirty. CCD unit lens and CCD surface are dirty or scratchy. <Check procedure> Remove lens cover to check for possible contamination. CCD board (CCDB) connector is loose. Result YES YES YES YES YES YES YES 7 MFP board (MFPB) connector is loose. NO Action • Clean or change. • Clean. • Clean or change. • Clean or change. • Clean or change. • Reconnect. • Reconnect. • Change CCD unit. • Change MFP board (MFPB).

Troubleshooting

180

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007 16.2.6 Image reading section: Black spots

16. Image quality problem
bizhub 163/211/220
A09AF3C527DA

A. Typical faulty images

B. Troubleshooting procedure
Step 1 2 Check Original glass is dirty or scratchy. CCD board (CCDB) connector is loose. Result YES YES YES 3 MFP board (MFPB) connector is loose. NO • Clean. • Reconnect. • Reconnect. • Change CCD unit. • Change MFP board (MFPB). Action

181

Troubleshooting

16. Image quality problem
bizhub 163/211/220

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007

16.2.7

Image reading section: White streaks or bands

A. Typical faulty images
White streaks White bands

A09AF3C528DA

B. Troubleshooting procedure
Step 1 2 3 4 5 Check Original glass is dirty, scratchy, worn, or damaged. Shading sheet reading portion (the portion on the backside of the original glass to which original width scale is affixed) is dirty. Scanner mirrors are dirty, scratchy, or damaged. CCD unit lens and CCD surface are dirty or scratchy. <Check procedure> Remove lens cover to check for possible contamination. CCD board (CCDB) connector is loose. Result YES YES YES YES YES YES 6 MFP board (MFPB) connector is loose. NO Action • Clean or change. • Clean. • Clean or change. • Clean or change. • Reconnect. • Reconnect. • Change CCD unit. • Change MFP board (MFPB).

Troubleshooting

182

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007 16.2.8 Image reading section: Uneven image density

16. Image quality problem
bizhub 163/211/220
A09AF3C529DA

A. Typical faulty images

B. Troubleshooting procedure
Step 1 2 3 4 5 Check Original glass is dirty, scratchy, worn, or damaged. Shading sheet reading portion (the portion on the backside of the original glass to which original width scale is affixed) is dirty. Scanner mirrors are dirty, scratchy, or damaged. Exposure lamp (LA1) is dirty. CCD unit lens and CCD surface are dirty or scratchy. <Check procedure> Remove lens cover to check for possible contamination. Exposure lamp is abnormally lit (flickers or abnormally dark) when the power switch is turned ON. Inverter board (INVB) connector CN1INVB is loose. CCD board (CCDB) connector is loose. Result YES YES YES YES YES Action • Clean or change. • Clean. • Clean or change. • Clean or change. • Clean or change.

6

NO YES

• Go to step 8. • Reconnect. • Change exposure lamp (LA1). • Reconnect. • Reconnect.

7 8

NO YES YES

NO

183

Troubleshooting

9

MFP board (MFPB) connector is loose.

• Change CCD unit. • Change MFP board (MFPB).

16. Image quality problem
bizhub 163/211/220

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007

16.2.9

Image reading section: Gradation reproduction failure

A. Typical faulty images

A09AF3C530DA

B. Troubleshooting procedure
Step 1 2 3 4 5 Check Original glass is dirty, scratchy, worn, or damaged. Shading sheet reading portion (the portion on the backside of the original glass to which original width scale is affixed) is dirty. Scanner mirrors are dirty, scratchy, or damaged. Exposure lamp (LA1) is dirty. CCD unit lens and CCD surface are dirty or scratchy. <Check procedure> Remove lens cover to check for possible contamination. Exposure lamp is abnormally lit (flickers or abnormally dark) when the Start key is pressed. Inverter board (INVB) connector CN2INVB is loose. CCD board (CCDB) connector is loose. Result YES YES YES YES YES Action • Clean or change. • Clean. • Clean or change. • Clean or change. • Clean or change.

6

NO YES

• Go to step 8. • Reconnect. • Change exposure lamp (LA1). • Reconnect. • Reconnect. • Change CCD unit. • Change MFP board (MFPB).

7 8

NO YES YES

Troubleshooting

9

MFP board (MFPB) connector is loose.

NO

184

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007 16.2.10 Image reading section: Periodically uneven image

16. Image quality problem
bizhub 163/211/220
A09AF3C531DA

A. Typical faulty images

B. Troubleshooting procedure
Step 1 2 3 4 5 Check Scanner motor (M4) is securely fastened using the dedicated fixing screws. Scanner motor (M4) drive mechanism is dirty or damaged. Scanner drive mechanism pulley is dirty with foreign matter, scratchy, deformed, worn, or damaged. Scanner drive cables are wound incorrectly. Scanner rails and bearings are dirty with foreign matter, scratchy, deformed, worn, or damaged. Scanner moves smoothly. <Check procedure> Gently move the scanner by hand to check for smooth operation. CCD board (CCDB) connector is loose. Result NO YES YES YES YES Action • Secure in position. • Clean or change. • Remove foreign matter or change. • Re-wind scanner drive cables. • Clean or change. • Lubricate the scanner rails. • Reinstall scanner. • Reconnect. • Reconnect. • Change CCD unit. • Change MFP board (MFPB).

6

NO

7

YES YES

8

MFP board (MFPB) connector is loose.

NO

185

Troubleshooting

16. Image quality problem
bizhub 163/211/220

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007

16.2.11

Image reading section: Moire

A. Typical faulty images

A09AF3C532DA

B. Troubleshooting procedure
Step Check Moire distortions recur even after the orientation of original has been changed. Moire distortions recur even after the original mode has been changed. Moire distortions recur even when the zoom ratio is changed. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of step up 3. Result Action • Change the original mode (select one other than that resulted in moire). • Change the original image mode. • Change the zoom ratio setting. • Adjust CCD MAIN ZOOM and CCD SUB ZOOM. See P.128

1

NO

2 3

NO NO

4

NO

Troubleshooting

186

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007 16.2.12 Printer section: Blank copy

16. Image quality problem
bizhub 163/211/220
A09AF3C522DA

A. Typical faulty images

B. Troubleshooting procedure
Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Check Imaging unit is installed correctly. Connector between the imaging unit and copier is dirty. PH shutter (located along the laser path between the PH unit and PC drum) is not in correct position or malfunctions. Connectors PJ12A and PJ13A in PH unit come off or lift. Image transfer roller assy is installed correctly. Image transfer current contact is dirty, broken, or bent. Developing bias contact is dirty, broken, or bent. High voltage unit (HV1) connectors is loose. The following voltage is supplied from the printer control board (PRCB). <Check procedure> Check that there is 24 V developing across the printer control board pin and GND when the power switch is turned ON (during a copy cycle or a standby state). Result NO YES YES YES NO YES YES YES Action • Reinstall. • Clean. • Correct or reinstall. • Reconnect. • Reinstall. • Clean, correct, or change. • Clean, correct, or change. • Reconnect. • Change IU. • Change PH unit. • Change high voltage unit (HV1).

YES

9

187

Troubleshooting

NO

• Change printer control board (PRCB).

16. Image quality problem
bizhub 163/211/220

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007

16.2.13

Printer section: Black copy

A. Typical faulty images

A09AF3C523DA

B. Troubleshooting Procedure
Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Check PC drum charge corona grid mesh and comb electrode are loose. PC drum charge corona contact is dirty, scratchy, folded, bent, or damaged. Grid bias contact is dirty, folded, or bent. PC drum ground contact is dirty, scratchy, bent, or damaged. High voltage unit (HV1) connectors is loose. The PH unit cable is loose. The following voltage is supplied from the printer control board (PRCB). <Check procedure> Check that there is 24 V developing across the printer control board pin and GND when the power switch is turned ON (during a copy cycle or a standby state). Result YES YES YES YES YES YES Action • Reinstall. • Correct or change. • Clean, correct, or change. • Clean, correct, or change. • Reconnect. • Reconnect. • Change IU. • Change PH unit. • Change high voltage unit (HV1). • Change printer control board (PRCB).

YES

7

NO

Troubleshooting

188

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007 16.2.14 Printer section: Low image density

16. Image quality problem
bizhub 163/211/220
A09AF3C524DA

A. Typical faulty images

B. Troubleshooting procedure
Step 1 Check The image changes when “TONER REPLENISHER” is executed. • “Toner Replenisher” of Utility The image changes when “ID ADJUST” and “VG ADJUSTt” are executed. Image transfer current contact is dirty, folded, or bent. Developing bias contact is dirty, folded, or bent. High voltage unit (HV1) connectors is loose. TCR sensor (TCRS) is dirty with foreign matter (such as paper dust) other than developer. The following voltages develop from the TCR sensor (TCRS). <Check procedure> Check voltage across a master board pin and GND when the power switch is turned ON. • DC5.39 V to 8.15 V across PJ10A-1 and GND • DC1.41 V to 4.98 V across PJ10A-3 and GND The following voltage is supplied from the printer control board (PRCB). <Check procedure> • Check that there is 24 V developing across the printer control board pin and GND when the power switch is turned ON (during a copy cycle or a standby state). Result YES Action • Replenish the supply of toner using toner replenisher. • Readjust. For details, see ADJUSTING/SETTING. • Clean, correct, or change. • Clean, correct, or change. • Reconnect. • Clean.

2

YES

3 4 5 6

YES YES YES YES

7

NO

• Change TCR sensor (TCRS) and then change developer.

YES

8

• Change IU. • Change high voltage unit (HV1). • Change printer control board (PRCB).

NO

189

Troubleshooting

16. Image quality problem
bizhub 163/211/220

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007

16.2.15

Printer section: Foggy background or rough image

A. Typical faulty images

A09AF3C525DA

B. Troubleshooting procedure
Step 1 2 3 4 5 Check The image changes when “ID ADJUST” and “VG ADJUST” are executed. PC drum surface and the areas in contact with Ds collars are dirty with foreign matter, or deformed or worn. Eraser lamp (EL1) is dirty. Grid bias contact is dirty, scratchy, deformed, worn, or damaged. TCR sensor (TCRS) is dirty with foreign matter (such as paper dust) other than developer. The following voltages develop from the TCR sensor (TCRS). <Check procedure> Check voltage across a master board pin and GND when the power switch is turned ON. • DC5.39 V to 8.15 V across PJ10A-1 and GND • DC1.41 V to 4.98 V across PJ10A-3 and GND Result YES YES YES YES YES Action • Readjust. For details, see ADJUSTING/SETTING. • Clean or change. • Clean. • Clean, correct, or change. • Clean.

6

NO

• Change TCR sensor (TCRS) and then change developer.

7

The following voltage is supplied from the printer control board (PRCB). <Check procedure> • Check that there is 24 V developing across the printer control board pin and GND when the power switch is turned ON (during a copy cycle or a standby state).

YES

• Adjust Db. For details, see ADJUSTING/SETTING. • Change eraser lamp (EL1). • Change PC drum. • Change imaging unit. • Change high voltage unit (HV1). • Change printer control board (PRCB).

Troubleshooting

NO

190

Image quality problem bizhub 163/211/220 A09AF3C526DA A. • Change IU. or out of position. • Clean or change.16 Printer section: black streaks or bands 16. Fusing roller is dirty or scratchy. 1.2. • Remove foreign matter.Field Service Ver. damaged. 191 Troubleshooting . or change. Typical faulty images Black streaks Black bands B. deformed.0 Apr. 2007 16. • Clean or change. DB of IU is plugged with foreign matter (such as paper dust). PC drum charge corona grid mesh and comb electrode are dirty. correct. Foreign matter (such as paper dust) sticks to the cleaning blade of IU or the blade curves upward. PH window of the PH unit is dirty or scratchy. Troubleshooting procedure Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Check PC drum is dirty or scratchy. • Remove foreign matter. scratchy. • Clean or change. Result YES YES YES YES YES YES NO Action • Clean or change.

deformed. Action 6 The image changes when “VG ADJUST” is executed. see ADJUSTING/SETTING.16.2. • Clean or change fusing paper separator fingers and finger springs. scratchy. Result YES YES YES YES YES • Clean. YES Troubleshooting 192 . worn. Tip of the PC drum paper separator finger is dirty. • Clean or change. 1. Fusing roller is dirty or scratchy. or damaged.0 Apr. scratchy. For details.17 Printer section: Black spots A. 2007 16. Typical faulty images A09AF3C527DA B. • Readjust. deformed. PC drum is dirty or scratchy. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 4 5 Check Toner is present along the paper path. • Clean or change. worn. • Clean or change. Tip of the fusing paper separator finger is dirty. Image quality problem bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. or damaged.

or change. scratchy. or change. deformed. scratchy.18 Printer section: Blank streaks or bands 16. deformed. PC drum charge corona grid mesh and comb electrode are dirty. Post-fusing guide plate is dirty. correct. scratchy. Result YES YES YES YES YES NO Action • Clean.0 Apr. DB of IU is plugged with foreign matter (such as paper dust). Image quality problem bizhub 163/211/220 A09AF3C528DA A. • Clean. Typical faulty images White streaks White bands B. 193 Troubleshooting . • Clean or change. 2007 16. or damaged. Troubleshooting procedure Step 1 2 3 4 5 Check PC drum ground terminal is dirty. • Remove foreign matter. • Change IU. or damaged.Field Service Ver. worn. PH window of the PH unit is dirty. or damaged. • Clean or change. scratchy. or damaged. 1. correct.2. deformed.

or damaged. or damaged. or change. YES 8 9 YES YES NO YES YES NO Troubleshooting 10 11 12 194 . or damaged. Result YES YES YES YES YES Action • Remove foreign matter. PC drum charge corona. scratchy. 6 NO 7 Developer is not even in the developer mixing chamber of IU. and comb electrode are loose. deformed. scratchy. Charge neutralizing plate is dirty. deformed. • Clean or change. Typical faulty images A09AF3C533DA B. • Clean or change. • Clean or change. Image transfer roller is dirty. scratchy. scratchy. grid mesh. DB of IU is plugged with foreign matter (such as paper dust). PC drum charge corona contact is dirty. • Reinstall. worn. Paper dust plugs up the paper dust remover. For details. correct. or change. correct. • Clean. Fusing roller is dirty. • Clean.2. see ADJUSTING/SETTING. worn.0 Apr. 2007 16. deformed. • Even out developer in the developer mixing chamber.19 Printer section: Void areas A. • Adjust Db. Toner is even on sleeve/magnet roller.16. • Clean. Developing roller is dirty. • Remove foreign matter. or worn. or bent. Image quality problem bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. 1. or change. Troubleshooting procedure Step 1 2 3 4 5 Check Foreign matter is present along the paper path. worn. folded. • Reinstall. scratchy. correct. deformed. Image transfer roller assy is installed correctly. • Change IU.

NO 195 Troubleshooting . 2007 16. Image transfer roller is dirty. scratchy. • Clean.0 Apr. Action • Clean interior. Result YES YES YES YES YES 5 Grid bias contact is dirty. or damaged. worn. • Clean or change. or damaged. Troubleshooting procedure Step 1 2 3 4 Check Toner is spilled over area inside copier. 1. • Change high voltage unit (HV1). Image quality problem bizhub 163/211/220 A09AF3C534DA A. • Change printer control board (PRCB).2. scratchy. • Clean.Field Service Ver. deformed.20 Printer section: Smear on back 16. Typical faulty images B. Fusing pressure roller is dirty. Toner is present along the paper path. correct. or change. • Clean or change.

correct. deformed. correct. deformed. Image transfer roller is dirty. scratchy. Result YES YES YES YES Action • Clean. deformed. Toner is even on sleeve/magnet roller. • Adjust Db. 5 NO YES 6 Developer is not even in the developer mixing chamber of IU. or damaged. or change. • Even out developer in the developer mixing chamber. worn. or change. damaged. or damaged. scratchy. • Clean or change.21 Printer section: Uneven image density A. Sleeve/magnet roller is dirty. 1. deformed. PC drum charge corona grid mesh and comb electrode are dirty.0 Apr. worn. NO Troubleshooting 196 . • Clean. Image quality problem bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. see ADJUSTING/SETTING. or loose. Typical faulty images A09AF3C529DA B. scratchy. • Change printer control board (PRCB). For details. worn.2. worn. scratchy. • Clean or change. 2007 16. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 4 Check PC drum ground plate is dirty. • Change IU.16. or damaged.

• Clean or change. • DC5. The following voltages develop from the TCR sensor (TCRS).0 Apr.98 V across PJ10A-3 and GND Check Result YES YES YES YES YES NO • Clean.Field Service Ver. <Check procedure> Check voltage across a printer control board pin and GND when the power switch is turned ON. 1.2. Action 6 YES • Change printer control board (PRCB). • Clean.41 V to 4. 2007 16. 197 Troubleshooting . • Clean. • Change TCR sensor (TCRS) and developer. or damaged.15 V across PJ10A-1 and GND • DC1. worn. Typical faulty images B. The PH unit cable is loose. Image quality problem bizhub 163/211/220 A09AF3C530DA A. • Reconnect. PH window of PH unit is dirty. deformed. TCR sensor (TCRS) is dirty with foreign matter (such as paper dust) other than developer. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 4 5 PC drum is dirty.22 Printer section: Gradation reproduction failure 16. scratchy.39 V to 8. Image transfer roller is dirty.

or worn.16. PC drum surfaces in contact with Ds collars and drive mechanism are dirty.0 Apr. scratchy. 1. • Clean or change.23 Printer section: Periodically uneven image A. Typical faulty images A09AF3C531DA B. PH unit is securely fastened using the dedicated fixing screws. or worn. 6 Troubleshooting 198 .2. • Clean or change. • Clean or change. deformed. scratchy. • Clean or change. scratchy. Fusing unit drive mechanism is dirty. deformed. deformed. • Change printer control board (PRCB). Image quality problem bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. Result NO NO YES YES YES YES NO Action • Secure in position. or worn. IU drive mechanism is dirty or damaged. Troubleshooting procedure Step 1 2 3 4 5 Check IU is securely fastened using the dedicated fixing screws. 2007 16. Registration roller drive mechanism is dirty. • Secure in position.

1 Main body [13] [12] [11] [10] [9] [8] [7] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Fusing unit interlock switch (S2) Registration roller clutch (CL1) Fusing cooling fan motor (FM1) Eraser lamp (EL1) Paper feed solenoid/bypass (SD2) Toner replenishing motor (M2) PH unit [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] Power supply unit (DCPU) Heater relay board (RYB) *1 MFP board (MFPB) Paper feed solenoid/1 (SD1) Switchback motor (M3) *2 *1: 200 V areas of bizhub 163/211/220 only *2: bizhub 211/220 only 199 Appendix Main motor (M1) . 2007 17.0 Apr. Parts layout drawing 17. Parts layout drawing bizhub 163/211/220 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] A09AF5E510DA Appendix 17.Field Service Ver. 1.

2007 [15] [13] [14] [1] [2] [3] [12] [4] [11] [5] [6] [7] [10] [9] [8] A09AF5E511DA [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] Pre-image transfer register board (PITRB) Thermistor (TH1) Exit paper sensor (PS3) TCR sensor (TCRS) Registration sensor (PS1) Toner bottle home position sensor (PS6) Front door interlock switch (S3) Right side door interlock switch (S4) [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] Paper empty sensor/1 (PS4) Paper set sensor/bypass (PS2) FAX board (FAXB) *1 NCU board (NCUB) *1 Printer control board (PRCB) High voltage unit (HV1) Sub thermistor (TH2) *2 Appendix *1: Optional fax kit FK-506 *2: bizhub 211/220 only 200 . Parts layout drawing bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. 1.17.0 Apr.

2007 17.Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. Parts layout drawing bizhub 163/211/220 [5] A09AF5E512DA [15] [14] [16] [17] [1] [2] [3] [4] [13] [12] [11] [10] [9] [8] [7] [6] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] Scanner motor (M4) Original size sensor 2 (Option) (PS102) CCD board (CCDB) Original cover set switch (S6) Control panel Power switch (S1) Tray set sensor/1 (PS5) Inch/metric sensor/1 (PS7) Paper size detect board (PSDTB) [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] Power unit cooling fan motor (FM2) Flickerless resistor (R1) *1 Paper size sensor (S5) Scanner home position sensor (PS100) Original cover sensor (PS8) Exposure lamp (LA1) Inverter board (INVB) Original size sensor 1 (PS101) *1: Only for 200 V areas of bizhub 163 201 Appendix .

2 DF-502 (option) [1] [14] [12] [13] [15] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [11] [8] [10] [9] A09AF5C506DA [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] Width sensor/3 (PS12) Width sensor/2 (PS11) Width sensor/1 (PS10) Length sensor/1 (PS6) Length sensor/3 (PS8) Length sensor/4 (PS9) Length sensor/2 (PS7) Paper empty sensor (PS2) [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] Paper exit sensor (PS5) Registration sensor (PS3) Separator sensor (PS4) Paper feed clutch (CL1) Upper door open/close sensor (PS1) Main motor (M1) DF control board (DFCB) Appendix 202 . 2007 17. 1. Parts layout drawing bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.17.0 Apr.

Parts layout drawing bizhub 163/211/220 [5] [6] [7] [8] 4040F5C525DA 17. 1.3 DF-605 (option) [1] [20] [18] [19] [2] [3] [4] [17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] [9] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] Interface Board (PWA-TRAY) FD Paper Size Detection Sensor 1 (PC1-ADF) FD Paper Size Detection Sensor 3 (PC3-ADF) FD Paper Size Detection Sensor 4 (PC4-ADF) FD Paper Size Detection Sensor 2 (PC2-ADF) Variable Resistor (PBA-VR) Mix Document Size Detection Board (PBA-SIZE) Print Lamp Board (PBA-LED) Exit Roller Retraction Solenoid (SL1-ADF) Empty Sensor (PC5-ADF) [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] Stamp Solenoid (SL2-ADF) Original Detection Sensor (PC8-ADF) Exit/Turnover Sensor (PC10-ADF) Registration Sensor (PC9-ADF) Separator Sensor (PC6-ADF) Transport Motor (M2-ADF) Paper Feed Motor (M1-ADF) Upper Door Open/Close Sensor (PC7-ADF) Cooling Fan Motor (M3-ADF) Main Control Board (PBA-CONT) 203 Appendix .Field Service Ver.0 Apr. 2007 17.

Parts layout drawing bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. 2007 17. 1.4 PF-502 (option) [8] [7] [1] [2] [3] [6] [4] [5] A09AF5C514DA [1] [2] [3] [4] Tray set sensor (PS3) Paper size detect switch (SW1) Door sensor (PS4) Paper empty sensor (PS1) [5] [6] [7] [8] Paper feed sensor (PS2) Paper size detect board (PSDTB) PF drive board (PFDB) Paper feed solenoid (SD1) Appendix 204 .0 Apr.17.

5 MB-501 (option) [1] [1] Paper feed solenoid (SD1) [2] Paper empty sensor (PS1) 205 Appendix .Field Service Ver. 2007 17.0 Apr. 1. Parts layout drawing bizhub 163/211/220 [2] A09AF5C515DA 17.

6 AD-504 (option) [1] [2] [5] [4] [3] A09AF5E508DA [1] [2] [3] Transport motor (M1) Door sensor (PS1) Paper set sensor/bypass (PS3) [4] [5] Transport sensor (PS2) AD drive board (ADDB) Appendix 206 .17.0 Apr. 2007 17. Parts layout drawing bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. 1.

7 JS-503 (option) [1] [7] [6] [5] [1] [2] [3] [4] JS drive board (JSDB) Paper detecting board (PSDB) Bin switching motor (M1) Lower home position sensor (PS2) [5] [6] [7] Upper home position sensor (PS1) Paper full sensor (PS3) Paper empty sensor (PS4) 207 Appendix .0 Apr. Parts layout drawing bizhub 163/211/220 [2] [3] [4] A09AF5C507DA 17.Field Service Ver. 2007 17. 1.

2007 17.17.0 Apr. 1. Parts layout drawing bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.8 SF-501 (option) [1] [3] [2] A09AF5E509DA [1] [2] SF drive board (SFDB) Shift motor (M1) [3] Home sensor (PS1) Appendix 208 .

2007 18. [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [10] No. 1 Not possible to confirm by removing external cover. [16] [15] [1] [2] [3] [4] 7 [5] [14] 2 3 2 2 2 4 5 3 2 [13] 3 6 2 2 2 3 [12] [11] CN No. Connector layout drawing bizhub 163/211/220 [6] [7] [8] [9] A09AF5C504DA 18. Connector layout drawing Description Number of pin ➀ Possible to confirm by removing external cover. CN24 CN18 CN26 CN23 CN12 CN70 CN21 Location D-6 to 7 D-6 to 7 J-18 D-15 D to E-15 M-16 I-18 209 Appendix . CN17 CN2 CN13 CN11 CN35 CN20 CN19 Location D-18 N-8 to 9 D-14 I-17 D-8 D-15 D-16 No. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] CN No.0 Apr. 1.Field Service Ver.

Timing chart Power switch ON Polygon motor Warm-up finished 19. 2007 A09AF5E513DA . 1.Appendix bizhub 163/211/220 210 Start key ON 19.1 Main body Exposure lamp (LA1) 19.0 Apr. Timing chart Main motor (M1) Paper feed solenoid/1 (SD1) Registration sensor (PS1) Registration roller clutch (CL1) HV remote Developing bias (DC) Developing bias (AC) Image transfer output (+) Image transfer output (-) Exit paper sensor (PS3) Power unit cooling Full-speed Half-speed fan motor (FM2) Fusing cooling fan Full-speed motor (FM1) Half-speed Field Service Ver.

1.Field Service Ver. 2007 19.2 DF-605 19.0 Apr. Timing chart bizhub 163/211/220 Appendix 19.2.1 1-Sided Mode (A4 two sheets feeding) 4040F5E520DA 211 .

19.2. 2007 19.0 Apr. 1. Timing chart bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.2 2-Sided Mode (A4 two sheets feeding) 4040F5E521DA Appendix 212 .

2007 19.Field Service Ver. Timing chart bizhub 163/211/220 Appendix 4040F5E522DA 213 .0 Apr. 1.

19.2.0 Apr. 2007 19.3 Fax Fine mode (A4 two sheets feeding) 4040F5E523DA Appendix 214 . 1. Timing chart bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver.

0 Apr.2.Field Service Ver. 1.4 Fax real-time transmission mode (A4 two sheets feeding) 19. Timing chart bizhub 163/211/220 Appendix 215 4040F5E524DA . 2007 19.

19.0 Apr. Timing chart bizhub 163/211/220 Field Service Ver. 1. 2007 Blank Page Appendix 216 .

SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE 2007.0 . 1.04 Ver.

the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance.0: The revision marks for Ver.0: The revision marks for Ver. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual. 2. 3. 2.0 are left as they are. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required. — Revision mark Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision . 2. 3. • When a page revised in Ver. Therefore. Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised. • To indicate clearly a section revised. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.0 only are shown with those for Ver. • When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.0 deleted. 3. show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.0 has not been changed in Ver.0 Service manual Ver. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. show 1 to the left of the revised section. 2007/04 Date 1.Revision history After publication of this service manual.

....................... 12 Disassembly/assembly procedure ................................................................................................................1 2........................................................ 14 Changing the setting value in CONFIRM MODE functions...........3.............. Product specifications ........................................................... 1...2........................1 3.................2........3. 15 PRINT REPORT ......................2 5............. 9 Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items ...................2...............................3.................................................................. 19 i Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General Maintenance ................2 Firmware upgrade .................. 10 3.................. 13 Confirm Mode...3..................................... 6.................................................................................................................................... 14 Confirm mode function setting procedure..................................................0 Apr. 11 FAX board ....................................................................................................................................1 5.................... 10 NCU board .....................................................3 5.............. 15 Utility Mode ....................................................................................2 Setting in the CONFIRM MODE ...2 How to use the adjustment section ............................Field Service Ver................................................. 7 Firmware rewriting .............3 Other ...... 3 Installing the driver ..................................2 5...1 6.......................................1 5...................... 3 Updating method......................... 1 FK-506 2...........................1 3..........................1 2.................................................................. 18 Utility Mode function tree ...................................................................................... 14 TOTAL PAGE.................................................. 5.2 3.............................. 2007 CONTENTS FK-506 General 1....................................................... 15 TX/RX RESULT.........................................................................................................2..... 10 Speaker. 18 Utility mode function setting procedure...........................3................3 6...................3 Adjustment/Setting 4............1..............................3 5........................2 3....................................................... 14 Exiting ......................................................................1 5.1 2.............. 14 Procedure ........... 14 5.............. 5......................................................................2 3.................................. 3... 16 Confirm mode function tree ......2...............2...........................3....................... 2......................................................................... 9 Disassembly/assembly/cleaning list (other parts)..............1 3................. 5 2......................................... 10 Disassembly/assembly parts list ...... 5 Procedure when upgrading the firmware has failed................................................................. 3 Preparations for firmware rewriting ..........

...........3..........6.....5 8.............3 8........... 23 FAX RX OPERATION ...................6 Soft Switch Set.1......................................................................................................................................................6.............................................2................ 38 Service mode setting procedure.....3............ 56 SOFT SWITCH: #01 ........................................................1 Service Mode ............4 8........................................... 63 SOFT SWITCH: #05 ..........3....... 65 8..................3....................................6 6............... 38 Exiting .......6............................................3............................ 53 Default soft switch setting for each market area 4..... 38 Changing the setting value in service mode functions...................1 Troubleshooting 8................. 38 7................... 43 SOFTSWITCH .....................1 6....................3......................... 64 SOFT SWITCH: #07 ..................3 6................... 38 Procedure .................................................1 8................................ 64 SOFT SWITCH: #06 ...................................... 47 Default Setting .................... 7.......................3................ MANAGEMENT...........................................4 8.............. 36 6.........................................................1 Adjustment / Setting 7..... 23 FAX TX OPERATION........ 19 General 6..................................................................................................................................... 39 Setting in the service mode ............... 49 Default soft switch setting for each market area 2.............................................................3 7..............2......2 7.................. 1...................... 40 FUNCTION ...................... 62 SOFT SWITCH: #04 .................................3 6.....................3 8..................6.........7 ii .................................................................3..............5 6............................. 19 ADMIN............................................. 61 SOFT SWITCH: #02 .........2 8...1 Maintenance 7....................................................2..................................................................4 Setting in the Utility mode....................................... 48 Default soft switch setting for each market area 1....................................................................................................................... 19 Exiting .............................................................. 44 FACTORY TEST ........................................2 7... 2007 6........................0 Apr.....................................................5 8................................................................1 8.............. 8.......................... 19 Changing the setting value in Utility Mode functions .........................................6 8. 19 MACHINE SETTING...............................................6........................................................................3.............................. 22 FAX REGISTRATION............................................................................................1......2 8..................................................................................................................................2 6.....6..............................................................................................4 7...............2 FK-506 Procedure ..................3.................... 61 SOFT SWITCH: #03 .Field Service Ver................................1.........3 6...3.............3 Service Mode function tree.......... 40 SERVICE’S CHOICE ...................................... 51 Default soft switch setting for each market area 3........... 55 Soft Switch List... 24 REPORTING............................................ 44 CLEAR DATA ............................5 8......................................................1 6..........1........................2 7............................ 45 7....................3.............. 20 DIAL REGISTRATION ...............................7 7.............6.........3 7...... 48 Country for each marketing area ...............

................................43 8.......................................12 8...................................6...................................................... 2007 8..17 8........44 SOFT SWITCH: #08 .31 8.........................................................................33 8...............6....6.......... 70 SOFT SWITCH: #14 ........ 92 iii .....................11 8................6.6...6................................. 84 SOFT SWITCH: #33 ..............................................................................................26 8.....35 8..42 8...............................................38 8................................ 92 SOFT SWITCH: #44 ........15 8.41 8...........................................20 8.........................6.................... 71 SOFT SWITCH: #16 ......................6......27 8..................................... 72 SOFT SWITCH: #17 ...................................13 8....6..........................................6....................................................... 77 SOFT SWITCH: #24 ................... 91 SOFT SWITCH: #42 ........................................... 87 SOFT SWITCH: #37 ......................................6.......... 92 SOFT SWITCH: #43 ......................................19 8............................................................ 72 SOFT SWITCH: #18 ...18 8........... 79 Adjustment / Setting Troubleshooting Maintenance General FK-506 SOFT SWITCH: #27 .......21 8...............................................................................6............24 8.......6......................................................................................32 8....................6..6...................................6.............. 71 SOFT SWITCH: #15 ................................................................ 74 SOFT SWITCH: #20 ............................ 68 SOFT SWITCH: #11 ............6..6....................................................................................................................6...............................................................Field Service Ver...........................6..6.........................................................................................6...........................................6........... 69 SOFT SWITCH: #12 ..................6.....................................................6.................................... 75 SOFT SWITCH: #21 .....30 8....................................6.................................6....... 78 SOFT SWITCH: #26 ................................ 81 SOFT SWITCH: #29 ..............6................................... 69 SOFT SWITCH: #13 .........34 8.............. 80 SOFT SWITCH: #28 ...... 85 SOFT SWITCH: #34 ................ 88 SOFT SWITCH: #38 ................................................................................6......6..8 8......................................23 8..................... 90 SOFT SWITCH: #41 ....................25 8....... 82 SOFT SWITCH: #30 .............9 8........ 1.................................................. 77 SOFT SWITCH: #23 . 89 SOFT SWITCH: #39 .....6.......................................6......................6...........................................................16 8............................ 84 SOFT SWITCH: #32 ....................29 8................................ 73 SOFT SWITCH: #19 ................ 67 SOFT SWITCH: #10 ...14 8...................................................6........10 8........... 86 SOFT SWITCH: #36 ......... 78 SOFT SWITCH: #25 ...............................................36 8........37 8......28 8................................................ 76 SOFT SWITCH: #22 ........... 66 SOFT SWITCH: #09 ...............................................................................................................................40 8..........6........6.............0 Apr............................................................................6......................22 8................... 83 SOFT SWITCH: #31 ..........................................39 8....... 85 SOFT SWITCH: #35 ................................... 89 SOFT SWITCH: #40 .................................

.......................2 Outline ............61 8............................................................4 Fax Protocols .....1 10.................................................................... 93 SOFT SWITCH: #46 ................................. 117 Error occurring during reception ....... 100 SOFT SWITCH: #59 Part 2 ...........1 Communication Error ...............................59 8.............. 106 G3 ECM (G3 Error Correction Mode) ..... 94 SOFT SWITCH: #47 ........................ 1...................................................... 99 SOFT SWITCH: #58 ........... 109 9.................. 97 SOFT SWITCH: #53 ... 107 Table of Reference Code ............................................................Field Service Ver..........52 General 8...............6.............................................................. 117 Error occurring during transmission..2................ 118 Transmission.............56 8.....58 Maintenance 8...... 118 iv .........................................................................................6...6...6.................................... 96 SOFT SWITCH: #50 .......................................................................6......................... 104 SOFT SWITCH: #62 ............................64 8............................... 105 8....................1.......6.... 96 SOFT SWITCH: #51 ......6............................................ 97 SOFT SWITCH: #52 .......... 117 Reception.2 10....................................6....6... 102 SOFT SWITCH: #60 ........2......................... 99 SOFT SWITCH: #57 ......................6...............................62 8................................................................................53 8....50 8.........47 8...........................6.....................6....................................6....1........................65 8..........6.........................60 8...................... 107 Procedure of G3 mode communication ........................................ 9...................6.........2. 95 SOFT SWITCH: #49 .................................6...6........................6..................6.................63 Adjustment / Setting 8....................................... 99 SOFT SWITCH: #59 Part 1 .....................................................................................................1 9............................ 101 SOFT SWITCH: #59 Part 3 ............................0 Apr.......2 9.....45 8.............................................. Fax Error .. 97 SOFT SWITCH: #54 ................................................................. 117 10...............46 FK-506 SOFT SWITCH: #45 .............................3 9...........................................55 8................................54 8..................................................................................................... 98 SOFT SWITCH: #56 ........................................ 117 10............................................................................. 104 SOFT SWITCH: #63 ...............................................................................................................1...........................3 10................................................................ 98 SOFT SWITCH: #55 ............. 105 SOFT SWITCH: #64 ..66 9................ 94 SOFT SWITCH: #48 .............6...........................................51 8.....................................6...1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 10.................................................................57 8................. 103 SOFT SWITCH: #61 .......................2 Error Code...... 2007 8................. 108 How to Analyze the T30 Protocol Monitor .............................................................48 8...........49 8...6................................................................1 10............................................. 120 10............................................................................... 106 Line Control .........................................................................................................................................

9. 21.0 Apr.7/15. or Letter-size document containing approximately 700 characters at high-speed (33.6. A5 Inch: Invoice (8-1/2 x 5-1/2). In addition.2. Product specifications General Transmission mode Compatible wiring Connection method Transmission speed Transmission time Scanning density Document size Print paper size Scanning storage G3 General subscriber telephone line.2. the actual transmission time differs depending on the contents of the document. B4. Legal (8-1/2 x 14).85/7.6 kbps) using the standard resolution (8 dots/mm x 3. 2. 26.85 lines/mm (200 dpi x 100 lpi)).2. 24. 28.024 pages *With standard A4-size documents MH / MR / MMR / JBIG Compression encoding format *1: This is the speed for transmitting an A4-size. banner documents (maximum 1000 mm (39-1/4 inches)) possible Metric: A3.4 kbps (automatic switching) 8 dots/mm x 3. Ledger (11 x 17) With built in memory (5 MB): 280 pages With expanded memory (64 MB): 1.0. 14. 12. A4.4.6. NCC each line Direct connection (using a modular jack) 33. 2007 1. 1 General 3 seconds *1 FK-506 1.4 lines/mm. Product specifications . the recipient’s fax machine and the condition of the wiring.0. 1. B5.4 lines/mm *2 Maximum A3 (Ledger). 16 dots/mm x 15.Field Service Ver. 7. 19. 31. *2: Real-time transmission is supported only with the document feeder. The transmission time for only the image information and the communication control time are not included.8. Letter.8. 4. 16.8.4.6.

1. 2007 General FK-506 Blank Page 2 . 1.0 Apr. Product specifications Field Service Ver.

continue following the instructions in the dialog boxes that will appear until the “Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard” dialog box appears. For Windows 2000 Prepare the files necessary for upgrading the firmware. choose “Include this location in the search”. In the “Found New Hardware Wizard” dialog box. 8. • If the TWAIN driver has not been installed. 1. 10. • If the TWAIN driver has already been installed.5 A. (1) 1.Field Service Ver. and copy them to PC. Firmware upgrade Maintenance 2. use the procedure below to install it. The “Found New Hardware Wizard” dialog box will appear again: Repeat steps 4~8 to install all drivers.1 2.1 Preparations for firmware rewriting Installing the driver NOTE • The TWAIN driver must previously be installed in the host computer that is used to upgrade the firmware. 4. Turn on the power switch of the machine. 5. 3. Click [OK]. In the “Locate Driver Files” dialog box. and then click [Next]. Start the host computer. choose “Specify a location”. (2) 1. The “Found New Hardware Wizard” dialog box will appear. 3 Maintenance FK-506 2. 4. Then. and then click [OK]. 6. 6. 3. Installation of the GDI printer/TWAIN driver For Windows XP Start the host computer. choose “Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended)”. 7. Turn on the power switch of the machine. Use a USB cable to connect the machine to host computer. Firmware upgrade . 8. and then click [Next]. In the “Install Hardware Device Printers” dialog box.1.0 Apr. 7. Specify “\(name of any given language)\WinXP” in the folder in which the TWAIN driver is stored. Use a USB cable to connect the machine to host computer. and then click [Next]. Click [Finish]. The “Found New Hardware Wizard” dialog box will appear again: Repeat steps 4~7 to install all drivers. choose “Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)”. See P. and then click [OK]. specify “\(name of any given language)\Win2000” in the folder in which the TWAIN driver is stored. 2007 2. Under “Search for the best driver in these locations”. Click [Browse]. 5. and then click [Browse]. Click [Next] and then [Finish]. 9. 2. proceed with the section on “Firmware rewriting” to upgrade the firmware. 2.

With Windows 98. Choose “Specify a location”. Start the host computer. choose “Search for the best driver for your device (recommended)”. 8. 10. in the dialog box that will then appear.0 Apr. For Windows Me/98SE Prepare the files necessary for upgrading the firmware. Use a USB cable to connect the machine to host computer. 3.2. 7. 4. choose “Specify the location of the driver (Advanced)”. 1. Then. 9. Firmware upgrade (3) 1. The “Add New Hardware Wizard” dialog box will appear. and then click [Browse]. continue following the instructions in the dialog boxes that will appear until the “Finish” button appears. 5. and copy them to PC. Maintenance FK-506 4 . Turn on the power switch of the machine. The “Add New Hardware Wizard” dialog box will appear again: Repeat steps 4~8 to install all drivers. Field Service Ver. and then click [Next]. Then. 2007 6. and then click [OK]. Click [Next]. 2. click [Next]. Specify “\(name of any given language)\Win9X” in the folder in which the TWAIN driver is stored. With Windows Me. and then click [Next]. Click [Finish].

1. (Copy them into the highest directory on drive C. Double-click the “Update” file in the “Update Software” folder.) 4. A09AF2C622DA 7.2. select the “Update” file that has been copied onto drive C in step 3. Click the [Browse] button. 2. Then.1 Firmware rewriting FK-506 Maintenance A09AF2E627DA Updating method 1. 2007 2. (Wait until the hardware is detected. Turn ON the power switch of the machine. Connect the machine to the host computer using a USB cable. Start the host computer. Firmware upgrade 2.Field Service Ver.) 5. 3. The “TenryuS Update F/W-VXXX” screen will appear. 6. A09AF2C623DA 5 .” Then select System Properties/Hardware/Device Manager/Imaging devices to check that the “XXXXXXXXXXX” (Model Name) icon has been added.2 2.0 Apr. Open “Properties” of “My Computer. Copy the “Update Software” folder and “Update” file to drive C.

A09AF2E636DA NOTE • NEVER turn OFF and ON the power switch as long as the above screens are being displayed.” A09AF2C626DA 12. 10. (Wait until data transfer is completed.0 Apr.) 9. 1. A09AF2E637DA 11.2. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. Click the [OK] button to quit “TenryuS Update F/W-VXXX. it indicates that upgrading of the firmware has been completed. Check the display for status of the firmware upgrading sequence. 6 . Turn OFF and ON the power switch of the machine. and confirm the firmware version. When the following message appears in the display. Click the [Update] button to start the transfer of the firmware data. 2007 Maintenance FK-506 8.

Field Service Ver.) 6. 5. Start the host computer. Connect the machine to the host computer using a USB cable. 3. (Wait until data transfer is completed. A09AF2E638DA 4. A09AF2C622DA 8.0 Apr. Click the [Update] button to start the transfer of the firmware data. select the “Update” file that has been copied onto drive C in step 5. • Prepare the special USB device driver because it is not possible to upgrade the firmware with the usual TWAIN/printer driver.) 7 Maintenance FK-506 . Click the [Browse] button. 2. Turn ON the power switch of the machine while pressing the Utility key on the control panel. A09AF2C623DA 9. Check to make sure that [TENRYU-S BOOTROM] is displayed on the control panel. Prepare the USB device driver (TWAIN/printer driver) for the firmware upgrade. (Copy them into the highest directory on drive C. and copy the USB device driver to the host computer. Then. and install the driver that has been copied onto the host computer in step 1.) 7.2. (The new hardware wizard dialog box will appear. 1. 1.2 Procedure when upgrading the firmware has failed 2. Firmware upgrade NOTE • Perform the following procedure only when upgrading from PC using ordinary USB connection has failed and the machine has not started properly. Double-click the “Update” file in the “Update Software” folder. Copy the “Update Software” folder and “Update” file to drive C. 2007 2. The “TenryuS Update F/W-VXXX” screen will appear.

” A09AF2C626DA 13. Turn OFF and ON the power switch of the machine. Click the [OK] button to quit “TenryuS Update F/W-VXXX.0 Apr. When the following message appears in the display. A09AF2E637DA 12. 8 . 2007 10. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. it indicates that upgrading of the firmware has been completed. 11. Check the display for status of the firmware upgrading sequence.2. FK-506 A09AF2E636DA Maintenance NOTE • NEVER turn OFF and ON the power switch as long as the above screens are being displayed. and confirm the firmware version. 1.

1 Other FK-506 Maintenance Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items A. a screw lock in blue or green series color is applied to the screws. Variable resistors on board NOTE • Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting. • Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. be sure to ground your body. Removal of PWBs CAUTION • When removing a circuit board or other electrical component. 1. refer to “Handling of PWBs” and follow the corresponding removal procedures. only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint. Paint-locked screws • To prevent loose screws.0 Apr. B. • Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board. 3. It should also be noted that. • The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. Red-painted screws • The screws which are difficult to be adjusted in the field are painted in red in order to prevent them from being removed by mistake. • The screw lock is applied to the screws that may get loose due to the vibrations and loads created by the use of machine or due to the vibrations created during transportation. C. Other 3. when two or more screws are used for a single part. be sure to apply a screw lock after the screws are tightened. D. 9 .Field Service Ver. • If the screw lock coated screws are loosened or removed. 2007 3.

NOTE • Make sure that the screws illustrated right with arrows have washers when installing.12 P.10 3. A0CJF2C501DA 10 . Other Field Service Ver.3 3. Disconnect the connector [1] of the speaker from the FAX board. 2007 3.1 No.3.1 Disassembly/assembly procedure Speaker [2] Maintenance [1] 1.0 Apr. Others NCU board FAX board Speaker Part name Ref. [1] A0CJF2C500DA [1] 2. Remove nine screws [1] and then remove the rear cover [2] of the main body.2.11 P.3.page P. 1 2 3 3. 1.2 FK-506 Disassembly/assembly/cleaning list (other parts) Disassembly/assembly parts list Section Board and etc.

Remove the speaker.3. [1] [2] A0CJF2C504DA 11 . Remove four screws [1] and remove the NCU board [2]. See P. FK-506 [2] [1] A0CJF2C502DA 3. [1] [2] A0CJF2C503DA 3. Other 3. Remove the screw [1] of the grounding wire and disconnect the connector [2].2 NCU board 1. 2007 3.0 Apr.10 Maintenance 2.Field Service Ver. 1. Remove two scerws [1] and remove the speaker [2].

1. See P.3. Other 3. disconnect the connector [2] and remove the FAX board [3]. remove the battery [1] from the old board and install it on the new board. [3] [1] Maintenance A0CJF2C505DA [1] NOTE • When replacing the FAX board. 2007 FAX board 1.10 2. Remove four screws [1].3 FK-506 Field Service Ver.0 Apr. See P. Remove the NCU board. Remove the speaker. A0CJF2C507DA 12 .3.11 [2] 3.

3. parts. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures. Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device.Check to see if: 1. 5.. The units.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. 2. direct sunlight.g. 4. 8.. How to use the adjustment section 13 . The power supply is properly grounded. use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON. Toner is not running out. ventilation.Field Service Ver. levelness of the installation site. FK-506 Adjustment / Setting 4.0 Apr. etc. 9. slit glass. 5. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. 3. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot. Correct paper is being used for printing. 10. high humidity. and supplies used for printing (developer. the following advance checks must be made. A. 2007 4. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. The Original Glass. Advance Checks • Before attempting to solve the customer problem. 6. 4. PC Drum. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature. The density is properly selected. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e. 7. or related part is dirty. 2. elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). B. 6. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. 1. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine. etc.

15 P.16 P.16 P.3 Changing the setting value in CONFIRM MODE functions 1.15 P.15 TX RESULT REPORT RX RESULT REPORT ACTIVITY REPORT MEMORY DATA LIST MEMORY IMAGE PRINT ONE-TOUCH LIST SPEED DIAL LIST KEY SETTING LIST RELAY BOX LIST MACHINE STATUS CONFIGURATION PAGE PCL FONT LIST *1 P.16 P.16 P. page P. 2.2. 1.15 P.16 P.16 P. Press the OK key.2.2 Exiting • Press the Reset key. The CONFIRM MODE screen will appear.17 P.15 P.17 P. To go back to the previous screen. 2007 5. 3. press the Back key.2 5.1 Confirm mode function setting procedure Procedure 1.17 5. 14 . 5. Press the Confirm key.0 Apr. Confirm Mode Field Service Ver. 5.16 P.5.16 P.1 TOTAL PAGE TOTAL COUNT SIZE COUNT TOTAL SCAN TX PAGES RX PAGES TX/RX RESULT PRINT REPORT Adjustment / Setting *1: It is available only when the optional Image controller IC-206 is mounted.2.15 P. FK-506 Confirm Mode Confirm mode function tree CONFIRM MODE Ref. 5. Press the ▲ / ▼. 2.16 P.

Press the ▼ and ▲ keys to display the desired transmission results to check them. Press Start key to output the TX/RX result report.1 Setting in the CONFIRM MODE FK-506 TOTAL PAGE A. Select the [TX/RX RESULT] and press OK key. SIZE COUNT Functions Use • Displays the size count of pages printed since this machine was installed. 1. TX PAGES Functions Use • Displays the total number of pages faxed since this machine was installed. 1.0 Apr. the scanned number of pages in copy are not included. E. RX PAGES Functions Use • Displays the total number of pages received since this machine was installed. TOTAL SCAN Functions Use • Displays the total number of pages scanned since this machine was installed. 3.3 5. 15 Adjustment / Setting . D. 2007 5. TOTAL COUNT Functions Use • Displays the total number of pages printed since this machine was installed. however. 4. B.3. C. Confirm Mode 5. 2.3. 5.2 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure TX/RX RESULT • TX/RX result is displayed or printed out up to 60 jobs. Press the Confirm key.Field Service Ver.

ONE-TOUCH LIST Functions Use • The recipients registered with the one-touch dial keys are printed in the numerical order of the keys.0 Apr. recipient/caller name. batch transmission or polling reception. and number of document pages are printed. mode. Confirm Mode 5. E.5. MEMORY DATA LIST Functions Use • This is a list of documents stored in the memory and waiting to be sent.3 FK-506 Field Service Ver. communication date. and documents specified for timer transmission. D. date received. recipient name. 2007 PRINT REPORT A. whether a transmission or reception was performed. 1. number of pages received. starting time of transmission. RX RESULT REPORT Functions Use • The document number. time. B. date. MEMORY IMAGE PRINT Adjustment / Setting Functions Use • A reduced image of the first page of the document stored in the memory and waiting to be sent in addition to the document number. G. mode. ACTIVITY REPORT Functions Use • The number. RELAY BOX LIST • The status and settings for the 10 relay user boxes are printed. document number. and communication result are printed. starting time of transmission/ reception. I. KEY SETTING LIST Functions Use • The group dialing and program dialing settings specified for one-touch dial keys are printed in the numerical order of the keys. caller name. recipient/caller name. TX RESULT REPORT Functions Use • The document number. time. time required. recipient/caller name. H. C. mode. The document number. time required. date sent. and transmission result are printed.3. number of document pages. NOTE • This machine is set to automatically print the report each time a total of 60 communications have been performed. and number of document pages are printed. starting time of reception. F. and reception result are printed. type of operation to be performed. Functions Use 16 . SPEED DIAL LIST Functions Use • The recipients registered with the speed dial numbers are printed in numerical order. type of operation to be performed. number of pages sent/received.

Confirm Mode Use K. NOTE • This option is available only if optional image controller IC-206 is installed. 1.Field Service Ver. 17 Adjustment / Setting FK-506 Functions • The current machine settings are printed. . MACHINE STATUS 5.0 Apr. CONFIGURATION PAGE Functions Use • The list of print settings are printed. PCL FONT LIST Functions Use • The list of PCL fonts are printed. 2007 J. L.

36 P. FK-506 Utility Mode Utility Mode function tree 6. of RINGS REDUCTION RX RX PRINT RX MODE FORWARD FOOTER SELECT TRAY CLOSED NETWORK REPORTING ACTIVITY REPORT RESERVATION REPORT TX RESULT REPORT RX RESULT REPORT Ref.23 P. 2007 6. NOTE • The setting menu contains only the cases in which FK-506 is mounted.0 Apr.22 P.6.1 • Utility mode is used to make settings for the utility functions.21 P.23 P.24 P.24 P.22 P.35 P.23 P.23 P.19 P. SETITNG TONE/PULSE LINE MONITOR PSTN/PBX USER SETTING DATE&TIME USER FAX NO.21 P.34 P.22 P.24 P.25 P. page P.36 P.36 P. 1.21 P.22 P.36 P.23 P. 18 .22 P.19 P.34 P.34 P.22 P.37 Adjustment / Setting *1: It will be displayed only when the NC-503 or FK-506 is mounted. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. UTILITY MODE MACHINE SETTING BUZZER VOLUME INITIAL MODE SCAN THRESHOLD *1 ADMIN. MANAGEMENT REMOTE MONITOR COMM. USER NAME DIAL REGISTRATION ONE-TOUCH DIAL SPEED DIAL GROUP DIAL PROGRAM DIAL FAX REGISTRATION MAIL BOX RELAY BOX FAX TX OPERATION DENSITY LEVEL QUALITY PRIORITY DEFAULT TX HEADER FAX RX OPERATION MEMORY RX MODE NO.24 P.20 P.19 P.36 P.

Validate the selected setting value using the OK key. • The default setting is “COPY”. 1. or the 10-key pad.0 Apr. 2. SCAN THRESHOLD Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function is used to set the remaining memory that the memory is defined as full and the scanning is stopped. 6. 256 KByte “512 KByte” 1024 KByte 1536 KByte 19 Adjustment / Setting .2 Exiting • Press the Reset key. Select the setting value using [▲ / ▼ / / ] key or the 10-key pad. “COPY” FAX C. 1. • The default setting is “LOW”. BUZZER VOLUME Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function can be used to set the volume of alarms and the beep sounded when a key is pressed. To go back to the previous screen. 2007 6. 1.2. press the Back key.3 Changing the setting value in Utility Mode functions ▼ ▲ • Select the appropriate item using ▲ / ▼ key.3. • The default setting is “512 KByte”.1 Utility mode function setting procedure FK-506 Procedure 1. The UTILITY MODE screen will appear.1 Setting in the Utility mode MACHINE SETTING A. INITIAL MODE Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function can be used to set the mode (Copy mode or Fax mode) that the machine starts up in or returns to after the control panel is Reset. 2. 6.2 6.Field Service Ver. 6.2. Utility Mode 6. Press the Utility key. OFF “LOW” HIGH B.3 6.2.

the [PASSWORD] screen will appear. MANAGEMENT A. Utility Mode 6. In addition to being able to monitor the detailed settings made in the user machine.0 Apr. REMOTE MONITOR Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the access right when monitoring a user machine from a remote location on the Service side.2 FK-506 Field Service Ver. the following message appears on the Display and no operations can be made from the control panel of the local machine.[REMOTE MONITOR] If the user machine setting has been changed from [LIMITED] to [FULL] or vice versa while RSD (Remote Setup Diagnostic) communication is established. OFF “LIMITED” FULL • LIMITED: Access is prohibited. A0CJF3C508DA • No connection can be made with the RSD during operation from the control panel of the local machine. perform the following operations: • Temporarily disconnect the communication and re-execute [Remote Connect. • FULL: Access right with no restrictions. however. This password is necessary for remote monitoring and must be obtained in advance from the administrator of the user machine.3. Neither the PC print nor Scanner function can be accepted. < Precautions for Using the RSD (Remote Setup Diagnostic)> • When a connection is established with a local machine using the RSD. Detailed settings made in the user machine can be monitored. • RSD is used for remote monitoring.] • Press the Disconnect key to disconnect the communication.6. MANAGEMENT] . 20 . the Service can change user settings and upgrade firmware. 2007 ADMIN. Make the connection while no operations are performed on the local machine. not possible to change the user setting or upgrade firmware. The Administrator of the user machine sets a 4-digit (0000 to 9999) password. Adjustment / Setting NOTE Precautions for Changing the Setting of [ADMIN. 4980S533AB • The specific changes made in the setting of REMOTE MONITOR are not validated unless the connection is made again. NOTE • When [FULL] is selected. • The default setting is “LIMITED”. It is. 1. • LIMITED: Access right with limited functions. remote monitoring is disabled.

For a PBX system. • The default setting is “PSTN”. • As is the case with the RSD. “TONE” PULSE [TONE]: Tone line [PULSE]: 10 PPS pulse [10pps] line or 20 PPS pulse line [20pps] is selected. • Just after pressing On Hook key. mode. OFF • Monitor sound output period Start • Pressing Start key following pressing tenkey. the outside line access number (or extension number) must be specified. “PSTN” PBX Use Setting/ Procedure 21 Adjustment / Setting FK-506 . • The connected wiring system can be set to either PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) or PBX (Private Branch Exchange). and Scanner function are not accepted while a connection is being established with the local machine using the LSD (Local Setup Diagnostic) and Page Scope Web Connection/Admin. (3) PSTN/PBX Functions • This function can be used to set whether the connected telephone wiring is a public switched telephone network (PSTN) or a private branch exchange (PBX). The outside line access number (or extension number) is programmed in the [#] key. B. SETITNG (1) TONE/PULSE Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function is used to set the dial system of phone which is used by the machine. no connection can be made with LSD and Page Scope Web Connection/Admin. the outside line access number (or extension number) must be specified. Using On Hook key After receiving CED signal. PC print. • Pressing Start key following pressing Speed dial. COMM. • Pressing One-touch key.0 Apr. Make the connection while no operations are performed on the local machine. End “LOW” HIGH Usual TX/ RX After receiving V21 signal. • The default setting is “TONE”.Field Service Ver. (2) LINE MONITOR Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function can be used to set the volume when monitoring communication. Utility Mode • As is the case with the RSD. 2007 6. 1. For a PBX system. • The default setting is “LOW”. • Pressing Redial key. mode during operation from the control panel of the local machine. operations from the control panel of the local machine.

• A maximum of 32 fax numbers can be programmed. The contents of registration.: 30 digits.6 kbps] [14.4 kbps] [9. • Sub address: 20 digits. • Up to 50 keys can be registered as a group.3 DIAL REGISTRATION A.0 Apr. The contents of registration. ONE-TOUCH DIAL Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function can be used to register the destination on one-touch dial keys. USER SETTING (1) DATE&TIME FK-506 Functions Use Field Service Ver. Utility Mode C. • A maximum of 240 fax numbers (001 to 240) can be programmed. (3) USER NAME Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function can be used to input the user’s name to be notified to the other side. (2) USER FAX NO. 2007 • This function is used to set the date. • Group name: 20 characters. SPEED DIAL Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function can be used to register the destination in speed dial. The contents of registration. • Up to 32 characteristics can be input. • Information of destination station: The contents of one-touch or speed dial. 1. • SID: 20 digits. • FAX No.4 kbps] [9. C. • FAX No.6 kbps] • Registered data: Automatically. • Modem speed: [33. Adjustment / Setting B. 22 .6. GROUP DIAL Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function can be used to register one-touch dial keys as a group.: 30 digits.3. • Destination name: 20characters. • Destination name: 20characters. Functions Use • This function is used to register the user’s telephone number. • Sub address: 20 digits. 6. • Modem speed: [33. time and zone for FAX.6 kbps] [14.6 kbps] • Registered data: Automatically. • SID: 20 digits.

3. select a setting toward [DARK] • The default setting is “ “.0 Apr. NOTE • A relay box ID cannot be the same as a mailbox ID. For faint or colored text. then transmit the document to multiple recipients (receiving stations). DENSITY LEVEL Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This parameter can be used to set the default scanning density to one of five levels. . RELAY BOX Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function can be used to program the relay boxes in order for this machine (acting as a relay station) to receive a document from another fax machine (transmitting station). • The default setting is “STD/TEXT”. or none. FK-506 Functions • This function can be used to register the destination number and TX/RX function on one-touch dial keys. • For paper with a dark color (background). PROGRAM DIAL 6. or none. “STD/TEXT” STD/PHOTO FINE/TEXT FINE/PHOTO S-FINE/TEXT S-FINE/PHOTO 23 Adjustment / Setting • Setting value: 0000 to 9999 • Password: Setting range 0 to 9999. • Setting value: -2 (light) to +2 (dark) B. select a setting towards [LIGHT]. MAIL BOX Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function can be used to specify mailbox IDs in order to receive faxes with mailbox reception only if the mailbox ID sent by the caller matches the mailbox ID set on this machine. 6. Utility Mode Use Setting/ Procedure The function of registration • Broadcast transmission • Timer transmission • Mailbox transmission • Polling reception • Relay initiating transmission 6. • Setting value: 0000 to 9999 • Password: Setting range 0 to 9999. NOTE • A relay box ID cannot be the same as a mailbox ID.4 FAX REGISTRATION A.3. 2007 D. B. QUALITY PRIORITY Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function can be used to set the default scanning resolution (image quality) to one of the following.5 FAX TX OPERATION A. 1.Field Service Ver.

if communication error occurs on the way transmitting document. MEMORY RX MODE Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function can be used to set whether or not to receive memory RX. “MEMORY TX” ADF TX D. • Total page number (only displayed by use the memory TX job). and setting change to OFF by the user is not allowed. sender's name and fax number.6. DEFAULT TX Functions Field Service Ver. Header print is set ON. of RINGS Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function can be used to set the number of call sound until the incoming call is answered automatically.6 FAX RX OPERATION A.0 Apr. • This function is not available in the United States. • Transmitter's own tel number.3. page number on Header Print is continued from the page number of the document successfully transmitted. In this case. • Setting value: 1 to 16 24 . • Page number. Whether user setting is allowed or not is selectable with Soft switch. Adjustment / Setting 6. 2007 FK-506 Use Setting/ Procedure • This function can be used to set the default of TX mode.) when sending faxes. • TX data and time. 1. HEADER Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function can be used to set the default setting ([ON] or [OFF]) for adding the header (date sent. • Attaching Header Print: Image within 4 mm (1/4 in) top margin of transmitting document is not transmitted and Header print data is attached. OFF “ON” The contents of registration. NO. “OFF” ON B. • Session number. • The default setting is “OFF”. • For North America. • Transmitter's own name. etc. • The default setting is “MEMORY TX”. • The default setting is “2”. • The default setting is “ON”. Utility Mode C. • It is selectable by soft switch to transmit only pages which have failed to transmit.

[CUT] is not available. when sending a document more than 24 mm (1 inch) longer than the paper. (In this case.Field Service Ver. the document is split. However.0 Apr. or discarded ([CUT]). 2007 C.220 mm Divide into 3 pages with 100% A3 1.208 mm Divide into 3 pages with 100% FK-506 Functions • This function can be used to set whether documents longer than the paper are printed reduced ([ON]).209 mm or more Less than 202 mm 203 mm to 269 mm OFF 270 mm to 396 mm 397 mm to 590 mm A4S 591 mm or more Less than 198 mm 199 mm to 265 mm ON 266 mm to 388 mm 389 mm to 578 mm 579 mm or more Less than 289 mm 290 mm to 385 mm OFF 386 mm to 570 mm 571 mm to 851 mm A4S 852 mm or more Less than 285 mm 286 mm to 381 mm ON 382 mm to 562 mm 563 mm to 839 mm 840 mm or more Divide into 3 pages (or more) with 100% 1 page with 100% 1 page with (202 mm / image length)% reduction Divide into 2 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages (or more) with 100% 1 page with 100% 1 page with (198 mm / image length)% reduction Divide into 2 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages (or more) with 100% 1 page in 187 mm or less. 1. it prints to A5 1 page with (289 mm / image length)% reduction Divide into 2 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages (or more) with 100% 1 page with 100% 1 page with (285 mm / image length)% reduction Divide into 2 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages (or more) with 100% 25 Adjustment / Setting 809 mm to 1. Utility Mode Use Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is “ON”. [OFF]: 100% RX mode [ON]: Reduction print mode [CUT]: Cut mode Reduction print mode • It reduces (only the sub scanning direction) and prints so that receiving data will in a recording paper. Recording paper size Footer Length of received image Less than 412 mm 413 mm to 458 mm OFF 459 mm to 816 mm 1 page with 100% 1 page with (412 mm / image length)% reduction Divide into 2 pages with 100% Printing 817 mm to 1.221 mm or more Less than 408 mm 409 mm to 454 mm ON 455 mm to 808 mm Divide into 3 pages (or more) with 100% 1 page with 100% 1 page with (408 mm / image length)% reduction Divide into 2 pages with 100% 1. split ([OFF]).) . REDUCTION RX 6.

052 mm Divide into 3 pages with 100% B4S 1. it prints to Letter 1 page with (424 mm / image length)% reduction Divide into 2 pages with 100% Adjustment / Setting Less than 140 mm 141 mm to 187 mm OFF 188 mm to 272 mm 273 mm to 404 mm A5 405 mm or more Less than 136 mm 137 mm to 183 mm ON 184 mm to 264 mm 265 mm to 392 mm 393 mm or more Less than 424 mm 425 mm to 471 mm OFF 472 mm to 840 mm 841 mm to 1. it prints to B5 1 page with (352 mm / image length)% reduction Divide into 2 pages with 100% 697 mm to 1.041 mm or more Less than 174 mm 175 mm to 193 mm OFF 194 mm to 340 mm 341 mm to 506 mm B5 507 mm or more Less than 170 mm 171 mm to 189 mm ON 190 mm to 332 mm 333 mm to 494 mm 495 mm or more Divide into 3 pages (or more) with 100% 1 page with 100% 1 page with (147 mm / image length)% reduction Divide into 2 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages (or more) with 100% 1 page with 100% 1 page with (170 mm / image length)% reduction Divide into 2 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages (or more) with 100% 1 page with 100% 1 page with (140 mm / image length)% reduction Divide into 2 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages (or more) with 100% 1 page with 100% 1 page with (136 mm / image length)% reduction Divide into 2 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages (or more) with 100% 1 page in 255 mm or less. it prints to Letter 1 page with (420 mm / image length)% reduction Divide into 2 pages with 100% 833 mm to 1. 1.256 mm Divide into 3 pages with 100% Ledger 1.245 mm or more Divide into 3 pages (or more) with 100% 26 . Utility Mode Recording paper size Length of received image Less than 356 mm 357 mm to 396 mm OFF 397 mm to 704 mm Field Service Ver.053 mm or more Less than 352 mm 353 mm to 392 mm ON 393 mm to 696 mm Divide into 3 pages (or more) with 100% 1 page in 189 mm or less.6.0 Apr.244 mm Divide into 3 pages with 100% 1.257 mm or more Less than 420 mm 421 mm to 467 mm ON 468 mm to 832 mm Divide into 3 pages (or more) with 100% 1 page in 251 mm or less.040 mm Divide into 3 pages with 100% 1. 2007 Footer Printing 1 page in 193mm or less. it prints to B5 1 page with (356 mm / image length)% reduction Divide into 2 pages with 100% FK-506 705 mm to 1.

2007 Recording paper size Length of received image Less than 208 mm 209 mm to 297 mm OFF 298 mm to 408 mm 409 mm to 608 mm Letter 609 mm or more Less than 204 mm 205 mm to 291 mm ON 292 mm to 400 mm 401 mm to 596 mm 597 mm or more Less than 271 mm 272 mm to 387 mm OFF 388 mm to 534 mm 535 mm to 797 mm LetterS 798 mm or more Less than 267 mm 268 mm to 383 mm ON 384 mm to 526 mm 527 mm to 785 mm 786 mm or more Less than 348 mm 349 mm to 385 mm OFF 386 mm to 688 mm 1 page.017 mm or more Less than 132 mm 133 mm to 189 mm OFF 190 mm to 256 mm 257 mm to 380 mm Invoice 381 mm or more Less than 128 mm 129 mm to 185 mm ON 186 mm to 248 mm 249 mm to 368 mm 369 mm or more Divide into 3 pages (or more) with 100% 1 page with 100% 1 page with (132 mm / image length)% reduction Divide into 2 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages (or more) with 100% 1 page with 100% 1 page with (128 mm / image length)% reduction Divide into 2 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages (or more) with 100% 27 Adjustment / Setting 1 page with 100% FK-506 . 1 page with (204 mm / image length)% reduction Divide into 2 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages (or more) with 100% 1 page in 189 mm or less.0 Apr. 1. 6.029 mm or more Less than 344 mm 345 mm to 381 mm ON 382 mm to 680 mm Divide into 3 pages (or more) with 100% 1 page with 100% 1 page with (343 mm / image length)% reduction Divide into 2 pages with 100% 681 mm to 1. it prints to Invoice 1 page with (271 mm / image length)% reduction Divide into 2 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages (or more) with 100% 1 page in 185 mm or less.028 mm Divide into 3 pages with 100% Legal 1.016 mm Divide into 3 pages with 100% 1. it prints to Invoice 1 page with (267 mm / image length)% reduction Divide into 2 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages (or more) with 100% 1 page with (347 mm / image length)% reduction Divide into 2 pages with 100% 689 mm to 1.Field Service Ver. Utility Mode Footer Printing 1 page with (208 mm / image length)% reduction Divide into 2 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages with 100% Divide into 3 pages (or more) with 100% 1 page.

it prints to A4 Divide into 2 pages 817 mm to 1. it prints to B5 Divide into 2 pages OFF 203 mm to 396 mm 397 mm to 590 mm 591 mm or more Less than 198 mm A4 ON 199 mm to 388 mm 389 mm to 578 mm 579 mm or more Less than 289 mm OFF 290 mm to 570 mm 571 mm to 851 mm 852 mm or more Less than 285 mm Adjustment / Setting A4S ON 286 mm to 562 mm 563 mm to 839 mm 840 mm or more Less than 356 mm OFF 357 mm to 704 mm 705 mm to 1.0 Apr. it prints to A5 Divide into 2 pages Divide into 3 pages Divide into 4 pages or more 1 page in 174 mm or less.208 mm Divide into 3 pages 1.041 mm or more Divide into 4 pages or more 28 . 1.221 mm or more Less than 408 mm Divide into 4 pages or more 1 page in 198 mm or less. 2007 100% RX mode • All receiving data is divided into 2 pages or more. it prints to A4 Divide into 2 pages A3 ON 409 mm to 808 mm 809 mm to 1.209 mm or more Less than 202 mm Divide into 4 pages or more 1 page Divide into 2 pages Divide into 3 pages Divide into 4 pages or more 1 page Divide into 2 pages Divide into 3 pages Divide into 4 pages or more 1 page in 140 mm or less.040 mm Divide into 3 pages 1. it prints to A5 Divide into 2 pages Divide into 3 pages Divide into 4 pages or more 1 page in 136 mm or less. and is printed.053 mm or more Less than 352 mm Divide into 4 pages or more 1 page in 170 mm or less.052 mm Divide into 3 pages 1.6. Utility Mode Field Service Ver.220 mm Divide into 3 pages 1. it prints to B5 Divide into 2 pages B4S ON 353 mm to 696 mm 697 mm to 1. FK-506 Recording paper size Footer Length of received image Less than 412 mm OFF 413 mm to 816 mm Printing 1 page in 202 mm or less.

244 mm Divide into 3 pages 1.245 mm or more Less than 208 mm Divide into 4 pages or more 1 page Divide into 2 pages Divide into 3 pages Divide into 4 pages or more 1 page Divide into 2 pages Divide into 3 pages Divide into 4 pages or more 1 page in 132 mm or less. it prints to Invoice Divide into 2 pages Divide into 3 pages Divide into 4 pages or more 1 page in 128 mm or less. it prints to Invoice Divide into 2 pages Divide into 3 pages Divide into 4 pages or more OFF 209 mm to 408 mm 409 mm to 608 mm 609 mm or more Less than 204 mm Letter ON 205 mm to 400 mm 401 mm to 596 mm 597 mm or more Less than 271 mm OFF 272 mm to 534 mm 535 mm to 797 mm 798 mm or more Less than 267 mm LetterS ON 268 mm to 526 mm 527 mm to 785 mm 786 mm or more 29 Adjustment / Setting 1 page in 204 mm or less.Field Service Ver. 2007 Recording paper size Length of received image Less than 174 mm OFF 175 mm to 340 mm 341 mm to 506 mm 507 mm or more Less than 170 mm ON 171 mm to 332 mm 333 mm to 494 mm 495 mm or more Less than 140 mm OFF 141 mm to 272 mm 273 mm to 404 mm 405 mm or more Less than 136 mm ON 137 mm to 264 mm 265 mm to 392 mm 393 mm or more Less than 424 mm OFF 425 mm to 840 mm 1 page Divide into 2 pages Divide into 3 pages Divide into 4 pages or more 1 page Divide into 2 pages Divide into 3 pages Divide into 4 pages or more 1 page Divide into 2 pages Divide into 3 pages Divide into 4 pages or more 1 page Divide into 2 pages Divide into 3 pages Divide into 4 pages or more 6. 1. it prints to Letter FK-506 .256 mm Divide into 3 pages 1. it prints to Letter Divide into 2 pages 841 mm to 1. Utility Mode Footer Printing B5 A5 1 page in 208 mm or less.0 Apr.257 mm or more Less than 420 mm Divide into 4 pages or more Ledger ON 421 mm to 832 mm Divide into 2 pages 833 mm to 1.

1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut.208 mm Divide into 3 pages 1. 30 .025 mm or more Less than 132 mm Divide into 4 pages or more 1 page Divide into 2 pages Divide into 3 pages Divide into 4 pages or more 1 page Divide into 2 pages Divide into 3 pages Divide into 4 pages or more OFF 133 mm to 256 mm 257 mm to 380 mm 381 mm or more Less than 128 mm Invoice ON 129 mm to 248 mm 249 mm to 368 mm 369 mm or more Cut mode • The data that is larger than 1-page record area is cut and not recorded (to 18 mm).024 mm Divide into 3 pages 1.028 mm Divide into 3 pages 1. Recording paper size Footer Length of received image Less than 412 mm 413 mm to 436 mm 437 mm to 816 mm OFF 817 mm to 840 mm Printing 1 page in 226 mm or less.029 mm or more Less than 344 mm Divide into 4 pages or more 1 page Divide into 2 pages Legal ON 344 mm to 680 mm 681 mm to 1. Utility Mode Recording paper size Length of received image Less than 348 mm OFF 349 mm to 688 mm 1 page Divide into 2 pages Field Service Ver. it prints to A4 Print into 1 page.0 Apr. Divide into 2 pages Divide into 2 pages. Adjustment / Setting 841 mm to 1. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 833 mm to 1. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1.220 mm Divide into 3 pages 1. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. it prints to A4 Print into 1 page. Divide into 2 pages Divide into 2 pages. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut.221 mm or more A3 Less than 408 mm 409 mm to 432 mm 433 mm to 808 mm ON 809 mm to 832 mm Divide into 3 pages (or more). 2007 Footer Printing FK-506 689 mm to 1. 1 page in 222 mm or less.6.209 mm or more Divide into 3 pages (or more).

Field Service Ver. Print into 1 page. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 page Print into 1 page. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. Divide into 3 pages Divide into 3 pages (or more). 721 mm to 1. Divide into 2 pages Divide into 2 pages. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. Divide into 3 pages Divide into 3 pages (or more). 31 Adjustment / Setting 1 page in 160 mm or less. 729 mm to 1. it prints to B5 Print into 1 page. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. Divide into 2 pages Divide into 2 pages.053 mm or more B4S Less than 352 mm 353 mm to 376 mm 377 mm to 696 mm ON 697 mm to 720 mm Divide into 3 pages (or more). Divide into 2 pages Divide into 2 pages. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 page in 198 mm or less. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 page in 194 mm or less. it prints to A5 FK-506 . Divide into 3 pages Divide into 3 pages (or more).052 mm Divide into 3 pages 1.040 mm Divide into 3 pages 1.0 Apr. Divide into 2 pages Divide into 2 pages. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. Utility Mode Footer Printing Print into 1 page. Divide into 3 pages Divide into 3 pages (or more). it prints to B5 Print into 1 page.041 mm or more Divide into 3 pages (or more). 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 2007 Recording paper size Length of received image Less than 202 mm 203 mm to 226 mm 227 mm to 396 mm OFF 397 mm to 420 mm 421 mm to 590 mm 591 mm or more A4 Less than 198 mm 199 mm to 222 mm 223 mm to 388 mm ON 389 mm to 412 mm 413 mm to 578 mm 579 mm or more Less than 289 mm 290 mm to 313 mm 314 mm to 570 mm OFF 571 mm to 594 mm 595 mm to 851 mm 852 mm or more A4S Less than 285 mm 286 mm to 309 mm 310 mm to 562 mm ON 563 mm to 586 mm 587 mm to 839 mm 840 mm or more Less than 356 mm 357 mm to 380 mm 381 mm to 704 mm OFF 705 mm to 728 mm 1 page 6. 1 page in 164 mm or less. 1. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. Divide into 2 pages Divide into 2 pages. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. Divide into 2 pages Divide into 2 pages. it prints to A5 Print into 1 page.

1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 32 . 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut.6.257 mm or more Ledger Less than 420 mm 421 mm to 444 mm 445 mm to 832 mm ON 833 mm to 856 mm Divide into 3 pages (or more). Divide into 3 pages Divide into 3 pages (or more). 1 page Print into 1 page. it prints to Letter Print into 1 page. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. Divide into 2 pages Divide into 2 pages.256 mm Divide into 3 pages 1. 2007 Footer Printing FK-506 Print into 1 page. Utility Mode Recording paper size Length of received image Less than 174 mm 175 mm to 198 mm 199 mm to 340 mm OFF 341 mm to 364 mm 365 mm to 506 mm 507 mm or more B5 Less than 170 mm 171 mm to 194 mm 195 mm to 332 mm ON 333 mm to 356 mm 357 mm to 494 mm 495 mm or more Less than 140 mm 141 mm to 164 mm 165 mm to 272 mm OFF 273 mm to 296 mm 297 mm to 404 mm 405 mm or more 1 page Field Service Ver. Divide into 2 pages Divide into 2 pages. Divide into 3 pages Divide into 3 pages (or more). 1 page Print into 1 page. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 857 mm to 1. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 page in 228 mm or less. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut.245 mm or more Divide into 3 pages (or more). 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. Divide into 2 pages Divide into 2 pages. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. Divide into 3 pages Divide into 3 pages (or more).0 Apr. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 page in 232 mm or less. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 page Print into 1 page. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. Adjustment / Setting A5 Less than 136 mm 137 mm to 160 mm 161 mm to 264 mm ON 265 mm to 288 mm 289 mm to 392 mm 393 mm or more Less than 424 mm 423 mm to 448 mm 449 mm to 840 mm OFF 841 mm to 864 mm 865 mm to 1. Divide into 2 pages Divide into 2 pages. it prints to Letter Print into 1 page.244 mm Divide into 3 pages 1. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1. Divide into 2 pages Divide into 2 pages. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. Divide into 2 pages Divide into 2 pages. Divide into 3 pages Divide into 3 pages (or more). 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut.

1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut.0 Apr. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut.Field Service Ver. 1 page Print into 1 page. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut.028 mm Divide into 3 pages 1. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. Divide into 3 pages Divide into 3 pages (or more). 713 mm to 1. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. Divide into 2 pages Divide into 2 pages.016 mm Divide into 3 pages 1. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. Divide into 2 pages Divide into 2 pages.029 mm or more Legal Less than 344 mm 345 mm to 367 mm 368 mm to 680 mm ON 681 mm to 704 mm Divide into 3 pages (or more). Divide into 2 pages Divide into 2 pages. Divide into 2 pages Divide into 2 pages. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 page Print into 1 page. it prints to Invoice FK-506 . it prints to Invoice Print into 1 page. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. Divide into 3 pages Divide into 3 pages (or more). 1 page in 156 mm or less. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. Divide into 3 pages Divide into 3 pages (or more). Divide into 3 pages Divide into 3 pages (or more). 705 mm to 1.017 mm or more Divide into 3 pages (or more). 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. Divide into 2 pages Divide into 2 pages. 33 Adjustment / Setting 1 page in 152 mm or less. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. Utility Mode Footer Printing Print into 1 page. 1. Divide into 2 pages Divide into 2 pages. 1 page Print into 1 page. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. Print into 1 page. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 2007 Recording paper size Length of received image Less than 208 mm 209 mm to 232 mm 233 mm to 408 mm OFF 409 mm to 432 mm 433 mm to 608 mm 609 mm or more Letter Less than 204 mm 205 mm to 228 mm 229 mm to 400 mm ON 401 mm to 424 mm 425 mm to 596 mm 597 mm or more Less than 271 mm 272 mm to 295 mm 296 mm to 534 mm OFF 535 mm to 558 mm 559 mm to 797 mm 798 mm or more LetterS Less than 267 mm 268 mm to 291 mm 292 mm to 526 mm ON 527 mm to 550 mm 551 mm to 785 mm 786 mm or more Less than 348 mm 349 mm to 371 mm 372 mm to 688 mm OFF 689 mm to 712 mm 1 page 6. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut.

0 Apr. FORWARD Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function can be used to set whether or not the received document is forwarded. D. the optional image controller or network interface card is required. 1 page Print into 1 page. Reception begins after making a connection by picking up the telephone receiver or pressing the Speaker key. NOTE • In order to forward the document to an e-mail address. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. then pressing the Start key F. “OFF” ON ON (PRINT) ON: The received document is forwarded to the specified fax number or e-mail address. 2007 Footer Printing FK-506 Print into 1 page.6. Divide into 3 pages Divide into 3 pages (or more). 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. “AUTO RX” MANUAL RX AUTO RX: Automatically begins receiving after the set number of rings. Divide into 2 pages Divide into 2 pages. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. “MEMORY RX” PRINT RX Adjustment / Setting E. • The default setting is “MEMORY RX”. 1. ON (PRINT): The received document is printed by this machine at the same time that it is forwarded to the specified fax number or e-mail address. RX PRINT Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function can be used to set whether the fax is only printed after all document pages have been received ([MEMORY RX]) or printing begins as soon as the first page of the document is received ([PRINT RX]). 34 . RX MODE Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function can be used to set the reception mode to automatic reception ([AUTO RX]) or manual reception ([MANUAL RX]). Utility Mode Recording paper size Length of received image Less than 132 mm 133 mm to 156 mm 157 mm to 256 mm OFF 257 mm to 280 mm 281 mm to 380 mm 381 mm or more Invoice Less than 128 mm 129 mm to 152 mm 153 mm to 248 mm ON 249 mm to 272 mm 273 mm to 368 mm 369 mm or more 1 page Field Service Ver. MANUAL RX: Does not automatically receive the fax. 1 mm to 24 mm of end is cut. • The default setting is “OFF”. Divide into 2 pages Divide into 2 pages. • The default setting is “AUTO RX”. Divide into 3 pages Divide into 3 pages (or more).

Transmitter's ID) is printed at the bottom of each received document. Image data area: The received image data is printed on the area except for 12 mm from recording paper size. 1. Paper length A3 A4S A4 B4 B5 A5 Ledger Legal LetterS Letter Invoice 420 mm 297 mm 210 mm 364 mm 182 mm 148 mm 432 mm 356 mm 279 mm 216 mm 140 mm Footer OFF Image data area 412 mm 289 mm 202 mm 356 mm 174 mm 140 mm 424 mm 348 mm 271 mm 208 mm 132 mm Footer ON Image data area 408 mm 285 mm 198 mm 352 mm 170 mm 136 mm 420 mm 344 mm 267 mm 204 mm 128 mm Footer area +4 mm +4 mm +4 mm +4 mm +4 mm +4 mm +4 mm +4 mm +4 mm +4 mm +4 mm 35 Adjustment / Setting FK-506 Functions • This function can be used to set whether or not the reception information (RX data and time.0 Apr. 2007 G. FOOTER 6. If the received image is divided into 2 pages or more. it is printed at the end of printable area. 4 mm line area from the end of printable area is kept for printing footer. (No printable area: 8 mm (1/3 in) + Footer area: 4 mm (1/4 in)) The following table is the image printable area of each recording paper size due to setting of footer print. footer is printed in the specified location of all the recording sheets of paper printed. RX page number. Utility Mode Use Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is “OFF”.Field Service Ver. RX management number. It should be attached on footer area regardless of image length. “OFF” ON Attaching footer print: When footer is selected ON. .

DISABLE “ENABLE” I. OFF “ON” Adjustment / Setting Use Setting/ Procedure B. TRAY1 TRAY2 TRAY3 TRAY4 TRAY5 2. RESERVATION REPORT Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • If multiple recipients are specified for transmission. • The default setting is “OFF”.0 Apr. • The default setting is “OFF”. This function can be used to set whether this report is printed automatically. 1.6. “OFF” ON 36 . (A paper tray that cannot be used for supplying paper can also be specified. • The default setting is “ENABLE”. Select the tray. Utility Mode H.7 REPORTING A. Select the [DISABLE] or [ENABLE]. • The default setting is “OFF”. ACTIVITY REPORT Functions • Every 60 transmissions/receptions. “OFF” ON Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 6. such as with broadcast transmission and polling reception. a report can be printed to show specified settings. • The default setting is “ON”.3. TX RESULT REPORT Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function can be used to set whether the report showing the result of a transmission is printed automatically after the transmission is finished. SELECT TRAY FK-506 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. This function can be used to set whether the report is printed automatically when the 60th transmission/ reception is reached. a report can be printed to show the results of the transmissions/receptions. “OFF” ON C. 1. 2007 • This function can be used to select which paper tray can be used to supply paper when printing received documents or transmission reports. CLOSED NETWORK • This function can be used to set whether or not the fax is received if the sender's fax number does not match the fax number programmed in this machine's one-touch dial keys.) • This function can be used to specify the tray not to supply a paper.

Utility Mode Use Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is “OFF”. 2007 D.0 Apr. RX RESULT REPORT 6. 1. (If regular reception is not finished normally.Field Service Ver. regardless of the selected setting. a report will always be printed. “OFF” ON 37 Adjustment / Setting FK-506 Functions • This function can be used to set whether the report showing the result of a reception is printed automatically after mailbox reception is finished.) .

1. Adjustment / Setting 38 . 4. To go back to previous screen. 3. press the Back key. Procedure Press the Utility key. 7.7. Service Mode Field Service Ver. FK-506 Service Mode Service mode setting procedure 7. Select the setting value using [▲ / ▼ / / ] key or the 10-key pad. Validate the selection by pressing the OK key. Press the following keys in this order.0 Apr. Exiting 7.3 1. 2. Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1 The Service mode menu screen will appear. 2007 7.1 1. 4. Changing the setting value in service mode functions ▼ ▲ Select the desired item using ▲ / ▼ key. 2. 1. 7.1 NOTE • Care must be used to ensure that only the personnel who are involved in service jobs know the procedure to enter the service mode. 3.1.2 • Press the Reset key.1.

45 Ref. page P.40 P.41 P.41 P.43 P.0 Apr. SERVICE MODE SERVICE’S CHOICE MARKETING AREA TX SPEED RX SPEED TX LEVEL RX LEVEL DTMF LEVEL CNG LEVEL CED LEVEL ECM MODE CODING SCHEME REPORT DESTINATION TONER EMPTY REPORT IU LIFE REPORT MAINTENANCE REPORT PROTOCOL REPORT GDI TIMEOUT FUNCTION UPLOAD F/W FAX RES.2 Service Mode function tree FK-506 Adjustment / Setting NOTE • This setting menu contains only the cases in which the FK-506 is mounted.42 P.40 P.44 P.44 P.41 P.44 P.42 P. 2007 7.42 P.41 P.42 P.40 P.41 P.41 P. 1. COPY TEST SOFTSWITCH FACTORY TEST SIGNAL TEST RELAY TEST DIAL TEST VOLUME TEST CLEAR DATA DRAM CLEAR FLASH ROM CLEAR P.43 P.44 P.44 P.Field Service Ver.45 P. Service Mode 7.43 39 .40 P.

Choose the mode from among the following. 12000. 9600. -2 dBm -3 dBm to -8 dBm “-9 dBm” -10 dBm to -16 dBm -17 dBm 40 . • The default setting is “V. TX LEVEL Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • PSK/FSK signal output level. 7200 V. 31200. 9600. 31200.7.34”: 33600. 24000. • Using ▲ / ▼ key. select the marketing area. 26400.17: 14400. 28800. 28800.27: 4800. 24000. 7200 V. “V. Service Mode Field Service Ver.1 A. the soft switch will change automatically.3. 21600.27: 4800.34”: 33600.S. 7200 V. STANDARD U. 16800 V.A TAIWAN SPAIN ITALIAN BELGIUM NORWAY SWEDEN NETHERLANDS FINLAND DENMARK SWITZERLAND IRELAND PORTUGAL SOUTH AFRICA GREECE ISRAEL AUSTRIA GERMANY FRANCE KOREA CZECH SLOVAKIA HUNGARY UKRAINE BALTIC WEST EUROPE SLOVENIA MALAYSIA HONG KONG PHILIPPINE THAILAND INDONESIA OMAN UAE QATAR BAHRAIN KUWAIT SAUDIARABIA JAPAN UNITED KINGDOM POLAND AUSTRALIA CHINA NEW ZEALAND ROMANIA RUSSIA SINGAPORE B. 2400 C. 2007 7.34”. TX SPEED Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Transmit start speed setting. 7200 V.34”. “V. 21600.0 Apr.29: 9600. • If you change the marketing area. MARKETING AREA Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Set the marketing area. 12000.29: 9600. 19200. RX SPEED Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Reception start speed setting. 19200. Choose the mode from among the following. • The default setting is “V. • The default setting is “-9 dBm”. 1.3 FK-506 Setting in the service mode SERVICE’S CHOICE 7. 26400.17: 14400. 16800 V. 2400 D.

-2 dBm -3 dBm to -9 dBm “-10 dBm” -11 dBm to -16 dBm -17 dBm H. CNG LEVEL Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Calling tone output level. 41 Adjustment / Setting • The default setting is “-10 dBm”. 2007 E. -2 dBm -3 dBm to -7 dBm “-6 dBm” -9 dBm to -16 dBm -17 dBm G. CED LEVEL Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Answer tone output level. MH: The simplest compression method. ECM MODE • Select error correction mode. “JBIG”: The most complex compression method that generates the smallest code than any of following ones. MMR MR MH “JBIG” MMR: A compression method. CODING SCHEME Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Select compression method in TX/ RX mode. FK-506 Functions • Reception sensitivity level. “ON” OFF Functions Use Setting/ Procedure “ON”: When an error occurs during communication. MR: A compression method. • The default setting is “-10 dBm”. re-send the frame where the error occurs. J.0 Apr.Field Service Ver. RX LEVEL 7. DTMF LEVEL Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Dual tone output level. . • The default setting is “-6 dBm”. • The default setting is “JBIG”. 1. Service Mode Use Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is “-43 dBm”. -36 dBm -37 dBm to -42 dBm “-43 dBm” -44 dBm to -48 dBm -49 dBm F. OFF: Any error is ignored during communication. -2 dBm -3 dBm to -9 dBm “-10 dBm” -11 dBm to -16 dBm -17 dBm I. • The default setting is “ON”.

• If two or more conditions occur. and “#”. • The Maintenance Counter reaches a preset value. MAINTENANCE REPORT Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function can be used to set whether or not to send the report when the maintenance counter is zero. “OFF” 42 . Service Mode K. 48 hours. IU LIFE REPORT Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Select to generate the report when IU LIFE COUNTER becomes out of life. *) NOTE • The report will be produced at a timing of 20 min. 2007 • Enter the telephone number for which the report is to be produced. ON ON: Generate a report to report destination. TONER EMPTY REPORT Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Select to generate a report to a specific destination when toner empty status occurs in the engine.7. (0-9. only one report will be produced. 1. REPORT DESTINATION Functions Field Service Ver. and 72 hours after any of the above conditions has occurred until the condition disappears. “OFF” M. • Toner-empty condition • The IU Life Counter exceeds the specifications. • The default setting is “OFF”. the report is sent to the destination. ON ON: Generate a report to report destination. When any of the following conditions happens. #. • Fax number specifications: An up-to-20-digit number that may consist of “0-9”. ON ON: Generate a report to report destination. “OFF” N.. “OFF”: Not to generate report. FK-506 Use Setting/ Procedure L. “OFF”: Not to generate report.0 Apr. “OFF”: Not to generate report. 24 hours. • The default setting is “OFF”. • The default setting is “OFF”. “ * ”.

UPLOAD F/W Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Download firmware from this machine to remote side. 43 Adjustment / Setting FK-506 Functions • Print communication report. Press OK key to scan the next original and Back key to finish the scanning.30 communication report. 2007 O. 5sec 40sec 10sec 50sec 20sec “60sec” 30sec 7. and press OK key.3. after setup of remote side location. . • Choose one from among the following. PROTOCOL REPORT 7. COPY TEST Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Fax resolution copy test • To check whether the encoding/ decoding process is correct [CCD. ON: Print T. GDI TIMEOUT Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To specify the time for time out when data from PC is interrupted during GDI printing. ON (ERROR): Print T.0 Apr. 2. FAX] 1.Field Service Ver. FAX RES.30 communication report.30 communication report when an error occurs.2 FUNCTION A. Press [AUTO DETECTION] or [MANAUL: XX] to select the paper. Set the original on ADF. 1. “OFF” ON ON (ERROR) “OFF”: Disable T. [ADF. P. B. Service Mode Use Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is “OFF”. FAX] 1. • Machine will dial automatically and copy the Flash ROM date to remote side machine. • The default setting is “60sec”.

SIGNAL TEST • This test is for factory adjustment only and should NOT be used.47 7. 2. and a buzzer can be heard. Adjustment / Setting 44 .3. C. 2007 SOFTSWITCH See P. RELAY TEST • This test is for factory adjustment only and should NOT be used. Press the OK key. 1. D. 1.0 Apr. B. VOLUME TEST Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Buzzer issues sound correct.3. Pressing the / keys will select the volume of [HIGH] or [LOW].4 FACTORY TEST A.3 FK-506 Field Service Ver.7. Service Mode 7. DIAL TEST • This test is for factory adjustment only and should NOT be used.

MODE Initialized Items BUZZER VOLUME REMOTE MONITOR TONE/ PULSE LINE MONITOR PSTN/ PBX DATE & TIME USER FAX NO. B.3. Be sure to make a note of them separately.Field Service Ver. it is a good idea to have reports and lists printed. FLASH ROM CLEAR • To clear the settings for the functions listed at the following and return the functions to their default settings. NOTE • Before executing [FLASH ROM CLEAR] be sure to record the setting values that are to be initialized through [FLASH ROM CLEAR]. GATEWAY TX LOW LIMITED TONE LOW PSTN None None None None None None None None None 0 STD/TEXT MEMORY ON OFF 2 ON MEMORY RX AUTO RX OFF OFF ENABLE OFF ON OFF OFF OFF None None None DISABLE DISABLE Default Report/ List MACHINE STATUS LIST none MACHINE STATUS LIST UTILITY MODE MACHINE SETTING ADMIN. • For the record of the setting values.0 Apr. 1. But only clear DRAM data on Printer control board. • After [FLASH ROM CLEAR] has been executed. . • The following items are cleared (initialization). MANEGEMENT COMM. Service Mode NOTE • Not include DRAM data on NIC. • Some setting values are not included any of these reports or lists. the user data are not affected. DRAM CLEAR • Clear all data in the memory file and free all memory to 100%. of RINGS REDUCTION RX RX PRINT RX MODE FORWARD FOOTER SELECT TRAY CLOSED NETWORK\ ACTIVITY REPORT RESERVATION REPORT TX RESULT REPORT RX RESULT REPORT IP ADDRESS SETTING SUBNET MASK GATEWAY DNS CONFIG.5 CLEAR DATA 7. make necessary entries of data again based on the setting values recorded. 2007 7. SETTING USER SETTING MACHINE STATUS LIST DIAL REGISTRATION ONE-TOUCH LIST SPEED DIAL LIST KEY SETTING LIST MACHINE STATUS LIST none MACHINE STATUS LIST FAX REGISTRATION FAX TX OPERATION FAX RX OPERATION MACHINE STATUS LIST REPORTING MACHINE STATUS LIST NETWORK SETTING MACHINE STATUS LIST 45 Adjustment / Setting FK-506 A. USER NAME ONE-TOUCH DIAL SPEED DIAL GROUP DIAL PROGRAM DIAL MAIL BOX RELAY BOX DENSITY LEVEL QUALITY PRIORITY DEFAULT TX HEADER MEMORY RX MODE NO.

2007 Default Report/ List MACHINE STATUS LIST FK-506 E-MAIL SETTING 2 MACHINE STATUS LIST SCAN SETTING 300 X 300 TIFF MH None MACHINE STATUS LIST TX/RX Result (Activity Data) TX RESULT REPORT RX RESULT REPORT ACTIVITY REPORT MEMORY DATA LIST MEMORY IMAGE PRINT SERVICE DATA LIST none Image Data of DRAM memory file SERVICE MODE SERVICE’S CHOICE MARKETTING AREA TX SPEED RX SPEED TX LEVEL RX LEVEL DTMF LEVEL CNG LEVEL CED LEVEL ECM MODE CODING SCHEME PROTOCOL REPORT None STANDARD V. SMTP PORT NO.34 -9 dBm -43 dBm -6 dBm -10 dBm -10 dBm ON JBIG OFF Adjustment / Setting 46 .34 V. POP3 PORT NO. POP3 TIMEOUT POP3 ACCOUNT POP3 PASSWORD AUTO RECEPTION REPLY ADDRESS HEADER PRINT RESOLUTION IMAGE FORMAT CODING METHOD None None None 60 OFF None None None None None None OFF None OFF Field Service Ver. 1. SMTP TIMEOUT TEXT INSERT DEFAULT SUBJECT POP3 SERVER ADDR. Service Mode MODE UTILITY MODE Initialized Items E-MAIL SETTING 1 SENDER NAME E-MAIL ADDRESS SMTP SERVER ADDR.0 Apr.7.

Use the RSD software function.44 Bit No. • The bit status can be changed by the following methods: 1. In this case.0 Apr. defined to comply with the requirements unique to each individual country. The settings can be changed when: The marketing area code is set in the service mode.Field Service Ver. 2007 8. Soft Switch Set 8. the initial settings are determined according to the current marketing area code. • The initial settings of the soft switches can be changed according to the marketing area. Soft Switch Set FK-506 Adjustment / Setting • This machine is provided with a total of 64 soft switches used for making various adjustments. [FLASH ROM CLEAR] is cleared using the service mode. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A0CJF3E507DA Hex-binary conversion list 4 (8) Bit no. The marketing area code is set using the RSD utility software. 1. Use soft switch available as a service mode function. The initial values can be changed. 3 (7) 2 (6) 1 (5) HEX 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 1 0 3 0 0 1 1 4 0 1 0 0 5 0 1 0 1 6 0 1 1 0 7 0 1 1 1 8 1 0 0 0 9 1 0 0 1 A 1 0 1 0 B 1 0 1 1 C 1 1 0 0 D 1 1 0 1 E 1 1 1 0 F 1 1 1 1 2. See P. 47 .

MALAYSIA Setting in accordance AUSTRALIA.. RUSSIA. KOREA. DENMARK. See P. WEST EUROPE. UNITED KINGDOM. SPAIN. 1. TAIWAN SINGAPORE SINGAPORE (remark: with DTS default setting). GREECE.40 • According to the following table. Soft Switch Set Field Service Ver. IRELAND. OMAN. CZECH. SWEDEN. CHINA. SLOVAKIA. FINLAND. Do not select each country. BAHRAIN.0 Apr.S. NETHERLANDS. PORTUGAL.1 NOTE • A different country may be applicable depending on the communications standard. with each country SOUTH AFRICA. ITALIAN. JAPAN. KUWAIT.S. UAE. • The marketing area settings can be set using the [SERVICE’S CHOICE] of [SERVICE MODE]. CANADA AUSTRIA. THAILLAND. SLOVENIA. POLAND. HUNGARY. NEW ZEALAND. FRANCE.A WEST EUROPE ASIA Country BALTIC. PHILIPPINE. SWITZERLAND. HONG KONG. the machines that are installed in the West Europe Area select [West Europe] in the [MARKETING AREA] function. INDONESIA. Adjustment / Setting 48 . SAUDIARABIA.A. 2007 8.1 FK-506 Default Setting Country for each marketing area 8. BELGIUM. QUTAR.1. NORWAY. GERMANY. ISRAEL. Marketing area STANDARD U. ROMANIA.8. UKRAINE U.

1. WEST EUROPE Bit No.2 Default soft switch setting for each market area 1 MARKETING AREA Soft switch No. ASIA Bit No.0 Apr.S. 2007 8. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 # 01 # 02 # 03 # 04 # 05 # 06 # 07 # 08 # 09 # 10 # 11 # 12 # 13 # 14 # 15 # 16 # 17 # 18 # 19 # 20 # 21 # 22 # 23 # 24 # 25 # 26 # 27 # 28 # 29 # 30 # 31 # 32 # 33 # 34 # 35 # 36 # 37 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 49 Adjustment / Setting 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 FK-506 . Soft Switch Set 8. U.A. Bit No.Field Service Ver. STANDARD (Initial setting) Bit No.

S. WEST EUROPE Bit No. 1.A. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 # 38 # 39 # 40 # 41 # 42 # 43 # 44 # 45 # 46 # 47 # 48 # 49 # 50 # 51 # 52 # 53 # 54 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjustment / Setting # 55 # 56 # 57 # 58 # 59 # 60 # 61 # 62 # 63 # 64 50 . STANDARD (Initial setting) Bit No. Bit No.0 Apr. U. 2007 MARKETING AREA FK-506 Soft switch No.8. Soft Switch Set Field Service Ver. ASIA Bit No.

AUSTRIA Bit No. CHINA Bit No.Field Service Ver. 2007 8. Soft Switch Set 8.3 Default soft switch setting for each market area 2 MARKETING AREA Soft switch No.0 Apr. 1. GERMANY Bit No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 # 01 # 02 # 03 # 04 # 05 # 06 # 07 # 08 # 09 # 10 # 11 # 12 # 13 # 14 # 15 # 16 # 17 # 18 # 19 # 20 # 21 # 22 # 23 # 24 # 25 # 26 # 27 # 28 # 29 # 30 # 31 # 32 # 33 # 34 # 35 # 36 # 37 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 51 Adjustment / Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FK-506 . JAPAN Bit No.

2007 MARKETING AREA FK-506 Soft switch No. CHINA Bit No.8. AUSTRIA Bit No. Soft Switch Set Field Service Ver. JAPAN Bit No. 1. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 # 38 # 39 # 40 # 41 # 42 # 43 # 44 # 45 # 46 # 47 # 48 # 49 # 50 # 51 # 52 # 53 # 54 # 55 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 Adjustment / Setting # 56 # 57 # 58 # 59 # 60 # 61 # 62 # 63 # 64 52 .0 Apr. GERMANY Bit No.

NEW ZEALAND Bit No. KOREA Bit No. 1. SOUTH AFRICA Bit No.4 Default soft switch setting for each market area 3 MARKETING AREA Soft switch No.Field Service Ver. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 # 01 # 02 # 03 # 04 # 05 # 06 # 07 # 08 # 09 # 10 # 11 # 12 # 13 # 14 # 15 # 16 # 17 # 18 # 19 # 20 # 21 # 22 # 23 # 24 # 25 # 26 # 27 # 28 # 29 # 30 # 31 # 32 # 33 # 34 # 35 # 36 # 37 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 53 Adjustment / Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FK-506 .0 Apr. TAIWAN Bit No. 2007 8. Soft Switch Set 8.

NEW ZEALAND Bit No.8.0 Apr. TAIWAN Bit No. KOREA Bit No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 # 38 # 39 # 40 # 41 # 42 # 43 # 44 # 45 # 46 # 47 # 48 # 49 # 50 # 51 # 52 # 53 # 54 # 55 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjustment / Setting # 56 # 57 # 58 # 59 # 60 # 61 # 62 # 63 # 64 54 . SOUTH AFRICA Bit No. 2007 MARKETING AREA FK-506 Soft switch No. Soft Switch Set Field Service Ver. 1.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 # 33 # 34 # 35 # 36 # 37 # 38 # 39 # 40 # 41 # 42 # 43 # 44 # 45 # 46 # 47 # 48 # 49 # 50 # 51 # 52 # 53 # 54 # 55 # 56 # 57 # 58 # 59 # 60 # 61 # 62 # 63 # 64 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Soft switch No.Field Service Ver. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 # 01 # 02 # 03 # 04 # 05 # 06 # 07 # 08 # 09 # 10 # 11 # 12 # 13 # 14 # 15 # 16 # 17 # 18 # 19 # 20 # 21 # 22 # 23 # 24 # 25 # 26 # 27 # 28 # 29 # 30 # 31 # 32 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 55 Adjustment / Setting 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FK-506 .5 Default soft switch setting for each market area 4 MARKETING AREA MARKETING AREA Soft switch No. 2007 8. 1.0 Apr. SINGAPORE Bit No. SINGAPORE Bit No. Soft Switch Set 8.

# 01 Soft Switch List Bit No.69 P.68 P.64 P.67 P.61 Designation Page No. P. Soft Switch Set Field Service Ver.64 P.8.65 P.17 Header TX selection open to user Transmit RTN signal level criteria Sent N.30 command after send out MPS command Received DIS signal within reception Transmission time limitation Audio alarm after communication fail Detect dial tone after pre-fix number Pulse dial allowed to select Protocol signal display mode DTMF high frequency dB value P.63 P. 8/7 Reserved Time between phase C to phase D signal in V.0 Apr. 2007 8. cycle to approve incoming ring Dial tone or busy tone detection PSTN/ PBX setting PBX dial tone detect Dial mode select Tx level select for PSK/ FSK Sending RTN signal level Detect busy tone after dialing Sending CED signal after connection Redial interval Ringer frequency detection TSI/ CSI Append “+” Time from RX DIS signal to send DCS signal Print out RTN page report Confirmation report result field Get gap time between digit for pulse dial RX PIP T. and No.G page Send out NSF frame with station ID Number of pause within phone number Re-dial prohibit for NO ANSWER RX level setting Visible alarm for RTN signal Audible alarm or RTN signal Push Button on/off Timing (PB) Relation between dialed No.66 P. of dial pulse 10PPS/20PPS PPS ratio Ring on time to ignore ring off time at 1st cycle Ring off time at 1 st.62 P.61 # 02 6 3/2 1 8 # 03 7 6 4/3/2/1 # 04 4 3 8/7 # 05 6/5 3 2/1 # 06 8/7 4/3 8 Adjustment / Setting 7 # 07 6 5 4/3/2/1 8 # 08 7 6 4/3/2/1 8/7 # 09 5 2/1 8 7 6/5 # 10 4 3 2 1 7 # 11 6 5 1 56 .6 FK-506 Switch No. 1.

80 P.34 ANSam signal and FSK DIS signal Remote side no document to be polled Fax communication coding method CED frequency Pause between off hook and CED signal Inactivity timer [T5] G3 mode training quality level Redefine re-dial attempts counter CNG signal level DTMF high frequency level Redefine redial interval NSS signal before DCS CNG duration after dialing (T1) T4 timer DIS signal length Increase default T1 timing during calling Detect busy tone before dial Regard dial tone as busy tone after dialing Check busy tone method CED signal output level Reserved Reserved Flash key time in ON hook key dial Dial tone detection time before disconnected P.71 P.69 # 12 5 3 2/1 8 7/6 # 13 5 4 3 2 # 14 # 15 # 16 6 3/2/1 1 2/1 6 # 17 5/4/3 2/1 # 18 6/5 4/3/2/1 8/7/6/5 4/3/2/1 5/4/3/2/1 8 7/6 # 19 # 20 P. 8. Soft Switch Set Bit No. 1.71 P. V. 2007 Switch No.82 P.74 P.76 P.77 P.81 P. Send CTC after 4th PPR Send EOR after lowest speed TCF transmission timing after DCS MR capability for G3 Delay time between transaction Super fine printing capability for receiving Disable ultra fine capability in RX mode DTS mode Send DTC signal if RX DIS signal in polling RX mode Memory size level to RX Time between V.78 P. 8 7/6 ECM Mode capability Designation Page No.73 P.79 P.75 # 21 5 3 2/1 8 # 22 7 6 4/3/2/1 # 23 # 24 # 25 # 26 # 27 # 28 # 29 – – 4/3 8/7 6/5/4/3/2/1 Dial tone insensitivity 4/3/2/1 8/7/6/5 4/3/2/1 5/4/3/2/1 Immunity for dial tone receiver Time to dial after dial tone on the line CED duration time within calling period Time to dial after size the line when dial tone detected 57 Adjustment / Setting FK-506 .34 TX.78 P.34 fall back level for V.70 P.72 P.77 P.72 P.Field Service Ver.0 Apr.

34 flag number between ECM frame Phase 2 guard tone power level (V.34 modem RX start symbol rate for V. P.89 # 40 8/7/6/5 3/2/1 8/7/6/5 3/2/1 – – – 6 P.84 P.88 # 38 6/5 4 1 8 7 6/5 P.34 modem Switch from V.34 modem Disable V. 8/7 Designation Pause delay time within digit Page No. Soft Switch Set Switch No.8.17 echo protection tone V.34 RX start speed V.83 P.34 modem Auto dial learning for V.84 FK-506 # 30 # 31 # 32 6/5/4/3/2/1 Signal tone Insensitivity after dial for busy tone – – 7 Reserved Reserved V.34 modem Manual TX mode for V. Field Service Ver. 1.34 RX for V.34 modem Flags number in FSK for V. 2007 Bit No.90 # 41 # 42 # 43 # 44 P.34 capability Disable V.92 P.85 # 34 – 8/7 P.87 # 37 7 6/5/4 3/2/1 7 P.34 TX start speed Reserved Reserved Reserved Closed network Call transfer No.92 P.17 to V.34 TX for V.34 modem Set/ reset V.17 RX start speed V.34 modem TX start symbol rate for V.34 transmit after CFR or MCF signal V.34 transmit level deviation V.0 Apr.34 if DIS bit 6 set after received DIS Delay time in primary channel for V.91 P.34) V.86 # 36 8 4/3/2/1 8 P.92 # 45 5 4/3/2/1 P.17 TX start speed V.8/ V.93 58 .89 Adjustment / Setting # 39 4 3 2/1 P. of call transfer # 33 6 5 4 P.29 echo protection tone Compromise equalize enable (CEQ) in the transmit path (TCEQ) Compromise equalize enable (CEQ) in the receiver path (RCEQ) Reserved Dial tone table switch time Dial tone frequency upper range index Dial tone frequency low range index Re-dial attempts continue fall counter Re-dial attempts fail limitation counter Polling TX type for V.85 # 35 6/5/4 3/2/1 P.

0 Apr.98 P.103 # 61 # 62 4/3/2/1 – P. 2007 Switch No.97 P.97 P. of rings Transmit or cancel after time out in “Memory TX” It is possible to register E-mail address in Relay box registration T.97 # 54 7/6 5/4 # 55 # 56 # 57 # 58 # 59 – – – 8 6/5/4/3/2/1 Time between GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) 7 6 5 Fax data divide printer Quick memory TX B4/ A3 declaration for Ledger The width of TX Ledger (8k) Print mailbox RX image even if password is not correct Off hook alarm after communication Display destination selection within TX phase C Max. # 46 3 2 1 P. 8. 8 4 Daylight savings timer RX print mode Default TX mode Header for FAX TX Designation Page No. No.94 # 47 6 5 8 7 6 # 48 5 4 3 2 1 6 # 49 5 4/3/2/1 # 50 8 7 4/3 2 – – 8 # 51 # 52 # 53 P.98 P.Field Service Ver. of ring Reserved # 60 4 3 2 1 P.30 monitor report selection Send “un-sent page mode” for memory transmission Reserved Reserved Report/ LCD date/ time type Report/ LCD date/ time format Memory near full capacity for scanning Reserved Reserved Reserved Time out from PSK to FSK delay time P.99 P.99 P.95 P. 1.104 P.96 P. Soft Switch Set Bit No.94 Print model name on top of TX page if machine name not register RX mode Footer Activity report Reservation report TX result report RX result report TX/ RX error report Error report for I-FAX and network scanner Error mail (I-FAX) Broadcast report Print RX mailbox report method Redial method if communication fail No.100 P.99 P.96 P.104 59 Adjustment / Setting FK-506 .

2007 Bit No.105 # 64 6 5 P.0 Apr. Soft Switch Set Switch No.105 Adjustment / Setting 60 . 1. Field Service Ver. 8 Designation # key definition in PBX mode FAX Tx image adjust TX result report with image Print RX error report on RX side if no FAX signal is detected 10 pps & 20 pps selectable by user Page No.8. FK-506 # 63 2 1 P.

6. 2007 8.G indicates our side detected RTN signal from other end. 61 . and this use for G3 mode only.Field Service Ver. receiving machine will send RTN signal.6.1 Bit No. in this case.17 Example: Image → EOP Header TX selection open to user Reserved Reserved 0 RX 70 msec 120 msec 180 msec 60 msec Insensitivity 0 0 1 1 Bit 8 Bit 7 0 1 0 1 0: No 1: Yes Reserved Reserved Percentage of error line Bit 3 Bit 2 10% 0 0 15% 0 1 20% 1 0 25% 1 1 0 HEX Designation Function 7 0 2 1 0 0 0 6 5 4 3 2 Transmit RTN signal level criteria 1 Sent N.2 Bit No. Soft Switch Set SOFT SWITCH: #01 FK-506 Adjustment / Setting 0 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 8. • Bit 2-3: In G3 mode. some machine will re-send the same page again. if error line for each page meets the criteria setting. In this case machine can re-send the same page up to three or just one time.G page 0: Send N. N. the header select function can not be changed by user.G page and up to 3 times for that page 1: Not re-send that N. The retry times depend on transmission side.0 Apr.G page for G3 mode 0 • Bit 1: If this bit is set to ‘0’. only changeable by serviceman in service mode. 1. 8 SOFT SWITCH: #02 Initial Setting Bit Time between phase C to phase D signal in V. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8. • Bit 6: If this bit is set to ‘0’.

Can input Pause key to insert pause time between digits. up to 2 “P” within inputted telephone number 0: Continue to dial 1: Not allowed to re-dial if no any FAX signal or detected busy tone after dialing Reserved RX level (dB) Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 RX level (dB) Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 RX level (dB) Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 -49 0 0 0 0 -42 0 1 1 1 -48 0 0 0 1 -41 1 0 0 0 -47 0 0 1 0 -40 1 0 0 1 -46 0 0 1 1 -39 1 0 1 0 -45 0 1 0 0 -38 1 0 1 1 -44 0 1 0 1 -37 1 1 0 0 -43 0 1 1 0 -36 1 1 0 1 6 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 HEX Designation Function 8 7 0 8 6 5 4 3 2 RX level setting 1 Adjustment / Setting Reserved 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 • Bit 8: This bit set to 1. In this case can use “P” to increase T1 time during calling to other parties. Field Service Ver.6. Soft Switch Set 8. 62 .0 Apr.3 FK-506 Bit No. 1. the answer machine will send machine name by NSF frame after connection. 2007 SOFT SWITCH: #03 Initial Setting Bit Send out NSF frame with station ID Number of pause within phone number Re-dial prohibit for NO ANSWER Reserved 1: Yes 0: No 0: No limitation 1: Max.8. this can put more than one “P” at the end of telephone number to increase calling time (T) after calling.

63 .alarm for sending or receiving RTN signal. 0: No 1: Yes .0 Apr. Soft Switch Set SOFT SWITCH: #04 FK-506 Adjustment / Setting Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Visible alarm for RTN signal Audible alarm for RTN signal Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0: No 1: Yes . 8 7 6 5 4 8. 2007 8. • Bit 4: The display message will stay put on the LCD for 3 seconds or until next incoming T30 signal. Reserved Reserved 1 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 3 2 1 1 0 0 C • Bit 3: The alarm lasts for 3 seconds after a negative signal is detected in G3 mode. 1.6.Field Service Ver.display message while sending / receiving RTN signal (RTN= Return To Negative).4 Bit No.

0 Apr. 8 Push button on/off timing (PB) Timing ON (ms) OFF Bit 8 Bit 7 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #0 Bit 6 Bit 5 Reserve 0: 10PPS 1: 20PPS MR(%) 1 PPS ratio Bit 2 Bit 1 33 0 0 40 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 0 100 140 0 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 0 1 Field Service Ver.6 Bit No. 1.6.8. 2007 SOFT SWITCH: #05 Initial Setting Bit 0 70 70 0 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 1 0 70 140 1 0 90 90 1 1 HEX Designation Function 7 0 6 0 0 Reserved 0 5 Relation between dialed 10-key and No.6.5 FK-506 Bit No. cycle to approve incoming ring Reserved Reserved Time Bit 8 Bit 7 Reserved Reserved Time Bit 4 Bit 3 Reserved Reserved 100 ms 0 0 250 ms 0 1 500 ms 1000 ms 1 1 0 1 50 ms 0 0 100 ms 0 1 150 ms 1 0 800 ms 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 HEX Designation Function 4 F 64 . of dial pulse 1 1 0 0 0 0 4 3 Reserve 10PPS / 20PPS Adjustment / Setting 2 30 1 0 Reserved 1 1 0 8. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SOFT SWITCH: #06 Initial Setting Bit Ring on time to ignore ring off time at 1st cycle Reserved Reserved Ring off time at 1 st. Soft Switch Set 8.

8.7 Bit No. 2007 8.6.Field Service Ver. Soft Switch Set SOFT SWITCH: #07 FK-506 Adjustment / Setting Initial Setting Bit Dial tone or busy tone detection PSTN/PBX setting 0: Disable 1: Enable .Detect dial tone before dial 0: PSTN 1: PBX .DP Level (dBm) -17 -16 -15 -14 -13 -12 -11 -10 Bit 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Level (dBm) -9 Bit 4 1 Bit 3 0 Bit 2 0 Bit 1 0 -8 1 0 0 1 -7 1 0 1 0 -6 1 0 1 1 -5 1 1 0 0 -4 1 1 0 1 -3 1 1 1 0 -2 1 1 1 1 5 4 3 2 Dial mode select 0 1 0 0 Tx level select for PSK/ FSK 1 8 0 65 .0 Apr.Select PBX line type 0: Not to detect dial tone before pre-fix number 0 HEX Designation Function 8 7 0 0 0 6 PBX dial tone detect 1: Detect dial tone before the pre-fix number in PBX mode 0: DTMF . 1.PB 1: Pulse .

Auto dial interval 2. 3. 2. 5. Fine)=(6. 1. 3. 10. 2. 3. 5. 1 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 8 7 1 6 6 5 4 3 2 Auto dial interval Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 0 0 1 1 1. 2. 2. 1. 2. 1. 15. 1. 3. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1. 3. 2. 10.8 FK-506 Bit No. 1. 5. 2007 SOFT SWITCH: #08 Initial Setting Bit Sending RTN signal level Detect busy tone after dialing Sending CED signal After connection Reserved 0: (Normal. 2. 1. 3. 3. 1. 10. 3. 3. Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 • Bit 8: If error line above definition. 1. 2. 1. 1. 66 . Fine)=(12. 3. 1. 10. Field Service Ver. 1. 2. 10. 1. 1. 2.0 Apr. 2. 2. 3. 15. Soft Switch Set 8. 3. 3. 0 1 0 0 2. 3. 15. 2. 2. 1. 1. 2.8. 3. 2. 10. machine will send RTN signal instead of MCF signal. 1. 10. 1. 5. 2. 10.12) continue error line 0: Not to detect 1: Detect busy tone after dialing 0: Not to send 1: Send CED signal before DIS signal after connection Reserved 1. This will cause the other party to send the same page again. 3. 3.6. 3.24) continue error line 1: (Normal. 3. 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 Adjustment / Setting Redial Interval 1 2.

Soft Switch Set SOFT SWITCH: #09 FK-506 Adjustment / Setting Initial Setting Bit Ringer frequency range Bit 8 Bit 7 Reserved 0: Not append “+” before send out TSI/CSI 1: Automatically insert “+” Reserved Reserved Description 70 msec 120 msec 180 msec 240 msec Bit 2 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 0 10 to 75 Hz 0 0 20 to 57. 2007 8.5 Hz 0 1 20 to 75 Hz 1 0 10 to 75 Hz 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Reserved TSI/CSI append “+” Reserved Reserved Time from RX DIS signal to send DCS signal • Bit 5: When this bit is set to “1”. 67 . 1. 8 Ringer frequency detection 8. the “+” character will be placed in the first position on CSI and TSI command.0 Apr.6.Field Service Ver.9 Bit No.

10 FK-506 Bit No. Soft Switch Set 8. • Bit 2: For Manual Tx only. Field Service Ver. the result field will show “NG” instead of “OK” in the confirmation report and activity report or checking the result on the LCD.8.30 command after send out MPS command Received DIS signal within reception Transmission time limitation Audio alarm after communication fail 0: Not to Print 1: Print Out RTN page report after transaction for TX/RX RTN signal 0: Print “OK” 1: Print “NG” in case of sending or receiving RTN signal Value Bit 6 Bit 5 550 ms 0 0 650 ms 0 1 750 ms 1 0 850 ms 1 1 1 HEX Designation Function 8 7 6 5 0 1 0 A 0: Send DCS at current speed 1: Return to Tx phase B waiting for DIS signal 0: Repeat sending DIS/DTC again until time out 1: Disconnected after sending DCN signal 0: No any limitation until document jam 1: Limit to 8 minutes from data phase 0: Not to alarm after transaction fail 1: Alarm 3 seconds after disconnected 0 4 3 0 1 0 2 1 1 Adjustment / Setting • Bit 8: If this bit set to 1. 1.0 Apr. • Bit 7: If this bit is set to 1. 68 . 2007 SOFT SWITCH: #10 Initial Setting Bit Print out RTN page report Confirmation report result field Get gap time between digit for pulse dial RX PIP T. machine will print out confirmation report after each transaction for TX/RX RTN signal.6.

8. 2007 8. 1.6. not allowed user to select Pulse dial. • Bit 6-7: If level reads “1”.6. this is used for G3 mode only.0 Apr.34 does not need this setting.34 modem capability Counter Bit 7 Bit 6 1 0 0 2 0 1 3 1 0 4 1 1 1 0 0 8 HEX Designation Function 8 7 6 V.also disable V. and this function open for serviceman to change.11 Bit No. V. 69 . SOFT SWITCH: #12 Initial Setting Bit ECM mode capability 1: Yes 0: No . 8 7 8.34 fall back level for V.34 TX. 5 4 3 2 1 Send CTC after 4th PPR Reserved Send EOR after lowest speed TCF transmission timing after DCS 0: Send CTC (Continue To Correct) 1: Send EOR (End Of Transmission) Reserved 0: Send DCN (Redial) 1: Send EOR_xxx (Germany PTT) Description 70 msec 80 msec 90 msec 100 msec Bit 2 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 1-2: Delay time from FSK mode to PSK mode. Will go down to next lower speed for next data phase. Reserved Reserved Reserved 0: Base on SW19 (1-4) 1: High 1dB 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 6 0 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 6: If this bit is set to 1.Field Service Ver. • Bit 7: Bit set to 1. machine. Soft Switch Set SOFT SWITCH: #11 FK-506 Adjustment / Setting Initial Setting Bit Reserved Detect dial tone after pre-fix number Pulse dial allowed to select Protocol signal display mode Reserved Reserved Reserved DTMF high frequency dB value Reserved 0: No 1: Yes 0: Yes 1: Not allowed 0: Not to display 1: Display V8 or T30 command within communication.12 Bit No. LCD will show the command between each party.

1.13 FK-506 Bit No.6. the time between each transaction will become longer.Super fine R8 × 15. • Bit 4: The resolution definition: . 2007 SOFT SWITCH: #13 Initial Setting Bit MR capability for G3 0: Yes 1: No Description Bit 7 Bit 6 0: No 1: Yes 0: No 1: Yes 0: No 1: Yes 1: No-send DIS again 0: Yes Reserved 0 1 20 sec 0 0 60 sec 0 1 120 sec 240 sec 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 HEX Designation Function 8 7 6 Delay time between transaction Super fine printing capability for receiving Disable ultra fine capability in RX mode DTS mode Send DTC signal if RX DIS signal in polling RX mode Reserved 5 4 0 3 0 0 2 1 0 Adjustment / Setting • Bit 7-6: If set to 1. Field Service Ver.8. Soft Switch Set 8.85 lines/mm . 70 .Fine R8 × 7.Standard R8 × 3.4 lines/mm.Ultra fine R8 × 15. in this case machine will wait more time before start to dial next transaction.4 line/mm .7 lines/mm .0 Apr.

15 Bit No. SOFT SWITCH: #15 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Remote side no document to be polled Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0: Not to generate error report document to be polled 1: Generate error report after communication end 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 HEX 8.14 Bit No. 2007 8. 1. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Time between V.6.Field Service Ver. Soft Switch Set SOFT SWITCH: #14 FK-506 Adjustment / Setting Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Memory size level To RX Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 1: Up to 128 KB 0: Based on system configuration Reserved Reserved 50 ms 0 0 0 60 ms 0 0 1 70 ms 0 1 0 80 100 120 140 160 ms ms ms ms ms 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 HEX Designation Function • Bit 6 : If set to 1. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Designation Function 71 . machine will become manual RX mode if available memory size less than 128 K.34 ANSam signal and FSK DIS signal Timer Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 8.0 Apr.6.

Soft Switch Set 8.6.16 FK-506 Bit No.0 Apr.17 Bit No. 8 7 SOFT SWITCH: #17 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved CED frequency Reserved Reserved 0: 2100 Hz 1: 1100 Hz Time 1.8.6. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Fax communication coding method Field Service Ver. in ITU-T standard 72 .8 sec T+ 100 ms T+ 200 ms T+ 300 ms (T=) to 2. 1.5 sec 0 0 0 0 Bit 5 Bit 4 0 0 1 1 Bit 3 0 1 0 1 Time T+ 400 ms T+ 500 ms T+ 600 ms T+ 700 ms (T=) Bit 5 1 1 1 1 Bit 4 0 0 1 1 Bit 3 0 1 0 1 DescripT5 T5 + 20 sec T5 + 40 sec T5 + 60 sec tion 0 0 1 1 Bit 2 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function Adjustment / Setting 6 5 4 Pause between off hook and CED signal 3 0 0 2 1 Inactivity timer [T5] 0 0 • T5: 60 ± 5 sec. 2007 SOFT SWITCH: #16 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Coding method Bit 2 Bit 1 MMR 0 0 MR 0 1 MH 1 0 JBIG 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 3 0 HEX Designation Function 8.

4. Soft Switch Set SOFT SWITCH: #18 FK-506 Adjustment / Setting Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Definition Bit 6 Bit 5 Counter Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Counter Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 0 0 0 0 0 Level1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 1 0 Level2 0 1 3 0 0 1 1 4 0 1 0 0 5 0 1 0 1 Level3 1 0 6 0 1 1 0 7 0 1 1 1 8 1 0 0 0 Level4 1 1 9 10 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 0 1 0 1 1 Reserved 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 • Bit 1-4: The redial attempt times will follow bit 1.6. Otherwise the redial attempt times will follow bit 1 to 4 on SW08. 1. • Bit 5-6: Level 4 training check phases is most severe than level 3. Level 4 can keep lowest RX speed communication than level 3. 1.0 Apr. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Redefine re-dial attempts counter 1 G3 mode training quality level 8. 2007 8. 2.18 Bit No. 1 when poor line condition.Field Service Ver. 73 . 2. if these bits are not all setting “0”.

8 7 6 Field Service Ver.19 FK-506 Bit No. Soft Switch Set 8.6. 2007 SOFT SWITCH: #19 Initial Setting Bit Level (dBm) Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 CNG signal level Level (dBm) Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Level (dBm) Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Level (dBm) Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 -17 -16 -15 -14 -13 -12 -11 -10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 -9 1 0 0 0 -8 1 0 0 1 -7 1 0 1 0 -6 1 0 1 1 -5 1 1 0 0 -4 1 1 0 1 -3 1 1 1 0 -2 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 HEX Designation Function 7 1 5 4 3 2 DTMF high frequency level 1 -17 -16 -15 -14 -13 -12 -11 -10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 -9 1 0 0 0 -8 1 0 0 1 -7 1 0 1 0 -6 1 0 1 1 -5 1 1 0 0 -4 1 1 0 1 -3 1 1 1 0 -2 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 B 0 Adjustment / Setting 74 .8.0 Apr. 1.

20 Bit No.0 Apr.6.Field Service Ver. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 8. Soft Switch Set SOFT SWITCH: #20 FK-506 Adjustment / Setting Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Interval (min) Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Redefine redial interval Redefine redial interval over default setting that is based on soft SW #08 bit 1~4 Interval (min) Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Interval (min) Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 1 1 4 0 0 1 0 0 5 0 0 1 0 1 6 0 0 1 1 0 7 0 0 1 1 1 8 0 1 0 0 0 9 0 1 0 0 1 10 0 1 0 1 0 11 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 1 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Reserved 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 75 . 1. 2007 8.

21 FK-506 Bit No. Soft Switch Set 8.0 Apr.8.” Be sure to make the “No. • Bit 8: Sender machine’s name will show on the other party’s LCD or print on the report if remote side is the same model. In this case you can set this bit to 1. can adjust the T1 time longer by changing the default value. • Bit 3: Some old machines can not accept DIS command over 4 bytes. of RINGS” setting to a value shorter than the “CNG duration after dialing” setting. Adjustment / Setting 76 . • Bit 6-7: A fax to be received is canceled and the machine becomes unable to receive it if the setting of “No. and every time will become fail. JBIG and V8 capability will be disabled automatically.6. If this bit is set to 1. of RINGS” is made longer than the setting of “CNG duration after dialing. 1. Field Service Ver. The default T1 timer depends on each country regulation. 2007 SOFT SWITCH: #21 Initial Setting Bit NSS signal before DCS 0: Not to send NSS signal if remote side is same model 1: Send NSS signal if remote side is same model 1 1 C 0 HEX Designation Function 8 7 6 CNG duration after dialing (T1) Duration Bit 7 Bit 6 40 sec 0 0 60 sec 0 1 70 sec 120 sec 1 1 0 1 5 4 3 2 1 T4 timer Reserved DIS signal length 0: 3.0 sec – Normal case 1: 4.5 sec Reserved 0: Normal length (bit 1 to 64) 1: 4 bytes DIS command – bit 1 to 32 only DescripT1 sec T1+ 30 sec T1+ 40 sec T1+ 60 sec tion 0 0 1 1 Bit 2 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Increase default T1 timing during calling • Bit 1-2: T1 indicates the calling time after dialing.

Soft Switch Set SOFT SWITCH: #22 FK-506 Adjustment / Setting Initial Setting Bit Detect busy tone before dial 1: Check busy tone within dial tone detection 0: Not to check 0 HEX Designation Function 8 7 Regard dial tone as busy 1: Yes . 1.Field Service Ver.23 Bit No.0 Apr.Check dial tone after dialing tone after dialing 0: No Check busy tone method Reserved 0: Measure tone by input energy over threshold 1: By PTT regulation tone frequency Reserved Level (dBm) Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 CED signal output level Level (dBm) Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 -17 -16 -15 -14 -13 -12 -11 -10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 -9 1 0 0 0 -8 1 0 0 1 -7 1 0 1 0 -6 1 0 1 1 -5 1 1 0 0 -4 1 1 0 1 -3 1 1 1 0 -2 1 1 1 1 0 0 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 1 1 7 1 1 8.6. 8.6. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SOFT SWITCH: #23 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 77 .22 Bit No. 2007 8.

6.24 FK-506 Bit No. 8 7 6 5 SOFT SWITCH: #25 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Flash key time in ON hook key dial Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Flash time Bit 4 Bit 3 Reserved Reserved 100 ms 0 0 80 ms 0 1 60 ms 1 0 50 ms 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function Adjustment / Setting 4 3 2 1 0 78 .25 Bit No. 1.8.0 Apr. 2007 SOFT SWITCH: #24 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 8. Soft Switch Set 8.6. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Field Service Ver.

2007 8.26 Bit No. Soft Switch Set SOFT SWITCH: #26 FK-506 Adjustment / Setting Initial Setting Bit Time Bit 8 Bit 7 Level (dBm) Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Level (dBm) Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Dial tone insensitivity (0 dBm to -40 dBm) Level (dBm) Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Level (dBm) Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Level (dBm) Bit 1 to 6 10 sec 0 0 0 -1 -2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 -11 0 0 1 0 1 1 -21 0 1 0 1 0 1 -31 0 1 1 1 1 1 -12 0 0 1 1 0 0 -22 0 1 0 1 1 0 -32 1 0 0 0 0 0 -13 0 0 1 1 0 1 -23 0 1 0 1 1 1 -33 1 0 0 0 0 1 15 sec 0 1 -3 0 0 0 0 1 1 -4 0 0 0 1 0 0 -5 0 0 0 1 0 1 20 sec 1 0 -6 0 0 0 1 1 0 -7 0 0 0 1 1 1 25 sec 1 1 -8 0 0 1 0 0 0 -18 0 1 0 0 1 0 -28 0 1 1 1 0 0 -38 1 0 0 1 1 0 -9 0 0 1 0 0 1 -19 0 1 0 0 1 1 -29 0 1 1 1 0 1 -39 1 0 0 1 1 1 -10 0 0 1 0 1 0 -20 0 1 0 1 0 0 -30 0 1 1 1 1 0 -40 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 HEX Designation Function 2 -14 0 0 1 1 1 0 -24 0 1 1 0 0 0 -34 1 0 0 0 1 0 -15 0 0 1 1 1 1 -25 0 1 1 0 0 1 -35 1 0 0 0 1 1 -16 0 1 0 0 0 0 -26 0 1 1 0 1 0 -36 1 0 0 1 0 0 -17 0 1 0 0 0 1 -27 0 1 1 0 1 1 -37 1 0 0 1 0 1 8 0 1 -41 dBm to -50 dBm Setting disable 79 .Field Service Ver.6.0 Apr. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Dial tone detection time before disconnected 8. 1.

6. Adjustment / Setting 80 . Soft Switch Set 8. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Immunity for dial tone receiver 1 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr.8.27 FK-506 Bit No. 2007 SOFT SWITCH: #27 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Level (dBm) Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Level (dBm) Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 0 0 0 0 0 -8 1 0 0 0 -1 0 0 0 1 -2 0 0 1 0 -3 0 0 1 1 -4 0 1 0 0 -5 0 1 0 1 -6 0 1 1 0 -7 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 0 -9 -10 -11 -12 -13 -14 -15 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 • Bit 1-4: Line input energy must be lower this level before dialing.

Soft Switch Set SOFT SWITCH: #28 FK-506 Adjustment / Setting Initial Setting Bit Time (ms) Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Time (ms) Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 0 0 0 0 0 800 1 0 0 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 HEX Designation Function Time to dial after dial tone on the line 5 A 0 Time (ms) 1400 1500 Bit 8 1 1 Bit 7 1 1 Bit 6 1 1 Bit 5 0 1 4 3 2 Time (ms) Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Time (ms) Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 0 0 0 0 0 800 1 0 0 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 CED duration time within calling period 1 7 1 Time (ms) 1400 1500 Bit 4 1 1 Bit 3 1 1 Bit 2 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 • Bit 1-4: The CED duration time level for automatic transmation 81 . 8 7 6 8. 1.0 Apr. 2007 8.Field Service Ver.28 Bit No.6.

8 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 HEX Designation Function Time to dial after size the line when dial tone detected (Unit = 200 ms) 1 Time 2.4 5.29 FK-506 Bit No.2 (sec) Bit 5 1 1 Bit 4 1 1 Bit 3 1 1 Bit 2 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 4 0 Adjustment / Setting 82 . 1.6 5.4 0.0 4.0 Apr.4 2.8 (sec) Bit 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Bit 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Bit 3 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Bit 2 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Time 4.8 (sec) Bit 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 4 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 3 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Time 6.6 2.0 6.6.8 1.0 1.2 5. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Field Service Ver.2 1.2 2. 2007 SOFT SWITCH: #29 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Time (sec) Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 5.4 1.8 3.6 3.4 3.2 4.6 4.2 3.2 0.0 3.8.6 0.6 1.8 5. Soft Switch Set 8.4 4.0 2.

5 sec 1 1 0 1 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 HEX Designation Function 6 -11 -12 -13 -14 -15 -16 -17 -18 -19 -20 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 -21 -22 -23 -24 -25 -26 -27 -28 -29 -30 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 8 0 1 -31 -32 -33 -34 -35 -36 -37 -38 -39 -40 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 -41 dBm to -50 dBm Setting disable 83 .0 sec 1 0 3.0 Apr.6.Field Service Ver.5 sec 0 1 3. 2007 8. Soft Switch Set SOFT SWITCH: #30 FK-506 Adjustment / Setting Initial Setting Bit Pause delay time within digits Ex.30 Bit No.0 sec 0 0 2. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 8. 002Pxxxxxx Time Bit 8 Bit 7 Level (dBm) Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Level (dBm) Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Signal tone Insensitivity (dBm) after dial for busy tone Level (dBm) Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Level (dBm) Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Level (dBm) Bit 1 to 6 2. 1.

0 Apr. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Field Service Ver. 8 7 6 5 SOFT SWITCH: #32 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function Adjustment / Setting 4 3 2 1 84 . 1.6.8.32 Bit No. Soft Switch Set 8. 2007 SOFT SWITCH: #31 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 8.6.31 FK-506 Bit No.

29 and V. 8 7 8. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SOFT SWITCH: #34 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 85 . 1.29 echo protection tone Compromise equalize enable (CEQ) in the transmit path (TCEQ) Compromise equalize enable (CEQ) in the receiver path (RCEQ) Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0: Off 1: On 0: Off 1: On 0: No 1: Yes 0: No 1: Yes Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 HEX Designation Function 6 0 5 4 3 2 1 • Bit 4-5: V.33 Bit No.34 Bit No.17 echo protection tone V. 2007 8.27 only 8.Field Service Ver.6.0 Apr. V.17. Soft Switch Set SOFT SWITCH: #33 FK-506 Adjustment / Setting Initial Setting Bit Reserved V.6.

0 Apr.6. Soft Switch Set 8. 1.8.35 FK-506 Bit No. 2007 SOFT SWITCH: #35 Initial Setting Bit Time Bit 8 Bit 7 Frequency range Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Dial tone frequency upper range index Frequency range Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 300 ms 0 0 600 ms 0 1 1 sec 1 0 2 sec 1 1 462 Hz to 580 Hz 0 1 0 Reserved 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 HEX Designation Function 9 375 Hz to 462 Hz 0 0 0 570 Hz to 630 Hz 0 1 1 310 Hz to 380 Hz 0 0 1 300 Hz to 370 Hz 1 0 0 4 See Bit 1 to 3 (This upper range value must be higher than lower range value that defined in bit 1 to 3) 3 2 Frequency range Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Frequency range Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 375 Hz to 462 Hz 0 0 0 570 Hz to 630 Hz 0 1 1 310 Hz to 380 Hz 0 0 1 300 Hz to 370 Hz 1 0 0 462 Hz to 580 Hz 0 1 0 Reserved 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 Adjustment / Setting Dial tone frequency Low range index 1 0 86 . 8 7 6 5 Dial tone table switch time Field Service Ver.

36 Bit No.0 Apr. 87 . 1. unless user interruption or after finish communication. then the machine will stop redial unless user interruption or enter the communication phase.Field Service Ver. 2007 8. Soft Switch Set SOFT SWITCH: #36 FK-506 Adjustment / Setting Initial Setting Bit Re-dial attempts continue fail counter Reserved Reserved Reserved 0: No any limitation 1: limit up to bit 1 to 4 Reserved Reserved Reserved Counter Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Counter Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 0 0 0 0 0 8 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 9 1 0 0 1 2 0 0 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 3 0 0 1 1 11 1 0 1 1 4 0 1 0 0 12 1 1 0 0 5 0 1 0 1 13 1 1 0 1 6 0 1 1 0 14 1 1 1 0 7 0 1 1 1 15 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 8 HEX Designation Function 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Re-dial attempts fail limitation counter 1 A 0 • Bit 8: The redial fail counter will plus 1 for each auto dialing.6. If the counter is over the setting in bit 1~4 and Bit set to 1. 8.

speed kbps kbps kbps kbps kbps Bit 3 0 0 0 0 1 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 0 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 0 Reserved 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 Symbol rate Max.34 modem 1 3429 3200 3000 2800 2400 sym/s sym/s sym/s sym/s sym/s 33.2 26.skip V.8 handshake Symbol rate 3429 3200 3000 2800 2400 sym/s sym/s sym/s sym/s sym/s 33.4 24. 2007 SOFT SWITCH: #37 Initial Setting Bit Polling TX type for V.6 Max.34 handshaking with remote side 1: No .0 Apr.6 Max. speed kbps kbps kbps kbps kbps Bit 6 0 0 0 0 1 Bit 5 0 0 1 1 0 Bit 4 0 1 0 1 0 Reserved 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 8 7 6 5 0 0 0 0 RX start symbol rate for V.8.2 26.6 31.0 21.34 modem Auto dial learning for V.4 24.34 modem 0: V.37 FK-506 Bit No.34 modem 4 0 Symbol rate Max.0 21.34 1: V. Field Service Ver. speed Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 3 2 Symbol rate Adjustment / Setting TX start symbol rate for V.6 31.17 0: Yes. Soft Switch Set 8. speed Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 88 .retry from V. 1.6.

SOFT SWITCH: #39 Initial Setting Bit Disable V.but only first time if DIS bit 6 set after 1: No .34 0: No modem 1: Yes Flags number in FSK for V.6.Continue start with V.34 0: No modem 1: Yes Disable V.34 capability 8.34 flag number between ECM frame Phase 2 guard tone power level (V.34 RX for V.34 transmit after CFR or MCF signal Delay time 100 msec 200 msec 300 msec 500 msec Bit 2 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 89 .0 Apr.39 Bit No.start handshake from V.8 /V.8 1: V. 2007 8.34 modem Flags number Bit 6 Bit 5 1 0 0 2 0 1 3 1 0 4 1 1 0 HEX Designation Function 8 7 6 5 0 0 0 0 4 0: V.17 received DIS Delay time in primary channel for V.34) Reserved Reserved V.34 0: Yes .start V. 1.34 TX for V.8 .6.17 to V. 8 7 6 5 V.38 Bit No.8 handshaking.34 modem Manual TX mode for V.17 0 3 2 1 Switch from V. Soft Switch Set SOFT SWITCH: #38 FK-506 Adjustment / Setting Initial Setting Bit Reserved Set/Reset V.Field Service Ver.34 transmit level deviation Reserved 0: Reset 1: Set Flags number Bit 6 Bit 5 0: Normal power level 1: -7 db of normal power level Reserved Reserved 0: No 1: Yes 2 0 0 4 0 1 8 1 0 16 1 1 0 1 1 0 6 HEX Designation Function 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 1 1 8.

34 mode When upper speed less V.29 V.34 V.29 V.34 V.8.6.34 V.17 V.17 V.17 5 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 Adjustment / Setting 2 1 V. 1. 8 7 6 Speed Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Speed Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Speed Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 4 3 Reserved Reserved Speed Field Service Ver.34 24000 bps 21600 bps 19200 bps 16800 bps Bit 3 1 1 1 1 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 Speed 90 .40 FK-506 Bit No.27 V.34 RX start Speed Prohibit V.17 RX start speed Select receiving start speed for V.34 33600 bps 31200 bps 28800 bps 26400 bps Bit 3 0 0 0 0 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 V. 2007 SOFT SWITCH: #40 Initial Setting Bit V.34 V.34 V.34 V. Soft Switch Set 8.27 ter 9600 bps 7200 bps 4800 bps 2400 bps 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Reserved 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function V.17 V.0 Apr.17 14400 bps 12200 bps 9600 bps 7200 bps 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 V.

27 V.34 V.6.41 Bit No.34 24000 bps 21600 bps 19200 bps 16800 bps Bit 3 1 1 1 1 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 91 .17 5 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 V. 1.34 V.17 TX start speed Select receiving start speed for V.17 V.0 Apr.29 V.17 V.27 ter 9600 bps 7200 bps 4800 bps 2400 bps 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Reserved 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function V.34 V. Soft Switch Set SOFT SWITCH: #41 FK-506 Adjustment / Setting Initial Setting Bit V.17 V.34 V. 2007 8.Field Service Ver.29 V.34 TX start speed 1 Speed V.34 V.34 33600 bps 31200 bps 28800 bps 26400 bps Bit 3 0 0 0 0 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 V.17 14400 bps 12200 bps 9600 bps 7200 bps 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 V.34 V. 8 7 6 Speed Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Speed Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Speed Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 4 3 2 Reserved Reserved Speed 8.

0 Apr. Soft Switch Set 8. 1.43 Bit No.6.6.8. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SOFT SWITCH: #44 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 92 . 2007 SOFT SWITCH: #42 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 8.42 FK-506 Bit No.6.44 Bit No. 8 7 6 5 SOFT SWITCH: #43 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function Adjustment / Setting 4 3 2 1 8. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Field Service Ver.

8 7 6 8.0 Apr.Field Service Ver. Soft Switch Set SOFT SWITCH: #45 FK-506 Adjustment / Setting Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Closed network Reserved Reserved 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON Value Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 NO.45 Bit No. of call transfer Value 8 1 0 0 0 9 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 Reserved 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 1 0 3 0 0 1 1 4 0 1 0 0 5 0 1 0 1 6 0 1 1 0 7 0 1 1 1 3 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 5 4 3 2 Call transfer 0 0 0 1 1 93 .6. 2007 8. 1.

6. The default is not printed. 8 7 6 SOFT SWITCH: #47 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved RX mode Reserved Reserved 0: Auto RX mode 1: Manual RX mode 0: Off 1: On . 8. must send header at top of each page.46 FK-506 Bit No. Soft Switch Set 8. • Bit 2: Some country such as U.6. 3 Default TX mode 0 A 1 2 Header for FAX TX 1 Print model name on top 0: No of TX page if machine 1: Yes name not register 0 Adjustment / Setting • Bit 1: If machine name not registered. Field Service Ver. 94 .Print footer information at each of received page Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 5 4 3 2 1 Footer Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 5: The footer shows machine number. remote side TSI number. 1.47 Bit No. the model name will print at the top of each receiving page.A.8. (PRINT RX) 0 0 0 0 1 0 HEX Designation Function 8 7 6 5 4 1: Start to print after receiving all pages. PTT regulation. 2007 SOFT SWITCH: #46 Initial Setting Bit Daylight savings timer Reserved Reserved Reserved RX print mode 0: No 1: Yes Reserved Reserved Reserved 0: RX one page then print one page.S.0 Apr. (MEMORY RX) 0: Memory TX 1: ADF TX 0: Off 1: On-Transmit header at top of each page. session and page number. receiving time.

8.0 Apr.48 Bit No. Soft Switch Set SOFT SWITCH: #48 FK-506 Adjustment / Setting Initial Setting Bit Activity report 0: No 1: Yes 0: No 1: Yes 0: No 1: Yes 0: No 1: Yes 0: No 1: Yes 0: No 1: Yes If machine receives Error Mail (I-FAX). the mail will be deleted on POP3 server. 95 . the mail will be kept on POP3 server.6. the mail is deleted or kept? 1 HEX Designation Function 8 7 Reservation report 0 8 0 6 TX result report 5 RX result report 0 4 TX/ RX error report Error report for I-FAX and network scanner 1 3 0 9 0 2 Error mail (I-FAX) 0: Delete 1: Keep 1 Broadcast report 0: Not to print 1: Print 1 • Bit 4: During communication have error in TX or RX and Bit 4 was set.Field Service Ver. the machine printed error report. 1. • Bit 2: If resetting (delete). If setting (keep). 2007 8.

1. SOFT SWITCH: #50 Initial Setting Bit Transmit or cancel after time out in “Memory TX” 1: Transmission It is possible to register E-mail address in Relay box registration Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0: Disable 1: Enable Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0: Cancel and print out 0 HEX Designation Function 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 • Bit 8: Can select cancel this job and print out report or start to send in case of time when memory full condition occurs • Bit 7: If F-NIC was install.49 FK-506 Bit No. of rings Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 No. If Bit was set. 8 7 6 Field Service Ver. Soft Switch Set 8.50 Adjustment / Setting Bit No. 96 . of rings No. 2007 SOFT SWITCH: #49 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Print RX mailbox report method Redial method if communication fail Reserved Reserved 0: Based on RX RESULT REPORT setting 1: Always printing 0: Redial again 1: Based on redial time interval No.6. this bit was usable in Relay box.0 Apr.8. of rings Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 1 0 0 0 0 9 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 1 10 1 0 0 1 3 0 0 1 0 11 1 0 1 0 4 0 0 1 1 12 1 0 1 1 5 0 1 0 0 13 1 1 0 0 6 0 1 0 1 14 1 1 0 1 7 0 1 1 0 15 1 1 1 0 8 0 1 1 1 16 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 8. any E-mail address could be registered in Relay box. If Bit was reset. any E-mail address could not be registered in Relay box.6.

Not to tion print Bit 4 Bit 3 0 0 8.Field Service Ver.30 monitor report selection Descrip. 2007 8. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SOFT SWITCH: #52 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 8. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SOFT SWITCH: #53 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 97 .6.53 Bit No.51 Bit No.0 Apr. 8 7 6 5 4 T.52 Bit No. Soft Switch Set SOFT SWITCH: #51 FK-506 Adjustment / Setting Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Print report for each transaction 0 1 Print report while reporting error 1 0 Not used 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 3 2 1 Send “un-sent page 0: From error page mode” for memory trans1:From start page mission Reserved Reserved 8. 1.6.6.

2006 2006 0 1 1 0 1 2006.54 FK-506 Bit No.8 is “1”. 19. 1. 11.55 Bit No.6. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SOFT SWITCH: #55 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 98 . Soft Switch Set 8. 11. NOV.8 is “0”. 19) 1: Alpha numeric format (example: 2006. Date Bit 7 Bit 6 2 5 4 3 2 1 Memory near full capacity for scanning Reserved Reserved Reserved Description Bit 5 Bit 4 Reserved Reserved Reserved 256 KB 512 KB 1024 KB 1536 KB 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Adjustment / Setting 8. 11.8. Field Service Ver. NOV.6. 19 0 0 19. 2006 0 1 11.0 Apr. 19 0 0 19. NOV. 2007 SOFT SWITCH: #54 Initial Setting Bit Report/ LCD date/time type 0: Digits format (example: 2006. Date Bit 7 Bit 6 2006. 19) When bit No. 19. NOV. 2006 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 8 1 0 HEX Designation Function 8 7 6 Report/ LCD date format When bit No.

Soft Switch Set SOFT SWITCH: #56 FK-506 Adjustment / Setting Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 8.56 Bit No. 1. 2007 8. 99 .6.58 Bit No.6.Field Service Ver. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SOFT SWITCH: #57 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 8.0 Apr. SOFT SWITCH: #58 Initial Setting Bit Time out from PSK to FSK delay time Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0: 6 sec 1: 30 sec Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 • Bit 8: This is the delay time for PSK signal after sending MCF or PPR command. The timer depends on regulations of each country. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8.57 Bit No.6.

6. 1. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Field Service Ver.8.59 FK-506 Bit No. 2007 SOFT SWITCH: #59 Part 1 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Time between Greenwich mean time + T mean time +00:00 +00:30 +01:00 +01:30 Bit 6 0 0 0 0 Bit 5 0 0 0 0 Bit 4 0 0 0 0 Bit 3 0 0 0 0 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 0 1 Time between mean time Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Time between mean time Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Time between mean time Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Time between mean time Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Greenwich mean time + T +02:00 +02:30 +03:00 +03:30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Greenwich mean time + T +04:00 +04:30 +05:00 +05:30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Greenwich mean time + T +06:00 +06:30 +07:00 +07:30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Greenwich mean time + T +08:00 +08:30 +09:00 +09:30 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function Adjustment / Setting Time between GMT GMT: Greenwich mean time 1 0 0 100 . Soft Switch Set 8.0 Apr.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 8.0 Apr.6.Field Service Ver. 1. Soft Switch Set SOFT SWITCH: #59 Part 2 FK-506 Adjustment / Setting Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Time between mean time Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Time between mean time Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Time between mean time Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Time between mean time Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Greenwich mean time + T +10:00 +10:30 +11:00 +11:30 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Greenwich mean time + T +12:00 -00:30 -01:00 -01:30 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Greenwich mean time + T -02:00 -02:30 -03:00 -03:30 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Greenwich mean time + T -04:00 -04:30 -05:00 -05:30 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX 0 Designation Function Time between GMT GMT: Greenwich mean time 1 101 .60 Bit No. 2007 8.

61 FK-506 Bit No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Field Service Ver. in one hour increments.com Available ranges are: 12 to -12.0 Apr. 2007 SOFT SWITCH: #59 Part 3 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Time between mean time Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Time between mean time Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Time between mean time Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Time between mean time Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Greenwich mean time + T -06:00 -06:30 -07:00 -07:30 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Greenwich mean time + T -08:00 -08:30 -09:00 -09:30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Greenwich mean time + T -10:00 -10:30 -11:00 -11:30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Greenwich mean time + T -12:00 Reserved 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX 0 Designation Function Time between GMT GMT: Greenwich mean time Adjustment / Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 • Bit 1-6: This value must be entered correctly.8.6. A good reference web site may be found at http://greenwichmeantime. Soft Switch Set 8. 1. The default setting is zero. or E-mail headers will be wrong. 102 .

62 Bit No. machine will print out the incoming page even if password is not correct. 8 7 8. machine will indicate A3 printing capability in DIS command if machine have Ledger Paper. but the Zoom ratio is not perform. A4 A4→A5) Quick memory TX B4/ A3 declaration for Ledger The width of TX Ledger (8k) Print mailbox RX image even if password is not correct Off hook alarm after communication Display destination selection within TX Phase C Reserved 0: Enable 1: Disable 0: Ineffective 1: Effective 0: A3 size 1: B4 size 0: A3 size 1: B4 size 0: No 1: Yes 0: Alarm 1: No alarm after communication 0: Local Name or telephone number 1: Display and report Remote telephone number 1 0 1 0 1 6 1 0 HEX Designation Function 6 5 0 4 0 3 2 1 • Bit 5: If set to 0. Therefore transmission is started after reducing the width of the image. Soft Switch Set SOFT SWITCH: #60 FK-506 Adjustment / Setting Initial Setting Bit Reserved Fax data divide printer (A3→A4. when the transmission is performed at the same zoom ratio.Field Service Ver. If set to 1. • Bit 3: If bit 3 is set to “1”. However. the width of Ledger as handle as B4. 103 . an image will be lost. 1.0 Apr. B4→B5. the width of Ledger as handle as A3 size. • Bit 4: If set to 0. 2007 8.6.

63 FK-506 Bit No. Soft Switch Set 8. of rings Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 1 0 0 0 0 9 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 1 0 4 0 0 1 1 5 0 1 0 0 6 0 1 0 1 7 0 1 1 0 8 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 HEX Designation Function F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 8. 2007 SOFT SWITCH: #61 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SOFT SWITCH: #62 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function Adjustment / Setting 104 .0 Apr. of rings Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Max.6. of rings No. No.8. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Field Service Ver.64 Bit No.6. 1.

is dialed.66 Bit No. Machine does not print a RX error report if no Fax signal from the other party is detected. the pre-fix number is used automatically to access PSTN line when the TEL No. 1. 8 7 6 SOFT SWITCH: #64 Initial Setting Bit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 0 HEX Designation Function Print RX error report on 0: No RX side if no FAX signal 1: Yes is detected 10 PPS & 20 PPS selectable by user Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0: No 1: Yes Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 • Bit 6: If this bit set to “1”. the first page image will not append at the bottom of error report or OK report. 8.6. Soft Switch Set SOFT SWITCH: #63 FK-506 Adjustment / Setting Initial Setting Bit # key definition in PBX mode Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved FAX Tx image adjust Tx Result report with image 0: default is internal 1: default is external Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0: Normal 1: Special handle 0: Yes 1: No 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 HEX Designation Function 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 • Bit 8: If this bit set to “1”. • Bit 1: If this bit set to “1”.Field Service Ver. 105 . 8. 2007 8.0 Apr. • Bit 5: Prevents user to change PPS if this bit set to “0”. If this bit set to 0. the # key is used to access PSTN line instead of the pre-fix number which is dialed in front of the TEL No.6.65 Bit No.

the receiving party generates the retransmit request with erroneous frame numbers. Fax Protocols Field Service Ver. • By G3 ECM.9.1 • G3 ECM is the error correction system newly recommended by Consultative Committee of International Telephone & Telegraph of 1988. 1. Partial page (High-speed Modem Signal) Adjustment / Setting Partial page end and End procedure 300 dps Modem Signal Re-transmit request (MCF is repeated if there is no error) Re-transmission for error (High-speed modem Signal) Re-transmission Partial page end 300 dps Modem Signal Message check (Received without error) 4507M501AA 106 . Here is an example where frame 1 and frame 3 are subjected to error: Transmission Receiving Error Note: If one page end and consists of plural number of partial pages. 2007 9. PPS.0 Apr. NULL signal is transmitted from the transmission side. documents are divided into blocks (called partial page) for transmission. If any error takes place in any frame (one partial page consists of 256 frames) on a partial page. FK-506 Fax Protocols G3 ECM (G3 Error Correction Mode) 9.

Field Service Ver. 2007 9. This machine (Transmission) G3 machine (Receiving) [START] Button press [START] Button press Drawing: Line Control 107 Adjustment / Setting G3 machine (Transmission) This machine (Receiving) .0 Apr. Fax Protocols 9. 1.2.2 9.1 Line Control FK-506 Phase R side start Phase R side start 4507M502AA Procedure of G3 mode communication • Basic communications diagram of G3 mode.

Calling Station Identification. 1.100 Hz. End of Message.9. End of Procedure. Disconnect. Procedure Interrupt-End of Procedure (EOP). Digital Identification Signal. 2007 9. Command Repeat.3 FK-506 Table of Reference Code Function Confirmation to Receive. Code CFR CIG CRP CSI DCN DCS DIS DTC EOM EOP FTT MCF MPS NCS NCF NSS PIN PIP PRI-EOM Adjustment / Setting PRI-MPS PRI-EOP RTN RTP TSI 108 . Procedural Interrupt Negative. 1. Fax Protocols Field Service Ver. Digital Transmit Command. Non-Standard Facilities Set-up. 1.0 Apr. Message Confirmation.850 Hz. Called Subscriber Identification.650 Hz 3 sec. Procedural Interrupt Positive. Retrain Positive. 1. Non-Standard Facilities Command.850 Hz or 1. Procedure Interrupt-Multi page Signal (MPS). Failure to Train. Transmitting Station Identification. Retrain Negative. Non-Standard Facilities.650 Hz or 1. Digital Transmit Command. Multi-Page Signal. Procedure Interrupt-End of Message (COM).

Bit No.15= 1 R8 x 7.19= 0.11= 1.02 TIME 15:00 PAGE 008 DURATION 00:00’11” MODE ECM-12 RESULT OK DATA • DCS or DIS • HEX Data as printed on page. Means address • FIF (Facsimile Information Field) HEX Data Bit Bit No. FIF (Facsimile Information Field) FCF (Facsimile Control Field) = 83: DCS. 80: DIS Means Last Control Field.0 Apr.23’04 12:20 SESSION 0001 FUNCTION TX NO 01 DESTINATION STATION ABC 22345678901234567890 TX RX FF 13 83 00 46 88 00. Bit No. 2007 9. 1.17 Communication PROTOCOL MONITOR REPORT NAME: ABC TEL:886 3 4733507 DATE: APR. 1 0 0 4 6 8 8 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 19 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 ↑ Note ↑↑ ↑↑ Bit No.7 Lines/mm (Fine Mode) Bit No..20=1 Unlimited Paper Length • Hex-Binary Conversion List Hex 0 1 2 3 0 0 0 0 Binary 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Hex 4 5 6 7 0 0 0 0 Binary 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Hex 8 9 A B 1 1 1 1 Binary 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Hex C D E F 1 1 1 1 Binary 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 109 Adjustment / Setting .12=0 7200 bps Bit No.4 How to Analyze the T30 Protocol Monitor FK-506 DATE DEC..Field Service Ver. • Example: V. Fax Protocols 9.

400 bit/s.7 lines/mm and/or 200 × 200 pels/25.29 0 1 0 0 Not used 0 1 0 1 Not used 0 1 1 0 Reserved 0 1 1 1 Reserved 1 0 0 0 Not used 1 0 0 1 Not used 1 0 1 0 Reserved Rec. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Designation DIS/ DTC DCS “0”= Invalid “1”= Store-and-forward switching Internet fax simple mode Set to “0” “0”= Invalid “1”= Real-time Internet fax Set to “0” Set to “0” “0”= Invalid “1”= V. V. 2007 DIS (DTC)/ DCS Bit Allocation Table of FIF (Facsimile Information Field) FK-506 Bit No.17 1 1 0 0 Not used 1 1 0 1 Not used 1 1 1 0 Reserved 1 1 1 1 Reserved Bit No. Data signalling rate 14 13 12 11 V. V.27 ter and 0 0 1 1 V. V.27ter 7200 bit/s. 1 0 0 0 rec.29 0 1 0 0 Invalid 0 1 0 1 Reserved 0 1 1 0 Invalid 0 1 1 1 Reserved 14. V. 1. V. V. V. 0 0 1 0 rec.600 bit/s. 0 0 0 0 rec. Fax Protocols Field Service Ver.27ter 9600 bit/s.17 12.000 bit/s. V.17 9.17 7. V. Data signalling rate 14 13 12 11 2400 bit/s.8 capabilities Flame size Set to “0” “0”= Invalid “1”= Ready to transmit a facsimile document (polling) “0”= Invalid “1”= Receiver fax operation Data signalling rate Bit No. 1 0 1 0 rec. V.200 bit/s.27 ter Rec.29 4800 bit/s.17 1 1 0 0 Reserved 1 1 0 1 Reserved 1 1 1 0 Reserved 1 1 1 1 Reserved Set to “0” “0” = 256 octets preferred “1”= 64 octets preferred Invalid Invalid Adjustment / Setting 14 15 16 “0”= Invalid “1”= R8 × 7.27 ter.4 mm “0”= Invalid “1”= Two-dimensional coding capability “0”= Invalid “1”= Two-dimensional coding 110 .0 Apr. 1 0 0 1 rec. 1 0 1 1 V33 and V. V. 1 0 1 1 rec. V.27 ter fall-back 0 0 0 0 mode 0 0 0 1 Rec. 0 0 0 1 rec. 0 0 1 1 rec.9. V.29 0 0 1 0 Rec.29.

85 40 ms at 3.7 = T 3. 23 22 21 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 Minimum scan line time 20 ms 5 ms 10 ms 40 ms 0 ms FK-506 .85 0 ms at 3.0 Apr.7 = T 3. Fax Protocols Designation Recording width capabilities Bit No.85 1/mm: T 7.6 coding capability Extend field “0”= Without “1”= With “0”= Invalid “1”= T.7 = 1/2 T 3.7 = T 3. Recording length capability 20 19 0 0 A4 (297 mm) A4 (297 mm) and 0 1 B4 (364 mm) 1 0 Unlimited 1 1 Invalid Bit No.85 1/mm: T 7.6 coding enabled Frame size 0: 256 octets Frame size 1: 64 octets 111 Adjustment / Setting Bit No.85 40 ms 40 ms at 3. 23 22 21 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 Minimum scan line time capability at the receive 20 ms at 3. 17 9.85 20 ms 5 ms at 3.85 “0”= Without “1”= With 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Extension field Reserved “0”= Invalid “1”= Un-compressed mode “0”= Invalid “1”= ECM Set to “0” Set to “0” Set to “0” “0”= Invalid “1”= T.85 1/mm: T 7.7 = 1/2 T 3.85 10 ms 20 ms at 3. 18 17 0 0 DIS/ DTC Bit No. 18 17 0 0 1 1 0 DCS Data signalling rate Data signalling rate 0 18 1 1 19 Recording length capability Scan line length 215 mm ± 1% Scan line length 215 mm ± 1% 1 and scan line length 255 mm ± 1% Scan line length 215 mm ± 1% and scan line length 0 255 mm ± 1% and scan line length 303 mm ± 1% 1 Invalid Scan line length 215 mm ± 1% Scan line length 1 215 mm ± 1% Scan line length 0 303 mm ± 1% 1 Invalid 20 Bit No.85 10 ms at 3. 2007 Bit No.85 10 ms at 3.7 = T 3.85 1/mm: T 7.85 1/mm: T 7.Field Service Ver. 1.85 1/mm: T 7. 20 19 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 Recording length capability A4 (297 mm) B4 (364 mm) Unlimited Invalid 21 22 23 Bit No.7 = 1/2 T 3.85 1/mm: T 7.7 = T 3.85 1/mm: T 7.

2007 Designation “0”= Invalid “1”= Field not valid capability DIS/ DTC DCS FK-506 33 34 “0”= Invalid “1”= Multiple selective polling capability “0”= Invalid “1”= Polling subaddress transmission (DTC) by Polled SubAddress (DIS)/PSA “0”= Invalid “1”= T.9.4 mm “0”= Invalid “1”= Inch based resolution preferred “0”= Invalid “1”= Metric based resolution preferred Minimum scan line time capability for higher resolutions.4 = 1/2 T 7.4 = T 7.4 mm “0”= Invalid “1”= R16 x 15. “0”: T 15.7 Resolution type selection “0”= metric based resolution “1”= inch based resolution Do not care Do not care 44 Adjustment / Setting 45 46 47 “0”= Invalid Set to “0” “1”= Selective polling (DIS)/ Selective polling transmission (DTC) Extend field 0: Without 1: With “0”= Invalid “1”= Sub Addressing transmission “0”= Invalid “1”= Sender Identification transmission Set to “0” 48 49 “0”= Invalid “1”= Sub Addressing capability “0”= Invalid “1”= Password/ Sender Identification capability (DIS)/ Password transmission (DTC) “0”= Invalid “1”= Ready to transmit a data file (polling) Set to “0” “0”= Invalid “1”= Binary File Transfer (BFT) “0”= Invalid “1”= Document Transfer Mode (DTM) “0”= Invalid “1”= EDIFACT Transfer (EDI) 50 51 52 53 54 55 112 .43 coding “0”= Invalid “1”= Plane interleave Set to “0” Set to “0” Extend field “0”= Without “1”= With Set to “0” Set to “0” 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 “0”= Invalid “1”= R8 x 15. Field Service Ver.7 “1”: T 15. 1.4 lines/mm “0”= Invalid “1”= 300 x 300 pels/25.0 Apr. Fax Protocols Bit No.4 lines/mm and/or 400 x 400 pels/25.

9 mm × 279.4 mm) “0”= Invalid “1”= North American Legal (215. Fax Protocols Designation Extend field 0: Without 1: With DIS/ DTC DCS “0”= Invalid “1”= Basic Transfer Mode (BTM) Set to “0” “0”= Invalid “1”= Ready to transmit a character or mixed mode document (polling) “0”= Invalid “1”= Character mode Set to “0” “0”= Invalid “1”= Mixed mode Set to “0” Extend field “0”= Without “1”= With Set to “0” 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 “0”= Invalid “1”= Processable mode 26 “0”= Invalid “1”= Digital network capability Duplex and half duplex capabilities “0”= Invalid “1”= JPEG coding “0”= Invalid “1”= Full color mode Set to “0” “0”= Invalid “1”= 12 bit/pixel/element Extend field “0”= Without “1”= With “0”= Invalid “1”= Preferred Huffmann tables “0”= Half duplex operation only “1”= Duplex and half duplex operation “0”= Half duplex operation only “1”= Duplex operation 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 “0”= Invalid “1”= No sampling (1:1:1) “0”= Invalid “1”= Nonstandard radiation light “0”= Invalid “1”= Nonstandard is mute range “0”= Invalid “1”= North American Letter (215.9 mm × 355.9 mm × 279.Field Service Ver.6 mm) capacity “0”= Invalid “1”= Single layer sequential encoding. 1.9 mm × 355. 2007 Bit No.0 Apr.4 mm) capacity “0”= Invalid “1”= North American Legal (215. 56 57 58 59 9. basic capacity “0”= Invalid “1”= North American Letter (215.6 mm) “0”= Invalid “1”= Single layer sequential encoding. basic 76 77 78 113 Adjustment / Setting FK-506 .

44 (Mixed raster content) mode “0”= Invalid “1”= Alternative hashing system number 2 selection “0”= Invalid “1”= Alternative hashing system number 3 selection 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 “0”= Invalid “1”= Page length maximum strip size for T. 1. Field Service Ver.85 lines/mm and/or 100 pixels x 100 pixels / 25.9. optional L0 capacity Extend field “0”= Without “1”= With “0”= Invalid “1”= HKM key management selection “0”= Invalid “1”= RSA key management selection “0”= Invalid “1”= Override mode function “0”= Invalid “1”= HFX40 code selection “0”= Invalid “1”= Alternative code number 2 selection “0”= Invalid “1”= Alternative code number 3 selection “0”= Invalid “1”= HFX40-1 hashing selection 81 “0”= Invalid “1”= HKM key management capacity “0”= Invalid “1”= RSA key management capacity “0”= Invalid “1”= Override mode capacity “0”= Invalid “1”= HFX40 code capacity “0”= Invalid “1”= Alternative code number 2 capacity “0”= Invalid “1”= Alternative code number 3 capacity “0”= Invalid “1”= HFX40-1 hashing capacity Extend field “0”= Without “1”= With 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 Adjustment / Setting 89 “0”= Invalid “1”= Alternative hashing system number 2 capacity “0”= Invalid “1”= Alternative hashing system number 3 capacity Reserved “0”= Invalid “1”= T. Fax Protocols Bit No.4 mm for color/mono-color multi-value “0”= Invalid “1”= Single phase C BFT negotiation capacity 98 99 114 .44 (Mixed raster content) mode “0”= Invalid “1”= T.44 (Mixed raster content) mode “0”= Invalid “1”= T. 2007 Designation DIS/ DTC DCS FK-506 79 80 “0”= Invalid “1”= Single layer sequential encoding.44 (Mixed raster content) Extend field “0”= Without “1”= With “0”= Invalid “1”= Color/mono-color multi-value 300 pixels x 300 pixels or 400 pixels x 400 pixels / 25.0 Apr.4 mm “0”= Invalid “1”= R4 x 3.

Field Service Ver. Fax Protocols Designation DIS/ DTC DCS 100 Set to “0” 101 Set to “0” 102 Set to “0” 103 Set to “0” 104 Extend field “0”= Without “1”= With 115 Adjustment / Setting FK-506 . 9. 1.0 Apr. 2007 Bit No.

1.9.0 Apr. 2007 FK-506 Adjustment / Setting Blank Page 116 . Fax Protocols Field Service Ver.

4. The transmission error after “Phase-C” performs redial only one time. transmission is retried. Communication is discontinued by an error occurring at the destination station. Transmission is canceled when an error occurs again. ADF Error on trouble. This machine (Transmission) [START] Button press 10. Five possible causes of errors are: 1.1 Communication Error 10. 1. In other case.2 Error occurring during transmission FK-506 G3 machine (Receiving) Phase R side start 4980S512AA 10. transmission is canceled without retry. 10.1.Field Service Ver.1. 3.1.1 Outline • Error caused by a problem of communication functioning. transmission is canceled without redial. Fax Error • The transmission error before “Phase-B” performs redial according to the redial interval of each country and the number of times. Communication is discontinued by a protocol error.3 Error occurring during reception • Reception is canceled. 2007 10. (can change in Soft SW) When an error occurs by ADF TX. 2. Communication is discontinued by a machine error. 117 Troubleshooting . • When communication is discontinued due to item 3 or 4.0 Apr. Fax Error Troubleshooting 10. 5. Communication is discontinued by a machine trouble.

PPS_Q.TX and RX machines have different “company ID (FAX machine maker ID)” code in RSD. Received DCN signal after sending CFR signal.The Customer machine has updated the firmware now. or RTP. Received incorrect signal at phase D (not EOP.. . Rep. . etc. receiving side can't receive correct data within specified time (no ECM).10. EOM. . updated remote machine firmware by RSD . Detect busy tone within receiving phase B.2 Error Code FK-506 10. Remote side Password does not match in polling RX/our side no file to be polled. after sending CFR in data phase C. Can not receive any signal within 35 sec. Received DCN signal at phase D within pages (not last page). Rep. updated remote machine firmware by RSD RSD connect failure due to user incorrect operation or machine error.1 seconds.The Service Tech.2. Did not receive carrier signal within 6 sec. DCS PPS_Q. 2007 10. 0023 0024 Troubleshooting 0025 0026 0027 0029 002A 0030 0031 0032 0033 0039 118 .The Service Tech. Can not receive carrier signal within 6 sec. in manual polling mode.Received “Remote monitoring password” error in RSD. . In non-ECM mode. after sending FTT command. No energy on line over 6 sec.The Customer machine has updated the firmware now. Can not detect energy within 6 sec. 1. within phase C before any corrected ECM frame.after sending MCF.The Customer machine has updated the firmware now. Fax Error Field Service Ver.1 Code 0001 0003 0004 0006 0009 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 001A 001D 0020 0021 0022 Reception Possible Causes of Error.The Service Tech.). RTN signal.0 Apr. Line polarity change within receiving phase B to D.at phase D. MPS. No G3 signal received within 35 sec.The Service Tech. updated remote machine firmware by RSD . . . updated remote machine firmware by RSD.The Customer machine has updated the firmware now. Mailbox password not programmed or matched for mailbox receiving. Can not receive T. when machine already received the data but next line data doesn’t receive within 13. File full Owing to noise interference on the line. Received DCN after sending DTC signal.30 signal after sending FTT signal. Can not correct frame within 6 sec. Line Problem Did not receive any signal within 6 sec. Detect flag but noting after CER. Can not receive any response from remote side after sending type of xxx_EOM signal. or in non-ECM mode.Remote monitor level error. Remote side can’t access in RSD. Rep. Received DCN signal after sending DTC signal in polling RX. . . . Can not receive any correct response after sending three DTC signals. Receive DCN signal after sending FTT signal. . in manual receive mode. one decoding line over 6 sec. Rep.TX and RX machines both have different “machine ID (FAX model ID)” code in RSD. Received DIS after sending DIS signal.

34. Command hand shake fail when V. Did not detect silence after sending JM signal for polling TX function. Did not receive carrier signal within 6 sec.34. Did not detect image signal within 6 seconds after modem enter to phase A in V. User presses stop key during receiving. Can not detect correct FSK signal even though detected FSK tone within 6 sec. Receive incorrect signal when sending RNR response with ERR signal. Did not detect phase E signal after primary channel within 6 seconds. Did not receive T. Modem disconnect in phase D after our side sending out flag sequence in control channel. after sending CTR. EOR_PRI_Q. Did not detect image signal within 6 seconds after sending CFR. Did not detect any control channel signal in phase D within 60 seconds even though energy still on the line.8 phase.34. Did not receive carrier signal /FSK signal within 6 sec. 10.8. Did not receive correct signal after sending RNR signal. Modem disconnect after phase D in V. after sending PPR. 119 Troubleshooting Detect busy tone within control channel after phase C.34.8 signal within 35 seconds. Did not receive any correct signal after sending RNR response with ERR signal. Did not receive correct signal after sending PIP/PIN signal within 13 sec. Relay box is not registered even when Relay job has been received. Did not receive any correct signal after sending CJ signal in V. 1. Did not receive any flag sequence in control channel within 6 seconds in phase D.34. Remote side disconnected after sending ANSam in V. Did not receive correct signal after receiving PPS_PRI_Q or PRI_Q. Receive incorrect signal after sending DIS signal in V.21 or V. Received incorrect signal at phase D in ECM mode. Line energy over threshold lasts for 60 seconds after MCF and can not detect FSK or carrier signal in ECM mode. Modem disconnect after sending CFR in V. after sending MCF in ECM mode. Modem can not detect any correct ECM frame within 3 minutes in phase C.30 signal or carrier signal after sending CFR in V. in Phase C.34. Did not receive phase D signal after phase C within 20 seconds in V.34.8 phase. Remote side disconnected after phase D in V.34. Memory full during receiving. Did not detect any control channel signal within 60 seconds after detect silence in phase D.34 RX. Did not detect control channel signal after received RCP frame within 6 seconds.34. Receive DCN signal after sending DIS in V. There are no bulletin files to be polled in V.Field Service Ver. 2007 Code 003F 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044 0045 0046 0047 0048 0049 004A 004B 004C 004E 004F 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 005A 005B 005C 005D 005E 005F 0060 0061 0062 0063 0064 0065 0066 0070 0071 Possible Causes of Error. Did not receive carrier signal within 6 sec. Modem can not detect any connect ECM frame with 12 sec. Fax Error Remote side TSI not programmed in machine one touch or speed dial directory.0 Apr. Did not receive phase C signal after phase B within 20 seconds in V. Machine can not detect V. FK-506 . Did not receive correct signal after sending ERR signal.

Received DTC signal in transmission phase. DIS. Modem not ready to receive V. may be run out of paper or other reason.10. Did not detect phase E signal after phase D within 30 seconds. Did not detect phase C signal after phase B within 25 seconds.34 data during 6 seconds after receiving CFR signal.8 procedure or detect V. Sending out DCS+TCF signal 3 times consecutively but no signal in response from receiver. Troubleshooting 009F 00A0 00A1 00AE 00AF 00B0 00B1 00B2 00B3 00B4 00B5 00B6 00B7 120 . Remote side disconnected during transmitting phase. Training attempt has failed because speed unit cannot adjust to low lower speed. Remote side no mailbox function or not compatible. Remote side not enough memory for relay initiate. Did not detect correct phase B signal within 25 second after CM/JM signal exchange. Detect DCN signal in phase B. Received DCN signal after sending out DCS signal.34. Wrong ID number when Polling RX or Mail Box TX.34 modem enters phase B state in V. Document JAM during transmission. Did not receive any command after our side retry three DCS signal in V. Receiver's protocol of DIS is received.21 signal after ANSam signal within 35 seconds. Fax Error 10.0 Apr. Did not finish V.2 FK-506 Code 0080 0081 0082 0083 0084 0085 0086 0087 0088 0089 008A 008B 008C 008D 008E 008F 0090 0091 0092 0093 0094 0095 0099 009A 009C 009D Field Service Ver. but remote side can't receive document temporary.21 signal after CM signal within 30 seconds. Did not detect phase D signal within 25 seconds after CM/JM exchange. User stops or cancels transmission job. Detected response signal other than DTC. Did not finish V. Remote side disconnect after primary channel. specified by ITU-T in phase B. Did not detect any signal after sending CI signal. Remote side CSI number not defined in machine one touch or speed dial directory. Time out during transmission of ECM frame or RCP command. and DCN in phase B. Did not detect any G3 signal within 35 sec. but it is not compatible with our machine.34. 2007 Transmission Possible Causes of Error.21 or JM signal after sending CM signal.2.8 procedure or detect V. Did not detect phase B signal after our side sending CJ signal within 30 seconds. Did not receive any response from other side after sending PPS_EOM signal.34 polling RX. Received DCN signal after sending out DCS signal for V. 1. Transmitting unit sending DCS 3 times consecutively. Did not detect correct V. DCN or CFR after sending DCS.34 TX. Called side document not ready for our polling. Received DCN after sending DTC in V. but each time receiver responds with DIS/DTC. Remote side hang up before V. but did not receive any signal within 35 seconds. Modem can not enter into control channel after TX side sends out RCP signal for V. Transmitting unit receives a signal other than DIS or DTC. Detected FSK signal. Remote side not enough memory for relay initiate. FTT. Receiver's protocol of DIS is received.34 polling RX.

34. Received T.34. Can not detect correct V. Receive DCN after send command PPS-EOP signal. PIP. 121 Troubleshooting FK-506 . Received DCN after sending PPS_NULL signal. Received DCN after sending PPS_EOM signal. MCF. (not PPR.8 CM signal. PIP. Remote side not the same model or no mailbox ID defined for mailbox TX. At phase-D.34 polling. Remote side no document to be polled after V8 handshaking. 1. ECM TX received wrong command in phase D after PPS-EOP.DIS or DTC. After sending MPS signal. PIP. transmitting unit sends out EOM 3 times consecutively. Did not detect phase D signal within 30 seconds or remote side hang up over 6 seconds.Field Service Ver. Received incorrect response after sending PPS_NULL..). Remote side no SUB capability in V. the received signal is DCN signal. transmitting unit sends out EOP 3 times consecutively. DCN.DCS. transmitting unit sends out EOM. PIN. Received DCN signal after sending MPS signal. but receives no answer..34. RTN. the received signal is not one of MCF. Received incorrect signal after sending DTC signal for V. transmitting unit sends out PPS_MPS 3 times consecutively but no answer. At phase-D.34. Did not detect correct phase C signal after detecting silence after phase B.. Every time our side received DIS signal after sending DTC in V. Did not receive any response in RR response procedure after sending PPS_MPS. After sending EOP signal. At phase-D. RTP. Remote side disconnect before entering primary channel in V. PIN. the received signal is not one of MCF. PIP. but no answer from receiving unit. After sending EOP signal. Did not receive any T. Received incorrect response after sending PPS_MPS.30 signal in phase D other than DCS.. 10. At phase-D.34. Modem not ready within 10 second after entering primary channel in V. DCN. sending MPS 3 times consecutively. Fax Error Receive T. PIN.34. Received DCN after sending PPS_MPS. DCN. but receives DCN.34. PIN. Did not receive correct signal after our side sent DTC signal in V. Remote side disconnect after our side sent DCS signal in V.. RTN. transmitting unit sends out PPS_NULL 3 times consecutively but receives no answer. the received signal is not one of MCF. RTN.21 or JM signal after detected FSK frequency. At phase-D. Capability not match after V8 handshaking.30 signal other than DIS. 2007 Code 00B8 00B9 00BA 00BB 00BC 00BD 00BE 00BF 00C0 00C1 00C2 00C4 00C5 00C9 00CA 00CB 00CC 00CD 00CE 00CF 00D0 00D1 00D2 00D3 00D4 00D8 00D9 00DA 00DB 00DC 00DD 00DE 00E0 00E1 00E2 00E4 00E5 00E6 00E7 Possible Causes of Error. Did not receive any response in RR response procedure after sending PPS_NULL. Did not detect correct phase C signal for polling within 25 seconds. PRI-EOP. Received ERR signal after sending EOR_NULL.30 signal within 15 seconds in phase D. but receives no answer from receiving unit. At phase-D.CFR after sending DCS signal in V.0 Apr. RTP. After sending EOM signal. Remote side disconnect after sending out V.

0 Apr. transmitting unit sends out EOR_EOP 3 times consecutively but no answer. Did not receive any response in RR response procedure after sent out PPS_EOM. Received incorrect response after sending EOR_NULL. Did not receive any response after sending CTC. At phase-D.10. transmitting unit sends out EOR_MPS 3 times consecutively but no answer. transmitting unit sends out PPS_EOM 3 times consecutively but no answer. At phase-D. Did not receive any response in RR response procedure after sending PPS_EOP. Received ERR signal after sending EOR_EOM. Fax Error Code 00E8 Field Service Ver. Received incorrect response after sending PPS_EOM. FK-506 00E9 00EA 00EB 00EC 00ED 00EE 00EF 00F0 00F1 00F2 00F3 00F4 00F5 00F6 00F7 00F8 00F9 00FA 00FB 00FC 00FD 00FE 00FF Troubleshooting 122 . At phase-D. At phase-D. transmitting unit sends out EOR_NULL 3 times consecutively but no answer. Receive PIN signal after sent last page three times. After Received ERR. our side can not receive response after sending EOR_EOP command. transmitting unit sends out EOR_EOM 3 times consecutively but no answer. 2007 Possible Causes of Error. 1. At phase-D. Did not receive any response in RR response procedure after sending EOR_EOM. Received incorrect response after sending EOR_EOP. Can't speed down to lower speed in ECM mode. Received incorrect response after sending EOR_EOM. Received incorrect response after sending EOR_MPS. Memory full for transmission. Did not receive any response in RR response procedure after sending EOR_MPS. transmitting unit sends out PPS_EOP 3 times consecutively but no answer. Redial all fail. Received ERR signal after sending EOR_MPS. At phase-D. Did not receive any response procedure after sending EOR_NULL.

SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE 2007.04 Ver.0 . 1.

• When a page revised in Ver. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised. 3. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted. show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page. — Revision mark Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision . 3.0 deleted. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.0: The revision marks for Ver.0 only are shown with those for Ver. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.Revision history After publication of this service manual. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. • To indicate clearly a section revised.0 Service manual Ver.0 has been changed in Ver. 2. 2. the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore. 3.0 are left as they are. • When a page revised in Ver. show 1 to the left of the revised section.0: The revision marks for Ver. 2. 2007/04 Date 1.

...................... 22 Service mode function setting procedure .............. 12 Front cover/rear cover/original feed tray rear cover.........................................................................................................3 i Maintenance Cleaning of miscellaneous rolls .........1 3................................................................3..6 2........................................1 How to use the adjustment section ...............3.... 1 2.....................................................................1...............................................5 2.................6 3...............................3....1 2....................................................... 22 6......................... 2007 DF-605/MK-501 General 1.............7 Cleaning of miscellaneous rollers .... 16 Variable resistor ........................5 3.... Firmware upgrade ....1 3...................... 10 Cleaning of the reflective sensor section .....3.......... Product specifications ............................... 22 Exiting .... 19 Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts).......1 3.......................................................2 3...................3......................... 8 Cleaning of the scanning guide........... 22 Procedure ...................2 3................3 2.................... 6.........2 2........3...0 Apr.............. 1..................3........................... 22 Changing the setting value in service mode functions................ 18 Replacing the replace stamp 2 .................................................. 12 ADF (DF-605) ........................................................................................................................ 12 Disassembly/Assembly procedure................1.......3 3..1.......................................................... 11 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ....................... 2................................. 7 2.......................1.......2 6....................................................................................................... 3.2..................................7 4............................................ 13 Main control board ......................................... 5 Replacing the separation roller ................................. 13 Mount kit (MK-501) ... feed roller and separation roller ...... 21 Service Mode ........................................ 10 3.................................................................................Field Service Ver.............................1.............1....................1 6..............3 Other .......... 11 Disassembly/Assembly parts list.......... 16 Complete stamp unit 2 .................. 8 General Maintenance DF-605/MK-501 CONTENTS ............................................................... 6 Cleaning of the pick-up roller...........1 Periodical check ....... 5 Replacing the pick-up roller and feed roller..............................1...... 20 Adjustment/Setting 5..................................................................1................. 5 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ..................1..........4 3..................................................................................................4 2......1. 6............................................................ 12 3......

.....................1 Malfunction code............................................... 29 Leading edge skew adjustment ....................................Field Service Ver................... 8.................................................................................. 7...........................................................3 8.................... 2007 6..... 23 FUNCTION .....................................................2. 31 Sensor layout......................................... 33 Misfeed at paper exit section ...... 31 Solution .............................. 32 Misfeed at transport section.............. 1.............3 6............................................................................................3.........................1 6............................0 Apr......... 23 ADJUST............ 34 8.............................2...... 33 Misfeed at turnover section.....2 DF-605/MK-501 Service Mode function tree..............1 Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting ii ..1 8...........3 7...2 Jam display ....................................................................... 31 Initial check items .................................... 29 General Troubleshooting 8.........................................................2......................................... 22 Setting in the Service mode ............................................ 35 C0044: ADF cooling fan motor failure..................................................3...........2.................4 8............................. 27 CLEAR DATA ......................................... 35 Solution ................................................................................................................................3................ 35 9................................................................1 8........1................................................................. 31 Misfeed at paper take-up section............2.......1 Mechanical adjustment .....................................................2 Maintenance 8....................................2 6............................................... 28 6................................................................ 9...5 9...............

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007

1. Product specifications

1.
Name

Product specifications
Reverse automatic document feeder Paper feed Paper feed from top of stack Switch back system Straight exit system

A. Type

Type

Turnover Paper exit

Document alignment Document loading

Center Left image side up

B. Functions
Modes 1-sided mode / 2-sided mode

C. Paper
1-Sided mode 35 to 128 g/m2 (9.25 to 34 lb) 2-Sided mode 50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lb) 1-Sided / 2-Sided Mode 50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lb) 1-Sided mode 35 to 128 g/m2 (9.25 to 34 lb) 2-Sided mode 50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lb)

Standard mode Plain paper Mixed original detection mode Plain paper FAX mode Plain paper

Type of document

Detectable document size*1 Capacity

Metric area B6S to A3 Inch area 5 1/2 × 8 1/2S / 5 1/2 × 8 1/2 to 11 × 17 80 sheets (80 g/m2) or load height of 11 mm or less.

*1: For the combined original detection mode, refer to the mixed original detection enabled size combination table.

1

General

Installation

Screw cramp to the main unit

DF-605/MK-501

General

1. Product specifications D. Paper feed prohibited originals • If fed, trouble occurrence will be highly possible.
Type of original Original that is stapled or clipped. Book original Original weighing less than 35g/m2 or 129g/m2 or more Torn original

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007

DF-605/MK-501

Possible trouble Feed failure, damage to the original, or drive failure due to clip clogging Feed failure, damage to the original, or drive failure Feed failure Feed failure, damaged sheet Original misfeed due to dog-ear or skew Feed failure Feed failure Feed failure Damaged sheet Patched part folded or torn sheet, Sheets misfed

General

Highly curled original (15 mm or more) OHP transparencies Label Sheet Offset master Sheets clipped or notched Sheets patched

E. Paper feed not guaranteed originals • If fed, paper feed will be possible to some extent but trouble occurrence will be possible.
Type of original Sheets lightly curled (Curled amount: 10 - 15 mm) Heat sensitive paper Coated paper (Ink Jet paper) Translucent paper Paper immediately after paper exit from the main unit Possible trouble Dog-eared, exit failure Edge folded, exit failure, transport failure Take-up failure, transport failure Take-up failure, transport failure Take-up failure, transport failure

Paper with many punched holes (e.g., loose leaf) limited Multi-page feed due to flashes from holes to vertical feeding Sheets with 2 to 4 holes Sheets two-folded or Z-folded Sheets with rough surface (e.g., letterhead) Sheets folded Transport failure Transport failure, image deformation Take-up failure Image deformation, multi-page feed, take-up failure

2

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007 F. Mixed original feed chart For Metric
Max. original size Mixed original size 297 mm A3 A4 B4 B5 A4S A5 B5S A5S B6S 297 mm A3 OK OK OK OK OK* NG NG NG NG A4 OK OK OK OK OK* NG NG NG NG 257 mm B4 OK OK OK OK OK* NG NG B5 OK OK OK OK OK* NG NG

1. Product specifications

210 mm A4S OK OK OK NG NG A5 OK OK OK NG NG

182 mm 148 mm B5S OK OK NG A5S -

257 mm

210 mm 182 mm 148 mm 128 mm

OK OK

For Inch
Max. original size Mixed original size 11 11 x 17 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 14 8.5 x 11S 8.5 x 5.5 8.5 x 5.5S 11 x 17 OK OK OK* OK* NG NG 11 8.5 x 11 OK OK OK* OK* NG NG 8.5 x 14 OK OK OK NG 8.5 8.5 x 11S OK OK OK NG 5.5 x 8.5 OK OK OK NG 5.5 8.5 x 5.5S OK

8.5

5.5

OK NG *

Mixed original feed available (Tilted with in 1.5% or less) NO. mixed original feed Can not set original Tilted with in 2% or less is 80%

G. Machine specifications
DC 24 V (supplied from the main unit) Power Requirements DC 5 V (generated within the Automatic Document Feeder) DC 3.3 V (supplied from the main unit) Max. Power Consumption Dimensions Weight 48 W or less 582 (W) x 558 (D) x 145 (H) mm 23 inch (W) x 20.5 inch (D) x 5.75 inch (H) 10 kg (22 lb) or less

H. Operating • Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit. NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice.

3

General

-

DF-605/MK-501

1. Product specifications

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007

General

DF-605/MK-501

Blank Page

4

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007

2. Periodical check

2.
2.1

Periodical check
Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts)

NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol. 2.1.1 Replacing the pick-up roller and feed roller

A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Pick-up roller: Every 200,000 prints • Feed roller: Every 200,000 prints 1. Open the upper door [1].

4344F2C500DA

2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the cover [2].
[2]

[1]
4344F2C501DA

[2]

3. Remove two C-clips [1], and remove the pick-up roller assy [2].

[1]
4344F2C502DA

5

Maintenance

[1]

DF-605/MK-501

Maintenance

2. Periodical check
[5] [2] [5] [4]

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove two levers [1]. Remove five C-rings [2]. Remove the arm [3]. Remove the belt [4]. Remove two pick-up rollers [5].

DF-605/MK-501

[1] [2] [3]
4344F2C503DA

[1] [2] [3] Maintenance [4]

9. Remove the C-ring [1], and remove the gear [2] and the bushing [3]. 10. Remove two pins [4]. 11. Remove the feed roller [5]. NOTE • Use care not to lose the pin.
4344F2C504DA

[5]

12. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 2.1.2 Replacing the separation roller

A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Separation roller: Every 200,000 prints 1. Open the upper door [1].

[1]

4344F2C500DA

[1]

2. Hold the [1] sections in the figure, and remove the cover [2].

[2] [1]

4344F2C505DA

6

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007

2. Periodical check 3. Remove the separation roller assy [1]. NOTE • Use care not to lose the spring at the bottom side of the separation roller assy.

[1]

4344F2C506DA

4. While opening up the holder [1], remove the shaft [2]. NOTE • Opening the holder too much can break the holder.
[1] [2]
4344F2C507DA

[1]

4344F2C508DA

6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 2.1.3 Cleaning of the pick-up roller, feed roller and separation roller

A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Pick-up roller: Every 50,000 prints • Feed roller: Every 50,000 prints 1. Open the upper door [1].

[1]

4344F2C500DA

2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the pick-up roller [1], feed roller [2] and separation roller [3].
[2] [3] [1]
4344F2C509DA

7

Maintenance

5. Remove the separation roller [1] from the shaft.

DF-605/MK-501

2. Periodical check 2.1.4
DF-605/MK-501

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007

Cleaning of miscellaneous rolls

A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Miscellaneous rolls: Every 50,000 prints
[2]

1. Open the upper door [1]. 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the roll [2].

4344F2C510DA

[1]

3. Lift up the original feed tray [1]. 4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the roll [2].

Maintenance

[2]

4344F2C511DA

[1] [1]

5. Open the duplexing document feeder. 6. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the roll [1].

[1]
4344F2C512DA

2.1.5

Cleaning of miscellaneous rollers

A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Miscellaneous rollers: Every 50,000 prints 1. Open the upper door [1]. 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the roller [2].
[2] [1]

4344F2C519DA

8

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007
[1]

2. Periodical check 3. Lift up the original feed tray [1]. 4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the roller [2].

4344F2C520DA

[1]

5. Remove the front cover and rear cover. See P.12 6. Disconnect eight connectors [1] on the board.

[1]

4344F2C521DA

7. Remove the lever [1].
[1]

4344F2C530DA

[1]

[1]

8. Remove eight screws [1], and remove the paper feed unit [2].

[2]

[1]
4344F2C531DB

9

Maintenance

[1]

DF-605/MK-501

[2]

2. Periodical check

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007 9. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the roller [1].
[1]

DF-605/MK-501

[1]

4344F2C532DA

2.1.6

Cleaning of the scanning guide

A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Scanning guide: Every 50,000 prints 1. Open the duplexing document feeder. 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the scanning guide [1] clean of dirt.

[1]

Maintenance

4344F2C533DA

2.1.7

Cleaning of the reflective sensor section

A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Reflective sensor section: Every 50,000 prints
[1]

1. Clean the sensor [1] using a brush or other similar tools.

4344F2C518DA

10

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. 2007

3. Other

3.1

Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items

A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied • Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming loose. • As a general rule, screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not be removed or loosened. B. Red-painted screws • Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also be noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint. C. Variable Resistors on Board NOTE • Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting. D. Removal of PWBs Caution • When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures. • The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. • When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board, be sure to ground your body.

11

Maintenance

DF-605/MK-501

3.

Other

Remove two screws [1]. 6.0 Apr. Remove four screws [8]. and remove the stopper [7]. Lift up the original feed tray. and remove the original feed tray rear cover [9]. 5.2 DF-605/MK-501 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) Disassembly/Assembly parts list Section Front cover Exterior parts Rear cover Original feed tray rear cover Unit ADF (DF-605) Mount kit (MK-501) Main control board Variable resistor Complete stamp unit 2 Replace stamp 2 Part name Ref. 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Board and etc.16 P.1 [6] [8] [1] 4344F2C513DA 1.Page P. 1.13 P.13 P. Remove the screw [5] and the washer [6].2.16 P. Lift up the original feed tray.3 Maintenance Disassembly/Assembly procedure Front cover/rear cover/original feed tray rear cover [3] [4] [5] [2] [7] [9] 3. 4. 2007 3. and remove the rear cover [4]. 12 .19 3.12 P.12 P. 2. 3.18 P.1 No. Remove two screws [3].12 P. Other Field Service Ver. Others 3.3.3. and remove the front cover [2].

Remove two screws [1] and remove the ADF [2]. Remove nine screws [1] and then remove the rear cover [2] of the main body. 2007 3. Other 1. Remove the ADF. See P. [1] 4344F2C540DA 13 DF-605/MK-501 . [2] Maintenance [1] 4344F2C539DA 3. Disconnect the connector [1].0 Apr.3. 1.2 ADF (DF-605) 3. [1] 4344F2C538DA 2.3.13 [2] [1] 2.3 Mount kit (MK-501) 1. NOTE • Make sure that the screws illustrated right with arrows have washers when installing.Field Service Ver.

3. 2007 3. Remove three screws [1] and remove the rear left cover [2]. Remove four screws [1] and remove the rear upper cover [2].0 Apr. 1. Remove four screws [1] and remove the rear left hinge mounting bracket [2]. [1] 4344F2C543DA 14 . NOTE • Make sure to hold the angle detecting lever [3] with fingers at the time of removing or installing. Maintenance [2] [1] 4344F2C542DA [2] 5. Other Field Service Ver. DF-605/MK-501 [3] [1] [2] 4344F2C541DA [1] 4.

1.Field Service Ver. Disconnect three connectors [1]. the screw of the grounding wire [2] and the wire saddle [3]. Other 6.0 Apr. [2] 4344F2C544DA 7. Remove four screws [1] and remove the rear right hinge mounting bracket [2]. [3] [2] [1] 4344F2C545DA [1] [2] 8. 2007 3. [1] 4344F2C546DA 15 Maintenance DF-605/MK-501 [1] . Remove two screws [1] and remove the rear right cover [2].

[3] 4344F2C524DA 16 . Remove the nut [1] and the washer [2].3.5 [2] Maintenance Variable resistor [1] [3] [2] 4344F2C522DA A. Remove the rear cover. and then remove the main control board [2]. Disconnect the connector [1].28 6. 2007 Main control board [1] [1] 1.3.4 DF-605/MK-501 Field Service Ver. Removal procedure 1. 5.27 7. 4. Other 3.12 3. Remove the original feed tray rear cover. See P. 4. 8.12 3. [1] 4344F2C523DA [1] [2] 6. Upgrade the firmware.0 Apr. Disconnect all the connectors on the board. See P. Turn OFF the main power switch and turn it ON again and check whether size detection operates normally. Remove two screws [2] and the mounting bracket [3]. 2. Turn OFF the main power switch. 2. Remove the gear [1]. See P. and remove the variable resistor [3]. See P. Turn OFF the main power switch. 5. Remove three screws [1]. Initialize the backup data. Perform document width detection adjustment. [2] 4344F2C514DA NOTE • Be sure to perform the following operation when the main control board is replaced. See P.20 3.3. 1.

NOTE • Note the mounting position of the gear and the variable resistor. Reinstall the gear [1]. Use the nut [1] and the washer [2] to install the variable resistor [3]. Install the original feed tray rear cover and turn ON the main power switch. NOTE • Install the gear and rack gear by aligning the arrows. NOTE • Align the protrusion of the variable resistor and the cutout of the mounting bracket.Field Service Ver. 6. Reinstallation procedure 1. 4344F2C528DA [2] [1] [2] [3] 5. See P. 2007 [1] 3. DF-605/MK-501 . Connect the connector [1].16 2. 1. 4344F2C529DA 7. NOTE • Be sure to perform document width detection adjustment after replacing the variable resistor (PBA-VR). Close the side edge stop [1] of the original feed tray.0 Apr. Turn the variable resistor [1] counterclockwise until it stops. NOTE • Be sure to perform the following operation when the variable resistor is replaced. Other B. 4344F2C525DA [1] [2] [3] 4344F2C526DA [1] 4344F2C527DA [1] 4. Use two screws [2] to install the variable resistor [3]. 17 Maintenance 3.

Initialize the backup data.6 Complete stamp unit 2 1.3.28 9.0 Apr. 2007 DF-605/MK-501 8. 1. [2] [1] 4344F2C534DA Maintenance [1] [2] 3. Open the upper door [1]. Open the processing guide [2]. Other Field Service Ver.3. Turn OFF the main power switch and turn it ON again and check whether size detection operates normally. Remove the screw [1] and disconnect the connector [2]. 2. See P. Remove the screw [1] and the cover [2].27 10. [2] [3] 4344F2C536DA 18 . 4344F2C535DA [1] 4. See P. and remove the complete stamp unit 2 [3]. Perform document width detection adjustment. 3.

Field Service Ver.3.0 Apr. 2007 3. Reinstall the new replace stamp 2 [1]. Remove the stamp. 5.7 Replacing the replace stamp 2 3. Close the processing guide. 1. 4. 6. NOTE • Align the protrusion [2] of the stamp to the crevice [3] of the holder. Close the upper door. 2. Open the processing guide [2]. Other [2] [1] 1. DF-605/MK-501 . Open the upper door [1]. 4344F2C534DA [2] [1] [3] 4344F2C537DA 19 Maintenance 3.

4344F2C515DA [1] [1] 4344F2C516DA 6. 10. Reinstall the rear cover. 7. Updating: Green and red light up alternately. After the firmware has been upgraded successfully. 12.]. Failure: Blinks in red. Check the firmware update status at the print lamp display section [1] of the duplexing document feeder. Correct the version indication on the ROM label on the main control board using a pen or other similar means. See P. Display [SERVICE MODE]. 2.4. Prepare the firmware upgrade EEPROM. Insert the prepared EEPROM [2] to the IC socket section [1] of the main control board. NOTE • Ensure that the EEPROM is installed in the correct direction. Successful completion: Blinks in green. 20 . 3.0 Apr. 11. Touch the [DISPLAY] and check the [ADF F/W VER. Maintenance [1] 4344F2C517DA 4040F2C750DA 8. 1. 9. Remove the rear cover.12 [2] 4. Turn OFF the main power switch. 2007 DF-605/MK-501 4. Firmware upgrade 1. • If failure occurs. redo the procedure from step 4. Turn ON the main power switch. 5. turn OFF the main power switch and remove the EEPROM [1] that was attached at step 4. Turn ON the main power switch. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver.

4. 5.. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. The power supply is properly grounded. or related part is dirty. 7. 6. slit glass. 10. 3. 6. 9. 3. The units. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. and supplies used for printing (developer.Check to see if: 1. 8.g. 1. parts. Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. PC Drum. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot. 21 Adjustment / Setting DF-605/MK-501 Adjustment/Setting . 2007 5. The Original Glass. Correct paper is being used for printing. etc. B. direct sunlight.. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Advance Checks • Before attempting to solve the customer problem. Toner is not running out.0 Apr. 2. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e. use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit. How to use the adjustment section 5. elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise).) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures.Field Service Ver. How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine. etc. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. levelness of the installation site. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. A. 4. ventilation. 5. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON. the following advance checks must be made. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature. The density is properly selected. high humidity. 2.

1.24 P. (Max) ADF WIDTH Ad. 2007 DF-605/MK-501 6.2 • Press the Reset key. Press the following keys in this order. Procedure Press the Utility key.26 P.2 Adjustment / Setting Service Mode function tree NOTE • This setting menu contains only the cases in which the DF-605 is mounted. Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1 The service mode menu screen will appear.26 P. 1.1. Validate the selection by pressing the OK key.1 1. 2. 6.6. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 6.28 P. 2. Changing the setting value in service mode functions ▼ ▲ Select the desired item using ▲ / ▼ key. LOOP 2 FUNCTION ADF FEED TEST COPY ADF GLASS ADF WIDTH Ad. Select the setting value using [▲ / ▼ / / ] key or the 10-key pad. 6. (Min) ADF SENSOR ADJUST CLEAR DATA ADF BACKUP CLEAR Ref. 6. 3. To go back to previous screen.27 P.28 P. Exiting 6.0 Apr. press the Back key.3 1. 3.27 P.1.25 P. 4.27 P. LOOP 1 ADF REG.28 22 . page P.1 Service Mode Service mode function setting procedure NOTE • Care must be used to ensure that only the personnel who are involved in service jobs know the procedure to enter the service mode.23 P.27 P. Service Mode ADJUST ADF SUB ZOOM ADF MAIN REGIST ADF SUB REGIST 1 ADF SUB REGIST 2 ADF REG. 4.

Measure the length of reference line A on the copy to determine if the deviation falls within the specified range. 2007 6. perform the following steps to make an adjustment. 4. If length A on the copy is shorter than the specifications. Select [ADF SUB ZOOM] and press the OK key.1 Setting in the Service mode ADJUST DF-605/MK-501 A.3 6. Press the OK key to validate the setting value selected in step 5. Service Mode 6. decrease the setting value. Make another full-size copy of the test chart to determine the amount of error in length A on the copy.0 Apr. • Adjust so that deviation between length A on the test chart and that on the copy falls within the specified range. 23 Adjustment / Setting . • The default setting is 100. • Press the OK key to start a test copy cycle.3.Field Service Ver. repeat steps 3 through 7. If a single adjustment procedure does not successfully bring the deviation into the specified range. 2. Enter [ADJUST] of the Service mode. If it falls outside the specified range. select the appropriate setting value. increase the setting value.4%) • Ready the test chart that comes with the automatic document feeder. Specifications: 400 ± 6. 5. ADF SUB ZOOM Functions Use TEST COPY ADJUST • To adjust variations in machining and installation accuracy of different parts by varying the scanning zoom ratio in the sub scanning direction when the automatic document feeder is used.0 mm Setting/ procedure Adjustment procedure A 4344F3C527DA 1. 7. Adjustment Instructions If length A on the copy is longer than the specifications. 1. Make a full-size copy of the test chart. 6. • Setting range: 87 to 113 (1 step: 0. 3. Using ▲ / ▼ key.

decrease the setting value. 3. Press the OK key to validate the setting value selected in step 5. Enter [ADJUST] of the Service mode. Specifications: 20 ± 2. • Setting range: 20 to 180 (1 step: 0.0 Apr. Using ▲ / ▼ key. Adjustment Instructions If width B on the copy is longer than the specifications. measure the distance between reference line B on the copy and the top edge of the copy (width B) and determine if the amount of error in width B falls within the specified range. 6. 4. ADF MAIN REGIST DF-605/MK-501 Functions Use TEST COPY Field Service Ver. 2007 ADJUST • To adjust variations in machining and installation accuracy of different parts by varying the scanning start position in the main scanning direction when the automatic document feeder is used.6. If it falls outside the specified range. If width B on the copy is shorter than the specifications. 5. • Adjust so that the amount of error of width B on the copy falls within the specified range. 7. increase the setting value. If a single adjustment procedure does not successfully bring the amount of error into the specified range. perform the following steps to make an adjustment. 2.1 mm) • Ready the test chart that comes with the optional automatic document feeder. Make another full-size copy of the test chart to check for the amount of error in width B on the copy. Service Mode B. 1. repeat steps 3 through 7. select the appropriate setting value. Adjustment / Setting 24 . Make a full-size copy of the test chart. • Press the OK key to start a test copy cycle. Select [ADF MAIN REGIST] and press the OK key. Using a scale.0 mm Setting/ procedure Adjustment procedure B 4344F3C528DA 1.

If a single adjustment procedure does not successfully bring the amount of error into the specified range. ADF SUB RESIST1 Functions Use TEST COPY ADJUST 6. Service Mode • To adjust variations in machining and installation accuracy of different parts by varying the scanning start position in the sub scanning direction when the automatic document feeder is used. Adjustment Instructions If length C on the copy is longer than the specifications. If length C on the copy is shorter than the specifications. 1. 2. 3. measure the distance between reference line C on the copy and the leading edge of the copy (length C) and determine if the amount of error in length C falls within the specified range.0 Apr. select the appropriate setting value. Make another full-size copy of the test chart to check for the amount of error in length C on the copy. Using a scale. decrease the setting value. C Setting range: 50 to 150 (1 step: 0. 2007 C. increase the setting value. Press the OK key to validate the setting value selected in step 5. Using ▲ / ▼ key. Select [ADF SUB REGIST1] and press the OK key. Setting/ procedure Adjustment procedure • Press the OK key to start a test copy cycle.Field Service Ver. 7. 6. • Adjust so that the amount of error of length C on the copy falls within the specified range. If it falls outside the specified range. (1-sided) NOTE • This adjustment should be made after the [ADF SUB ZOOM] adjustment. repeat steps 3 through 7. Make a full-size copy of the test chart. Enter [ADJUST] of the Service mode. perform the following steps to make an adjustment.1 mm) • Ready the test chart that comes with the optional automatic document feeder.5 mm 4344F3C529DA 1. • Specifications: 20 ± 2. 25 Adjustment / Setting DF-605/MK-501 . 5. 4.

Make another 2-sided original/2-sided copy of the test chart to check for the amount of error in length C on the copy. • Adjust so that the amount of error of length C on the copy falls within the specified range. Select [ADF REG. C Setting range: 50 to 150 (1 step: 0. perform the following steps to make an adjustment. Enter [ADJUST] of the Service mode. 3. Adjustment Instructions If length C on the copy is longer than the specifications. Using ▲ / ▼ key. If a single adjustment procedure does not successfully bring the amount of error into the specified range. select the appropriate setting value. Select [ADF SUB REGIST2] and press the OK key. Press the OK key to validate the setting value selected in step 3.0 mm) 1. If it falls outside the specified range. 4.0 Apr. • Specifications: 20 ± 3.0 mm 4344F3C529DA 1. Press the OK key to validate the setting value selected in step 5. 2007 ADJUST • To adjust variations in machining and installation accuracy of different parts by varying the scanning start position in the sub scanning direction when the automatic document feeder is used. Make a full size copy using the 2-sided original/2-sided copy mode. Adjustment Instructions • Try a different setting value until there is no skew. LOOP1] and press the OK key. 7. or misfeed of the original. measure the distance between reference line C on the copy and the leading edge of the copy (length C) and determine if the amount of error in length C falls within the specified range. Using ▲ / ▼ key. If length C on the copy is shorter than the specifications. Enter [ADJUST] of the Service mode. 3. 5. ADF SUB RESIST2 DF-605/MK-501 Functions Use TEST COPY Field Service Ver. 4. repeat steps 3 through 7. (2-sided) NOTE • This adjustment should be made after the [ADF SUB ZOOM] adjustment. Service Mode D.) 2. 1.1 mm) • Ready the test chart that comes with the optional automatic document feeder. select the desired setting value. 6. 2. fold. Setting/ procedure Adjustment procedure • Press the OK key to start a test copy cycle. or misfeed of the original occurs • The default setting is 100. 26 . Using a scale. (Face down the test chart. fold. increase the setting value. (1-sided) • When a skew feed. Adjustment / Setting E. LOOP1 Functions Use Setting/ procedure Adjustment procedure • To adjust the length of loop formed in the original before the registration roller. decrease the setting value.6. • Setting range: 95 to 105 (1 step: 1. ADF REG.

C. or misfeed of the original. ADF REG. 3. ADF FEED TEST Functions • To check for correct paper passage of the paper take-up and transport system in the automatic (duplexing) document feeder alone as a single unit. 2. 5. Use Setting/ procedure B. fold. Display the Service mode. COPY ADF GLASS Functions Use • To check for scratches and dirt on the original scanning glass. • Paper passage operation continues until all pages of the document loaded in the unit have been fed in. (Max)] from [FUNCTION]. Press the OK key to validate the setting value selected in step 3. 4. (Max) Functions Use Adjustment procedure • To adjust the original size detection VR. Using ▲ / ▼ key. 2. 2. 6. Select [COPY ADF GLASS]. Select [1-SIDED] or [2-SIDED] and press the OK key to start the ADF feed test. Adjustment Instructions • Try a different setting value until there is no skew. Enter [FUNCTION] of the Service mode. select the desired setting value. 4344F3C530DA 27 Adjustment / Setting DF-605/MK-501 . procedure 2. 3. • When a paper misfeed of originals occurs 1. Service Mode • To adjust the length of loop formed in the original before the registration roller. Select [ADF FEED TEST] and press the OK key. Enter [ADJUST] of the Service mode. ADF WIDTH Ad.Field Service Ver. Power cycle and check whether size detection operates normally. • Setting range: 95 to 105 (1 step: 1.0 mm) 1. • When a dirty image occurs Adjustment/ 1. LOOP2 Functions Use Setting/ procedure Adjustment procedure 6. 3. Press the OK key to determine the maximum value. Select [ADF REG. (2-sided) • When a skew feed. 4. 4. fold. 2007 F.0 Apr. Enter [FUNCTION] of the Service mode. • When PBA-VR board is replaced 1. • The Scanner does not make any scan motion. 3. 1. or misfeed of the original occurs • The default setting is 100. • Press the Stop key to stop the ADF feed test. The copier produces two copy samples (in order to know dirt on the glass from printer image noise). • Here are the details of operation involved in the paper passage motion. Choose [ADF WIDTH Ad. Press the Start key to start the COPY ADF GLASS AREA test.2 FUNCTION A. LOOP2] and press the OK key. Align the original edge plane of the side edge stop of the original feed tray to the outside ▼ mark.3.

2007 4344F3C531DA 1. • When PBA-VR board is replaced Field Service Ver. Choose [ADF SENSOR ADJUST] from [FUNCTION]. Display the Service mode. procedure 2. 4. ADF SENSOR ADJUST Functions Use • To automatically adjust the detection level of original path sensor.3 CLEAR DATA A. Power cycle and check whether size detection operates normally. 3. (Min)] from [FUNCTION]. [ADF WIDTH Ad. Align the original edge plane of the side edge stop of the original feed tray to the outside ▼ mark. 28 .0 Apr.6. Service Mode D. 1. 5. 6. adjust the [ADF WIDTH Ad. 3. 2. (Min) DF-605/MK-501 Functions Use Adjustment procedure • To adjust the original size detection VR. procedure 2. The operation stops automatically. • When each sensor is replaced • When original size detection error occurs Adjustment/ 1. Press the OK key. width detect. 3. • When PBA-VR board has been replaced. After clear the Backup data. Adjustment/ 1. • When PBA-CONT board has been replaced. ADF BACKUP CLEAR Adjustment / Setting Functions Use • To clear the values adjusted with [ADF SENSOR ADJUST] and the values adjusted with Org. E. Display the Service mode. (MAX)]. Choose [ADF WIDTH Ad. (Min)] and [ADF SENSOR ADJUST]. Press the OK key to clear settings memorized in PBA-CONT. Press the OK key to determine the maximum value. ADF WIDTH Ad.3.

Mechanical adjustment 7. 4344F3C501DA 2.0 Apr. Loosen the decorative screw [1] and the nut [2] in the back to the right. If there is a deviation as shown on the figure. 2007 7.1 Leading edge skew adjustment [1] 1. perform the following adjustment procedure. 4344F3C503DA 29 Adjustment / Setting [2] DF-605/MK-501 7. Fold each of the sample copies as illustrated and check for any deviation. 1. Load the test chart [1] in the reverse automatic document feeder and make one 1-sided copy five consecutive times. Specifications: 0 ± 3. Mechanical adjustment . [1] 4344F3C502DA 5. 4.0 mm 3. turn the screw counterclockwise to adjust it. If the deviation does not fall within the specified range.Field Service Ver.

7.7. 2007 6. If there is a deviation as shown on the figure. 1. DF-605/MK-501 4344F3C504DA Adjustment / Setting 30 . tighten the decorative screw and the nut which has been loosened in step 4.0 Apr. turn the screw clockwise to adjust it. After the adjustment procedure has been completed. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver.

deformed.1 Solution Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs. 2007 8. Action Is a foreign object present along the paper path. 31 Troubleshooting DF-605/MK-501 Troubleshooting .0 Apr. or is Clean the paper path and replace if necessary. or worn? Are the edge guide and trailing edge stop at the correct position to accommodate the paper? Are the actuators operating correctly? Clean or replace the defective roll/roller. or damp? Replace paper. Jam display 8. Replace paper. Correct or replace the defective actuator. 1.2 8.2.1 Jam display Sensor layout [1] [2] [3] [4] 4344F4C500DA [1] Original detection sensor [2] Registration sensor PC8-ADF PC9-ADF [3] Separator sensor [4] Exit/turnover sensor PC6-ADF PC10-ADF 8. wavy. Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures. Set as necessary. the paper path deformed or worn? Are rolls/rollers dirty. first perform the following initial check items.Field Service Ver. Check item Does paper meet product specifications? Is the paper curled. 8.

The registration sensor (PC9-ADF) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the original detection sensor (PC8-ADF) is blocked by the paper. Detection of paper left in paper take-up section B. 2007 Misfeed at paper take-up section A. The separator sensor (PC6-ADF) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the original detection sensor (PC8-ADF) is blocked by the paper. The registration sensor (PC9-ADF) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper feed motor (M1-ADF) is energized.2 DF-605/MK-501 Field Service Ver. Detection timing Type Detection of misfeed at paper take-up section Description The separator sensor (PC6-ADF) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper feed motor (M1-ADF) is energized.2.0 Apr.8. Jam display 8. Action Relevant electrical parts Paper feed motor (M1-ADF) Separator sensor (PC6-ADF) Registration sensor (PC9-ADF) Original detection sensor (PC8-ADF) Main control board (PBA-CONT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Action Initial check items PC6-ADF I/O check PC9-ADF I/O check PC8-ADF I/O check M1-ADF operation check Change PBA-CONT Control signal PBA-CONT CN5CONT-11 PBA-CONT CN6CONT-3 PBA-CONT CN6CONT-6 PBA-CONT CN7CONT-3 to 6 Location (Electrical component) DF-605 G-5 DF-605 G-3 DF-605 G-3 DF-605 C-6 - Troubleshooting 32 . 1.

B. Detection timing Type Detection of misfeed at turnover section Description The registration sensor (PC9-ADF) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the transport motor (M2-ADF) is energized. Jam display A.2. Action Relevant electrical parts Transport motor (M2-ADF) Registration sensor (PC9-ADF) Main control board (PBA-CONT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 4 Action Initial check items PC9-ADF I/O check M2-ADF operation check Change PBA-CONT Control signal PBA-CONT CN6CONT-3 PBA-CONT CN8CONT-3 to 6 Location (Electrical component) DF-605 G-3 DF-605 C-6 - 33 Troubleshooting DF-605/MK-501 . Action Relevant electrical parts Paper feed motor (M1-ADF) Transport motor (M2-ADF) Registration sensor (PC9-ADF) Original detection sensor (PC8-ADF) Main control board (PBA-CONT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Action Initial check items PC9-ADF I/O check PC8-ADF I/O check M1-ADF operation check M2-ADF operation check Change PBA-CONT Control signal PBA-CONT CN6CONT-3 PBA-CONT CN6CONT-6 PBA-CONT CN7CONT-3 to 6 PBA-CONT CN8CONT-3 to 6 Location (Electrical component) DF-605 G-3 DF-605 G-3 DF-605 C-6 DF-605 C-6 - 8. B.4 Misfeed at turnover section A. 1. The original detection sensor (PC8-ADF) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the registration sensor (PC9-ADF) is unblocked by the paper.0 Apr. Detection timing Type Detection of misfeed at transport section Detection of paper left in transport section Description The original detection sensor (PC8-ADF) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the registration sensor (PC9-ADF) is blocked by the paper.Field Service Ver. 2007 8.2.3 Misfeed at transport section 8.

Detection timing Type Detection of misfeed at paper exit section Detection of paper left in paper exit section Description The exit/turnover sensor (PC10-ADF) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the original detection sensor (PC8-ADF) is blocked by the paper. 1. Jam display 8. Action Relevant electrical parts Transport motor (M2-ADF) Original detection sensor (PC8-ADF) Exit/turnover sensor (PC10-ADF) Main control board (PBA-CONT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Initial check items PC8-ADF I/O check PC10-ADF I/O check M2-ADF operation check Change PBA-CONT Control signal PBA-CONT CN6CONT-6 PBA-CONT CN6CONT-9 PBA-CONT CN8CONT-3 to 6 Location (Electrical component) DF-605 G-3 DF-605 G-4 DF-605 C-6 - Troubleshooting 34 . 2007 Misfeed at paper exit section A.2.5 DF-605/MK-501 Field Service Ver. B.0 Apr. The exit/turnover sensor (PC10-ADF) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the original detection sensor (PC8-ADF) is unblocked by the paper.8.

2007 9.1 9. M3-ADF operation check Change PBA-CONT Control Signal Location (Electrical component) DF-605 C-6 - 1 2 3 PBA-CONT CN9CONT-2 - 35 Troubleshooting DF-605/MK-501 9. 1. B. Detection timing Trouble code C0044 Description • The Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while ADF cooling fan motor is rotating.Field Service Ver.0 Apr. Malfunction code 9.1. Malfunction code .1 Solution C0044: ADF cooling fan motor failure A. Action Relevant electrical parts Cooling fan motor (M3-ADF) Main control board (PBA-CONT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M3-ADF connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.

Malfunction code Field Service Ver.0 Apr.9. 2007 DF-605/MK-501 Blank Page Troubleshooting 36 . 1.

04 Ver.0 . 1.SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE 2007.

0 has not been changed in Ver. 2007/04 Date 1. 3. show 1 to the left of the revised section. Therefore. 2. 2. 2. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. 2. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.0 has been changed in Ver. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.0 are left as they are. 3. • When a page revised in Ver. Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised. • To indicate clearly a section revised. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required. show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.0 only are shown with those for Ver.Revision history After publication of this service manual. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. • When a page revised in Ver. 3. — Revision mark Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision . the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance.0 deleted.0: The revision marks for Ver.0: The revision marks for Ver.0 Service manual Ver.

...................1...........................................4 3..................................................2 3............ 5 Cleaning of the registration rollers/rolls.................. 18 5.......................3................................................5 3..........................1...2 2....................................................... 5........................................................................6 Adjustment/Setting 4..........................Field Service Ver................................................................ 18 Service mode setting procedure............... 14 Document feeding tray cover .. 8 General Maintenance ..................................... 12 Document feed section cover....... 18 Exiting ............................................1 3........................................................................ 2007 CONTENTS DF-502 General 1.................2 5..........................1...........1.................................1.................................3...........................................................................................................................................................1............................................1...... 17 Service Mode .......... 11 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts).....................2 5... 18 Setting in the service mode ............................... 18 Procedure .....................3...............................................................................................................0 Apr.1 How to use the adjustment section ............................ 3 Pick-up roller/feed roller ..................................................... 3 Separation roller................................................1..................3...........1 i Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting 3.................... 5.................3...........4 2..............6 Cleaning of the transport rolls ................................3 Other ......................................................................................................... 10 3........ 14 Rear cover................................ 1.. 9 Cleaning of length size sensor 2 ............... 1 DF-502 2.................................. 7 2......1 3........1 Periodical check ............... 12 3.....................................................................................3 Service Mode function tree.....................................................2 3................................1 2.............3 5... 19 5................................................ 19 ADJUST ......................... Product specification ...........................................................................................3.....................................5 2....... 3 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ...... 3..................1 5.............................. 18 Changing the setting value in service mode functions..............................1..................3 2.............................................................................. 12 ADF ......1 Maintenance Cleaning of the exit rollers/rolls ..... 11 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items .................. 15 DF control board . 16 Disassembly/Assembly parts list....... 14 Document feeding tray ................................2........................ 2.......3 3........... 12 Disassembly/Assembly procedure.........3...................

.......................................2 7........................................0 Apr....1 General Jam Display................... DF-502 FUNCTION ..............................................................................3...................................................3...........................1................................. 27 Misfeed display ....................................................................................................1 7...........................2 6............Field Service Ver.................................................................3 Maintenance 7............ 28 Initial Check Items ..................................................................... 24 6................... 23 ADF Leading Edge Skew Adjustment ...........4 Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting ii ................................................... 2007 5..................... 27 Display resetting procedure ........................................3....... 27 Solution ................................. 28 Misfeed at the document feed section ........................................................2 7...2 Troubleshooting 7......................................................3 7........................................................... 27 Sensor layout. 30 7.................. 22 Mechanical adjustment .1 6........................... 23 ADF Height Adjustment........................1 7...... 7.3.................................................. 1...... 29 Misfeed at the document exit section...3.......................... 28 Misfeed at the document transport section.....

Operating environment • Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit.3 kg E. Type Name Installation Modes Document loading Automatic document feeder Inserted in top portion of the copier Standard = 1-sided original Mixed original = 1-sided original Left-hand side. NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice. 1. B5S. LetterS. Letter. Machine specifications Document alignment Capacity Power requirements Power consumption Dimensions Mass Center 50 sheets max. DC5 V (supplied from the copier) 36 W or less 598 mm (W) x 483 mm (D) x 102 mm (H) 6. Legal and Invoice. or wrinkled Sheets severely curled Possible problems Take-up failure. Product specification General A. 11 x 14. 2007 1. torn. B5. damaged sheet Sheet misfed due to its being dog-eared or fed in askew D. face up B.0 Apr. LetterS and Invoice C. Legal. and Invoice Mixed original Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) A3 and A4. Legal and LetterS. Paper Standard Type Sizes Plain paper (50 to 110 g/m2) A3. A4. defective drive mechanism due to jammed staples or clips Take-up failure. 1 General DF-502 1. Paper feed prohibited originals Type of original Sheets stapled or clipped together Sheets glued together Sheets folded. A4S. damaged sheet.Field Service Ver. 11 x 17 and Letter. damaged sheet Take-up failure. (80 g/m2) DC24 V. B4 and B5. Product specification . B4. InvoiceS. A5S. 11 x 17.

1. 1. 2007 General DF-502 Blank Page 2 .0 Apr. Product specification Field Service Ver.

Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Cleaning procedure 1. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Pick-up roller: Every 120. wipe the feed roller [1] clean of dirt. 2. Open the upper door.000 prints C. 2007 2.000 prints B.1 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) DF-502 2.000 prints • Feed roller: Every 30.0 Apr. 2. Periodical check NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.Field Service Ver. 1. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Pick-up roller: Every 30.1 Pick-up roller/feed roller A. [1] 4688F2C500DA [1] 3. wipe the pick-up roller [1] clean of dirt.1. Periodical check Maintenance 2. 4688F2C501DA 3 Maintenance .000 prints • Feed roller: Every 120.

14 [3] Field Service Ver. Replacing procedure 1. 4688F2C504DA 4 . Snap off the C-clip [1] and remove the lever [2] and the holder [3]. Snap off two C-clips [1]. 2. [2] [1] [2] 4688F2C502DA Maintenance [3] 5. Snap off the C-clip [1] and remove the pick-up roller [2]. [2] [1] [2] 4688F2C503DA [1] 6. Remove two bearings [2] and the pick-up roller/feed roller assy [3].2. 4.0 Apr. 1. Open the upper door. Periodical check D. Open the document feed section cover. 2007 DF-502 3. See P.

reverse the order of removal.Field Service Ver. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Separation roller: Every 120. [1] 4688F2C507DA 5 DF-502 . Remove the pin [1]. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. snap off one Cclip [2]. Periodical check 7. [1] [2] 4688F2C505DA 8.1.000 prints C. 1. Remove two screws [1] and the separator section protective cover [2]. 2. wipe the separation roller [1] clean of dirt.000 prints B.2 Separation roller A. To reinstall.0 Apr. Cleaning procedure [2] Maintenance 1. 2007 [3] 2. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Separation roller: Every 30. and remove the feed roller [3]. [1] 4688F2C506DA 2.

0 Apr. Remove two screws [1] and the separator section protective cover [2]. 4688F2C509DA 5. Open the upper door. 2007 2. [1] 4688F2C508DA [1] 4. Remove the separation roller [1]. 1. DF-502 [2] Field Service Ver. Periodical check D. To reinstall.2. [1] 4688F2C506DA [2] Maintenance 3. reverse the order of removal. Unhook the spring [1] and remove the separation roller assy [2]. 6 . Replacing procedure 1.

3 Cleaning of the registration rollers/rolls 2. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Registration rollers: Every 30. Cleaning procedure 1. 2.0 Apr. See P. wipe the registration rolls [1] clean of dirt. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Remove the document feeding tray. [2] [2] 4688F2C511DA 6.1. 2007 2. Periodical check B. Remove the rear cover. Remove two screws [1] and the sensor assy [2].000 prints • Registration rolls: Every 30.14 [1] 5. 1.Field Service Ver.000 prints . Raise the automatic document feeder. See P. [1] 4688F2C512DA 7 Maintenance DF-502 A. [1] 4688F2C510DA 3. Remove three screws [1] and the registration roller cover [2].14 4.

Remove the document feeding tray. 2007 7.14 [1] 3.14 2. Cleaning procedure 1. wipe the exit rollers/rolls [1] clean of dirt. Remove the rear cover. wipe the registration roller [1] clean of dirt.0 Apr.000 prints • Exit rolls: Every 30. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 1.000 prints Maintenance B. See P.2. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Exit rollers: Every 30. [1] 4688F2C514DA 8 .4 Cleaning of the exit rollers/rolls A. 4688F2C513DA 2. Periodical check [1] DF-502 Field Service Ver. See P.1.

14 2.Field Service Ver.000 prints . Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Cleaning procedure 1. wipe the transport rolls [1] clean of dirt. Periodical check B. See P. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Transport rolls: Every 30. 1.5 Cleaning of the transport rolls 2.0 Apr. Remove the rear cover.1. See P. [1] 4688F2C515DA 9 Maintenance DF-502 A. [2] 4688F2C511DA 4. 2007 2. Remove the document feeding tray. Remove three screws [1] and remove the registration roller cover [2].14 [1] 3.

Cleaning procedure 1. [1] 4688F2C516DA Maintenance 10 . Periodical check 2. 2007 Cleaning of length size sensor 2 A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Length size sensor 2: Every 30.1.0 Apr. 1. whisk dust and dirt off the surface of the sensor window [1].000 prints B. Using a brush.2.6 DF-502 Field Service Ver.

be sure to ground your body. refer to “SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures. • The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint. when two or more screws are used for a single part. B. 1. • As a general rule. Removal of PWBs CAUTION • When removing a circuit board or other electrical component. • When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board. D.Field Service Ver. Other 3. screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not be removed or loosened. It should also be noted that. 11 . Red-painted screws • Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. 2007 3.1 Other DF-502 Maintenance Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items A.0 Apr. C. 3. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied • Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming loose. Variable resistors on board NOTE • Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting.

0 Apr.14 P.14 P. DF control board Part name Ref.12 P. Remove nine screws [1] and then remove the rear cover [2] of the main body. [3] [2] [1] 4688F2C518DA 12 . NOTE • Make sure that the screws illustrated right with arrows have washers when installing.15 P.1 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 3. NOTE • Make sure to hold the angle detecting lever [3] with fingers at the time of removing or installing. Remove four screws [1] and remove the uper rear cover [2].2. 1.2 DF-502 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) Disassembly/Assembly parts list Section Uniut ADF Document feed section cover Exterior parts Rear cover Document feeding tray Document feeding tray cover Board and etc. Other Field Service Ver.3 3.14 P. 2007 3.1 Disassembly/Assembly procedure ADF [2] [1] 1.16 3.3. page P. Maintenance [1] 4688F2C517DA [1] 2.3.

[2] [1] 4688F2C001DA 5. DF-502 [1] 4688F2C519DA [1] 4. Other 3. 2007 3. Disconnect three connectors [1] and remove the harness out of the wire saddle [2]. Remove the ADF [1]. Remove the screw [1] to remove the grounding wire.Field Service Ver. [1] 4688F2C520DA 13 Maintenance .0 Apr. 1.

Open the upper door.3. 2. 1.3 Maintenance Rear cover 1.14 [1] [2] 3. 2007 Document feed section cover 1. See P. Other 3. and remove the rear cover [3]. 4688F2C004DA 14 . Open the upper door. [1] [2] 2. 4688F2C002DA 3.3. Open the upper door. Remove the screw [1] and six tabs [2]. [2] [3] [1] 2. Remove the two connectors [1] on the DF control board and the screw [2] of the grounding wire.3.3.4 Document feeding tray 1.2 DF-502 Field Service Ver. Remove the rear cover. [2] 4688F2C003DA 3.0 Apr. Remove two screws [1] and remove the document feed section cover [2].

Remove the document feeding tray.14 [2] [1] 2.3. 1. [1] 4688F2C006DA 15 Maintenance 3. 2007 3. Remove four screws [1] and remove the document feeding tray cover [2].0 Apr.Field Service Ver. See P. Other 4.5 Document feeding tray cover DF-502 . [1] [2] [1] 4688F2C005DA 1. Remove three screws [1] and remove the document feeding tray [2].

5. See P. Remove two screws [2] and remove the DF control board [3].3. [2] [3] 4688F2C521DA Maintenance 16 . Other 3.6 DF-502 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Apr. Remove the screw [1] and remove the grounding wire. 2007 DF control board 1.3. 2. Open the upper door.14 [1] 3. Disconnect all connectors from the interface board. 1. Remove the rear cover.

or related part is dirty.0 Apr. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e.Check to see if: 1. high humidity. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. 4. Toner is not running out. Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. 7. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. 5. How to use the adjustment section 17 . 4. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. A. 6. DF-502 Adjustment / Setting 4. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot. 8. 1. 3. 9. The units. 2007 4. the following advance checks must be made.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. PC Drum. levelness of the installation site. parts. use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit. and supplies used for printing (developer. 5. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. etc. Correct paper is being used for printing.. 2. Advance Checks • Before attempting to solve the customer problem. 2.g. The density is properly selected. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine. The Original Glass. slit glass. direct sunlight. 3.Field Service Ver.. Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. 6. elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). 10. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON. ventilation. The power supply is properly grounded. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. B. etc.

3.2 Adjustment / Setting Service Mode function tree NOTE • This setting menu contains only the cases in which the DF-502 is mounted.1.19 P. Press the following keys in this order. Service Mode Field Service Ver. Service Mode ADJUST ADF SUB ZOOM ADF MAIN REGIST ADF SUB REGIST 1 ADF REG. 1.22 18 . Procedure Press the Utility key. Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1 The Service mode menu screen will appear.1 NOTE • Care must be used to ensure that only the personnel who are involved in service jobs know the procedure to enter the service mode. DF-502 Service Mode Service mode setting procedure 5.20 P.1 1.3 1.1. 2007 5.1. 2.2 • Press the Reset key. Validate the selection by pressing the OK key. 5.0 Apr. Changing the setting value in service mode functions ▼ ▲ Select the desired item using ▲ / ▼ key. 3.21 P. page P. Exiting 5. 5.21 P. press the Back key. 2. LOOP 1 FUNCTION ADF FEED TEST COPY ADF GLASS Ref.22 P. 4. Select the setting value using [▲ / ▼ / / ] key or the 10-key pad. 5.5. To go back to previous screen. 4.

• Press the OK key to start a test copy cycle. Select [ADF SUB ZOOM] and press the OK key.0 mm A 4344F3C527DA ADJUST A. select the appropriate setting value. 2. Adjustment Instructions If length A on the copy is longer than the specifications. Service Mode 5. repeat steps 3 through 7.3 5. 5. If it falls outside the specified range. perform the following steps to make an adjustment. increase the setting value. If a single adjustment procedure does not successfully bring the deviation into the specified range. • Setting range: 87 to 113 (1 step: 0. Using ▲ / ▼ key. If length A on the copy is shorter than the specifications. 4.Field Service Ver. Enter [ADJUST] of the Service mode.0 Apr. Measure the length of reference line A on the copy to determine if the deviation falls within the specified range. 7. 19 Adjustment / Setting . 2007 5.4%) • Ready the test chart that comes with the automatic document feeder. 1. 6. Setting/ procedure Adjustment procedure 1. Make another full-size copy of the test chart to determine the amount of error in length A on the copy. ADF SUB ZOOM Functions Use TEST COPY • To adjust variations in machining and installation accuracy of different parts by varying the scanning zoom ratio in the sub scanning direction when the automatic document feeder is used. decrease the setting value.1 Setting in the service mode DF-502 ADJUST • The default setting is 100. Press the OK key to validate the setting value selected in step 5. Specifications: 400 ± 6. • Adjust so that deviation between length A on the test chart and that on the copy falls within the specified range. 3. Make a full-size copy of the test chart.3.

4. Press the OK key to validate the setting value selected in step 5. perform the following steps to make an adjustment. • Adjust so that the amount of error of width B on the copy falls within the specified range. Using ▲ / ▼ key. ADF MAIN REGIST Functions TEST COPY Field Service Ver. If width B on the copy is shorter than the specifications. Adjustment / Setting 20 . repeat steps 3 through 7. 2007 ADJUST DF-502 Use • To adjust variations in machining and installation accuracy of different parts by varying the scanning start position in the main scanning direction when the automatic document feeder is used. 6.5. • Press the OK key to start a test copy cycle. 5. Enter [ADJUST] of the Service mode. If a single adjustment procedure does not successfully bring the amount of error into the specified range. 1. Select [ADF MAIN REGIST] and press the OK key. Using a scale. select the appropriate setting value. Adjustment Instructions If width B on the copy is longer than the specifications.1 mm) • Ready the test chart that comes with the optional automatic document feeder. Make a full-size copy of the test chart. • Setting range: 20 to 180 (1 step: 0. 3. Specifications: 20 ± 2. Service Mode B.0 mm Setting/ procedure Adjustment procedure B 4344F3C528DA 1. 7.0 Apr. increase the setting value. measure the distance between reference line B on the copy and the top edge of the copy (width B) and determine if the amount of error in width B falls within the specified range. Make another full-size copy of the test chart to check for the amount of error in width B on the copy. If it falls outside the specified range. 2. decrease the setting value.

3. Adjustment Instructions • Try a different setting value until there is no skew. Using a scale. If a single adjustment procedure does not successfully bring the amount of error into the specified range. 2007 C.1 mm) • Ready the test chart that comes with the optional automatic document feeder. 2.5 mm 4344F3C529DA 1. Adjustment Instructions If length C on the copy is longer than the specifications. C Setting range: 50 to 150 (1 step: 0. 7. measure the distance between reference line C on the copy and the leading edge of the copy (length C) and determine if the amount of error in length C falls within the specified range. 2. fold. perform the following steps to make an adjustment. Make another full-size copy of the test chart to check for the amount of error in length C on the copy. ADF SUB RESIST1 5. • Adjust so that the amount of error of length C on the copy falls within the specified range. If it falls outside the specified range.0 mm) 1. LOOP1 Functions Use Setting/ procedure Adjustment procedure • To adjust the length of loop formed in the original before the registration roller. select the desired setting value. 6. decrease the setting value. 4.Field Service Ver. Enter [ADJUST] of the Service mode. • Specifications: 20 ± 2. 3. or misfeed of the original. (1-sided) NOTE • This adjustment should be made after the [ADF SUB ZOOM] adjustment. Press the OK key to validate the setting value selected in step 5. Using ▲ / ▼ key. increase the setting value. ADF REG. Select [ADF SUB REGIST1] and press the OK key. Setting/ procedure Adjustment procedure • Press the OK key to start a test copy cycle. If length C on the copy is shorter than the specifications. (1-sided) • When a skew feed. Make a full-size copy of the test chart. repeat steps 3 through 7. Using ▲ / ▼ key. • Setting range: 95 to 105 (1 step: 1. Select [ADF REG. D. select the appropriate setting value. 5. 4. Enter [ADJUST] of the Service mode.0 Apr. Service Mode Use • To adjust variations in machining and installation accuracy of different parts by varying the scanning start position in the sub scanning direction when the automatic document feeder is used. 21 Adjustment / Setting DF-502 Functions TEST COPY ADJUST . fold. or misfeed of the original occurs • The default setting is 100. Press the OK key to validate the setting value selected in step 3. LOOP1] and press the OK key. 1.

• Paper passage operation continues until all pages of the document loaded in the unit have been fed in.3. 3. • When a paper misfeed of originals occurs 1. Enter [FUNCTION] of the Service mode. 4. Select [ADF FEED TEST] and press the OK key.0 Apr. Select [1-SIDED] and press the OK key to start the ADF feed test. COPY ADF GLASS Functions Use Setting/ procedure • To check for scratches and dirt on the original scanning glass. Use Setting/ procedure B. 1. 3. Enter [FUNCTION] of the Service mode. Press the Start key to start the COPY ADF GLASS AREA test. ADF FEED TEST Functions • To check for correct paper passage of the paper take-up and transport system in the automatic (duplexing) document feeder alone as a single unit. Select [COPY ADF GLASS]. • The Scanner does not make any scan motion.5.2 DF-502 Field Service Ver. 2007 FUNCTION A. The copier produces two copy samples (in order to know dirt on the glass from printer image noise). 2. • Here are the details of operation involved in the paper passage motion. • When a dirty image occurs 1. • Press the Stop key to stop the ADF feed test. Adjustment / Setting 22 . 2. Service Mode 5.

Mechanical adjustment 6. DF-502 Adjustment / Setting ADF Height Adjustment [1] Within 0. 6.0 Apr. Turn the screw clockwise to raise the ADF. Turn the screw counterclockwise to lower the ADF. Turn the screw [1] so that the spacer contacts the glass at the scale position of the copier.1 Mechanical adjustment 1. 2007 6. 1.Field Service Ver.5 mm 4688F3C503DA 23 .

[1] 1. [1] 4688F3C506DA 24 . Specifications: 0 ± 3. If the deviation falls outside the range specified below. 1. 4688F3C504DA 2.0 Apr.6. Loosen the screw [1].2 DF-502 ADF Leading Edge Skew Adjustment NOTE • This adjustment is to be made when a tilted image occurs. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. Align each copy sample as shown on the left and check the deviation. NOTE • Load the test chart lengthwise. Load the test chart [1] in the ADF and make five 1-sided copies. perform the following steps to make an adjustment. 2007 6.0 mm 4688F3C505DA Adjustment / Setting 3.

move the graduations [1] of the ADF to the front. If the deviation is as shown on the left. [1] 4688F3C509DA 25 Adjustment / Setting DF-502 . [1] 4688F3C508DA 6. 1. 2007 6. move the graduations [1] of the ADF to the rear. Mechanical adjustment 4.0 Apr. Tighten the screw [1]. [1] 4688F3C507DA 5. If the deviation is as shown on the left.Field Service Ver.

Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver.6. 1.0 Apr. 2007 DF-502 Adjustment / Setting Blank Page 26 .

1 Display resetting procedure • Open the corresponding cover.Field Service Ver.30 Ref. Jam Display • When a paper misfeed occurs.2 Sensor layout [1] [2] [3] 4688F4C500DA [1] [2] Separator sensor (PS4) Paper exit sensor (PS5) [3] Registration sensor (PS3) 27 Troubleshooting .1 Misfeed display DF-502 4688F4J502DA 7. clear the sheet of paper misfed. the error indicator lights up steadily and the display gives a corresponding message. JAM OPEN DOC. 7. page 7.1. and close the cover.29 P.0 Apr. Display message ORIGINAL DOC. 2007 7. Jam Display Troubleshooting 7. FEED COVER Misfeed/paper location Document feed section Document transport section Document exit section P.28 P. 1.

Jam Display Field Service Ver. • The separator sensor (PS4) is blocked at timing when the power switch is turned ON. Instruct the user in correct paper storage. the cover is opened and closed. B. paper path deformed or worn? Are the rolls/rollers dirty. Set as necessary. Check Item Does the paper meet product specifications? Is paper curled.3. 7. Action Relevant electrical components Main motor (M1) Separator sensor (PS4) DF control board (DFDB) WIRING DIAGRAM Troubleshooting Step Operations Control signal — DFDB CN8DFDB-3 to 6 DFDB CN2DFDB-9 (ON) — Location (Electrical components) — B-3 F-2 — 1 2 3 4 Initial checks M1 operation check PS4 sensor check Replace DFDB 28 .1 • When a paper misfeed occurs. or damp.7.3. first perform the following initial checks. or worn? Are the edge guide and trailing edge stop at the correct position to accommodate the paper? Are the actuators found operational when checked for correct operation? Clean or change the defective roll/roller. Change the paper. 1. or is the Clean or change the paper path. Correct or change the defective actuator.0 Apr.2 Misfeed at the document feed section A.3 DF-502 Solution Initial Check Items 7. or a paper misfeed or malfunction is reset. deformed. 2007 7. Action Is a foreign object present along the paper path. wavy. Detection timing Type Document feed section misfeed detection Document left in the document feed section Description • The Separator sensor (PS4) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the main motor (M1) has been energized. Change the paper.

Jam Display A. 2007 7.3 Misfeed at the document transport section 7. 1.0 Apr. • The registration sensor (PS3) is blocked at timing when the power switch is turned ON.Field Service Ver. the cover is opened and closed. or a paper misfeed or malfunction is reset. Detection timing Type Document transport section misfeed detection Document left in the document transport section Description • The registration sensor (PS3) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the main motor (M1) has been energized.3. B. Action Relevant electrical components Main motor (M1) Registration sensor (PS3) DF control board (DFDB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Operations Control signal — DFDB CN8DFDB-3 to 6 DFDB CN2DFDB-6 (ON) — Location (Electrical components) — B-3 F-2 — 1 2 3 4 Initial checks M1 operation check PS3 sensor check Replace DFDB 29 Troubleshooting DF-502 .

• The paper exit sensor (PS5) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given tion misfeed detecperiod of time after the main motor (M1) has been energized. Detection timing Type Description Document exit sec. tion Document left in the document exit section • The paper exit sensor (PS5) is blocked at timing when the power switch is turned ON.3. 1. Jam Display 7. B. Action Relevant electrical components Main motor (M1) Paper exit sensor (PS5) DF control board (DFDB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Operations Control signal — DFDB CN8DFDB-3 to 6 DFDB CN2DFDB-12 (ON) — Location (Electrical components) — B-3 F-2 to 3 — 1 2 3 4 Initial checks M1 operation check PS5 sensor check Replace DFDB Troubleshooting 30 . the cover is opened and closed.0 Apr. or a paper misfeed or malfunction is reset.4 DF-502 Field Service Ver.7. 2007 Misfeed at the document exit section A.

0 .04 Ver. 1.SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE 2007.

• When a page revised in Ver. 2. Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual. 2.0: The revision marks for Ver. Therefore. 2. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required. 2. the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance.0 deleted. • When a page revised in Ver.0: The revision marks for Ver.0 Service manual Ver. 3. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. • To indicate clearly a section revised. show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page. 2007/04 Date 1.0 has been changed in Ver.0 are left as they are. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.0 has not been changed in Ver. — Revision mark Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision . 3. show 1 to the left of the revised section.Revision history After publication of this service manual. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.

.... 2007 CONTENTS AD-504 General 1............... 8 Duplex unit transport rollers/rolls .................... 5 Lower right cover....................................................................... 5.................................................... 3 Other ..................................................................3........................................... Product specifications .....................2.. 8 Duplex unit ventilation section.......1 5.................................................................................................................................................... 4 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts).........................................2 Periodical check .................................. 6 Cleaning procedure ........4 3............ 12 Service mode function setting procedure ........... 3...............4........................1 3....... 5 Disassembly/Assembly parts list...............1.....................................2 3........................... 3 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ..1 How to use the adjustment section .................................................................. 6 Right cover .............. 11 Service Mode ....................................................................................................... 2..........3......4 Disassembly/Assembly procedure..1 i Troubleshooting Adjustment/Setting Adjustment / Setting Transport motor...........................................................2.......................................... 12 5...Field Service Ver.....................................1......... 12 Procedure ..............................3 3................. 9 4............................3 3........................1 3...................................4........... 12 Changing the setting value in service mode functions.......................................................3.............1 3.............................................................................................................1 3...........................4...................................................... 1 AD-504 2...............................4................ 12 5............... 5................ 12 Exiting ............................................................... 7 Maintenance General Maintenance ................................. 12 Setting in the service mode ........................0 Apr........................................................................................................................................................................................ 4 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ........................ 6 AD drive board ...3 Service Mode function tree.3.............. 8 Switch back unit transport rollers/roll ................3 3..3 5.............................2 5................................ 7 3.................4 3.......3...............2 3...... 12 SERVICE’S CHOICE ......... 1.......... 9 Bypass transport roller/rolls ................................................. 5 Cleaning parts list ................................................1......................2 3.............................2 5................................1 3................

.............3.................................................. 15 6.0 Apr................. 6............1 6........ 15 Initial check items ............................ 2007 Troubleshooting AD-504 6..............................1...3 Jam display ......3.............................................................................. 1......... 14 Solution ..................1 6........................................... 13 Misfeed display ........................ 13 Sensor layout...........................................................................1 6......... 15 Duplex reversal housing block .....Field Service Ver..................2 6.................................................2 General Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance ii ..... 13 Misfeed display resetting procedure .................................................................................................................................................

Operating environment • Conforms to the operating environment of the main body. Legal. Type Name Type Installation Power requirements Automatic duplex unit Sheet duplex paper take-up section Installed to the right side door DC24 V (supplied from the copier) DC5 V B.5 kg (Duplex unit + Manual bypass assy Conforms to that of the copier D. NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice. 1 General AD-504 1. InvoiceS/ Invoice Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2). Product specifications General A.Field Service Ver. power consumption Dimensions Mass Operating environment 9 W or less 412 mm (W) x 215 mm (D) x 88 mm (H) 16. Ledger.5 inch (D) x 3.5 inch (H) 2. B5S/B5. 2007 1. Product specifications . A5S/A5. FLS. Paper Size Type Document alignment A3. Letter. Machine specifications Max. recycled paper (60 to 90 g/m2) Center C. B4. 1.0 Apr.25 inch (W) x 8. A4S/A4.

2007 General AD-504 Blank Page 2 .0 Apr.1. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 1.

Periodical check Maintenance 2. Periodical check • Periodically replaced parts are not employed.0 Apr. 2007 2. 3 Maintenance .1 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) AD-504 2. 1.Field Service Ver.

4 .0 Apr. B. refer to “SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.3. screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not be removed or loosened. 2007 3. Red-painted screws • Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. • When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board. AD-504 Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items 3. • The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. C. Removal of PWBs CAUTION • When removing a circuit board or other electrical component. only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint. Other Field Service Ver. It should also be noted that. • As a general rule.1 A. be sure to ground your body. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied • Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming loose. when two or more screws are used for a single part. Maintenance D. 1. Variable resistors on board NOTE • Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting.

0 Apr.6 P.9 P.1 No. 1 2 3 4 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) AD-504 Disassembly/Assembly parts list Section Exterior parts Board and etc. page P.8 P. 2007 3.8 P. Others Lower right cover Right cover AD drive board Transport motor Part name Ref.2 3.6 P. 1.9 5 Maintenance .2.7 P.Field Service Ver.2.2 No 1 2 3 4 Cleaning parts list Section Part name Duplex unit transport rollers/rolls Duplex unit Switch back unit transport roller/roll Duplex unit ventilation section Bypass transport Bypass transport roller/rolls Ref. page P.7 3. Other 3.

Other Field Service Ver. Remove the screw [1] and the lower right cover [2].2 Maintenance Right cover 1. Remove two screws [1] and the right cover [2]. See P. [1] 4532F2C002DA 6 . 1.3.3.1 [2] [1] 4532F2C001DA 3.6 [2] 2. 3. 2007 3. Remove the lower right cover.0 Apr.3.3 AD-504 Disassembly/Assembly procedure Lower right cover 1.

See P. and remove the AD drive board [2]. 1. Disconnect the connector [1]. [1] 4532F2C003DA 3. 2007 3.3.0 Apr.3 AD drive board 3. Remove the lower right cover. disconnect all connectors.Field Service Ver.4 Transport motor 1. Remove the right cover. remove two screws [2] and remove the transport motor [3].6 [2] [3] 3.3. Remove the lower right cover. Remove the right cover.6 2.6 2. See P. Remove two screws [1].6 [1] [2] 3. Other 1. See P. See P. [1] 4532F2C004DA 7 Maintenance AD-504 .

[2] 4532F2C500DA 8 . [1] 4532F2C006DA [1] 2.3.4. 2007 3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. wipe the switch back unit transport rollers [1]/rolls [2] clean of dirt.4 AD-504 Cleaning procedure NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.1 Duplex unit transport rollers/rolls 1. Other Field Service Ver.4.2 Switch back unit transport rollers/roll [2] 1. wipe the duplex unit transport rollers/rolls [1] clean of dirt. 3.0 Apr. [1] 2. Maintenance 4532F2C005DA 3. Remove two screws [1] and the duplex unit [2]. 1. Open the front door of the duplex unit.

.4.0 Apr. Remove the rear right cover. 3. [1] [2] 3. [3] 4532F2C009DA 9 Maintenance AD-504 [1] 1. Other 4532F2C007DA 2. Open the front door of the duplex unit.3 Duplex unit ventilation section 3.4 Bypass transport roller/rolls 1. Open the right door. disconnect the connector [2]. 2. and remove the bypass assy [3]. 1. [1] 4532F2C008DA 3. wipe the inside of the duplex unit ventilation section [1] clean of dirt. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. See P.Field Service Ver.4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. wipe the outside of the duplex unit ventilation section [1] clean of dirt. Remove two screws [1].48 of the main body service manual. 2007 3.

3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 2007 4. wipe the bypass transport rollers [1] clean of dirt. Maintenance 4687F2C003DA 10 . Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr. wipe the bypass transport rolls [1] clean of dirt. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. AD-504 [1] 4532F2C501DA [1] 5.

Correct paper is being used for printing. 2007 4. How to use the adjustment section 11 .. the following advance checks must be made. 9. PC Drum. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e. 1.0 Apr. or related part is dirty. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. and supplies used for printing (developer. 10. 2. levelness of the installation site.Check to see if: 1.Field Service Ver. Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit. 5. high humidity. 5. 8. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. direct sunlight. 3. The units. parts. slit glass. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature. 3. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON. Toner is not running out. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. etc. B. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). 4. 2. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. A. Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures. etc. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. ventilation. The power supply is properly grounded. 6. 6. 7. The Original Glass. AD-504 Adjustment / Setting 4. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine.. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. Advance Checks • Before attempting to solve the customer problem. 4.g. The density is properly selected.

1. 4. Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1 The service mode menu screen will appear. 5. Procedure Press the Utility key. Press the following keys in this order. To go back to previous screen. and paper skew.3. Adjustment Instructions • Try a different setting value until there are no variations in the amount of void on the leading edge. 4. fold. page P.2 • Press the Reset key. Select [LOOP ADJUST (DUPLEX)] and press the OK key.9 mm (1 step: 0. select the desired setting value.0 Apr. 3. 2.1.1 1. Validate the selection by pressing the OK key.3 1.2 Adjustment / Setting Service Mode function tree NOTE • This setting menu contains only the cases in which the AD-504 is mounted. Service Mode Field Service Ver. Call [SERVICE’S CHOICE] of Service mode to the screen. 3.12 5. 5. or misfeed. Changing the setting value in service mode functions ▼ ▲ Select the desired item using [ ▲ / ▼ ] key. 4. 5. or misfeed of paper occurs • When variations in the amount of void on the leading edge occurs Setting range: -3.1 Setting in the service mode SERVICE’S CHOICE A.1. fold.1 NOTE • Care must be used to ensure that only the personnel who are involved in service jobs know the procedure to enter the service mode. LOOP ADJUST (DUPLEX) Functions Use Adjustment range Setting procedure To adjust the length of the loop formed in the paper before the registration roller. 2. 3.5. AD-504 Service Mode Service mode function setting procedure 5. Select the setting value using [▲ / ▼ / / ] key or the 10-key pad. (DUPLEX) Ref. 2007 5. press the Back key.1. Using ▲ / ▼ key. 2.6 mm) 1. Exiting 5. Press the OK key to validate the setting value selected in step 3. 12 .3 5. • When a skew feed. Service Mode SERVICE’S CHOICE LOOP Ad.9 to 3.

15 6. the error indicator lights up steadily and the display gives a corresponding message. Jam display • When a paper misfeed occurs.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure • Open the corresponding door.Field Service Ver. clear the sheet of paper misfed. 13 Troubleshooting . 2007 6. page P. 1.0 Apr.1. and close the door. Display message PAPER JAM OPEN DUPLEX COVER Misfeed processing location Duplex reversal housing block Ref.1 Misfeed display AD-504 4532F4E501DA 6. Jam display Troubleshooting 6.

1.0 Apr. Jam display Field Service Ver. 2007 6.6.2 AD-504 Sensor layout [1] 4532F4C502DA [1] Transport sensor PS2 Troubleshooting 14 .

3 6.2 Duplex reversal housing block A. 2007 6. paper path deformed or worn? Are the rolls/rollers dirty. Set as necessary. Check Item Does the paper meet product specifications? Is paper curled.Field Service Ver. deformed. or worn? Are the edge guide and trailing edge stop at the correct position to accommodate the paper? Are the actuators found operational when checked for correct operation? Clean or change the defective roll/roller. or is the Clean or change the paper path. Action Is a foreign object present along the paper path. first check the following initial check items. wavy.3. or damp. B. Correct or change the defective actuator.3. 6. Action Relevant electrical parts Transport motor (M1) Transport sensor (PS2) AD drive board (ADDB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — ADDB PJ2ADDB-1 to 4 ADDB PJ4ADDB-5 (ON) — 1 2 3 4 Initial check items M1 operation check PS2 sensor check Change ADDB 15 Troubleshooting . Detection timing Type Duplex reversal housing block Description • If the duplex unit transport sensor does not turn on even when a specified time elapses after the exit paper sensor turns off.0 Apr. 1. Change the paper. Instruct the user in correct paper storage.1 Solution AD-504 Location (Electrical component) — D-4 D-5 — Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs. Jam display 6. Change the paper.

2007 AD-504 Blank Page Troubleshooting 16 .6.0 Apr. 1. Jam display Field Service Ver.

1.0 .SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE 2007.04 Ver.

• To indicate clearly a section revised.0: The revision marks for Ver. the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. 2. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted. 3. • When a page revised in Ver. — Revision mark Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision . Therefore. Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required. • When a page revised in Ver.0 has not been changed in Ver.0 Service manual Ver.0: The revision marks for Ver. 3. 2. 3. 2. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. 2007/04 Date 1.Revision history After publication of this service manual. 2. show 1 to the left of the revised section. show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.0 deleted.0 has been changed in Ver.0 only are shown with those for Ver. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.0 are left as they are.

.................. 9 4......1 3.............2.................... 5 Cleaning parts list .......................3......................2 6.......................... 3...........................................2 5.................................. 5 Tray ............................. 3 Other ..........................................................................................................3................... 11 Service mode ..........................1.................................................................... 2......................................................1 How to use the adjustment section ............ Product specification .....................2 3................ 12 Changing the setting value in service mode functions.................................................................................. 5.............. 3 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ....................... 13 5........................ 13 FUNCTION ................ 13 SERVICE’S CHOICE .........3............................................ 4 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ....3...3.0 Apr............................... 5...................................................................... Mechanical adjustment ..... 12 Procedure ................................................................................................................................................. 2007 CONTENTS PF-502 General 1..... 7 2.............................................................................................................. 12 Exiting .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5 Paper feed unit ................................................... 9 Vertical transport rollers/rolls......... 1..1....................1 5.... 5 PF drive board .................... 4 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts).....1 3..................... 9 Cleaning procedure ..........................................................................3 5.....4............................ 7 Maintenance General Maintenance ...........................................................................3 Service Mode function tree..1 3............................4 3... 3 Replacing the feed roller .....................................1 3... 1 PF-502 2........................................2................ 12 Setting in the service mode ........................5 3......................................................................................................Field Service Ver.....................................1 5..............3...........................................1...................................3 3........... 14 i Troubleshooting Adjustment/Setting Adjustment / Setting Paper feed unit rear cover..................................... 8 Feed roller .............................................3 3.................................2 5........4....... 8 Paper size detect board ..2 3.........................4 3... 12 Service mode setting procedure....1 3.....................3................................................ 5 Disassembly/Assembly parts list..............................................................................2 Periodical check .....1 3....2 Disassembly/Assembly procedure................................. 12 5...1...............................................................

.........................0 Apr.........................................................................1 7............... 7.................... 17 Misfeed display .............1 General 7......................................................3 Jam display ......................................................... 18 Solution ...........1.. 1......................3............... 19 Misfeed at the tray2 to 5 paper feed/vertical transport section .......................................... 17 Sensor layout.. 17 Misfeed display resetting procedure ...................Field Service Ver...... 2007 6................... 19 Initial check items .3............... 20 7.............................................................. 14 Troubleshooting 7......2 7.......................1 PF-502 Paper feed unit main scanning registration adjustment.1 7............................................2 Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance ii .........................................................................................

1 General Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) PF-502 1. 1. A5. Machine specifications Paper alignment Capacity Power requirements Power consumption Dimensions Weight Center 250 sheets DC24 V. B5S. Operating environment • Conforms to the operating environment of the main body. and Invoice (5-1/2 x 8-1/2) C.0 Apr. and B5 Inch areas: Ledger (11 x 17). Product specification General A. Legal (8-1/2 x 14). Type Name Installation Add-on paper feed unit Installed on the underside of the copier B.25 lb) D. NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice.5 kg (12.25 inch (H) 5.25 inch (W) x 22 inch (D) x 4. A4S. LetterS (8-1/2 x 11S). DC5 V (supplied from the copier) 9 W or less 590 mm (W) x 558 mm (D) x 108 mm (H) 23. Product specification . 2007 1. B4. Paper Type 250 sheets Recycled paper (60 to 90 g/m2) Sizes Metric areas: A3. A4.Field Service Ver. 11 x 14.

2007 General PF-502 Blank Page 2 .1.0 Apr. 1. Product specification Field Service Ver.

Remove the feed roller lock [1].Field Service Ver. See P. [2] 4686F2C001DA NOTE • Make sure that the feed roller lock [1] is in position.5 [1] 2. Periodical check . Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Feed roller: Every 150.1 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) Replacing the feed roller A. Replacing procedure 1.0 Apr.1. To reinstall. Then. reverse the order of removal. Periodical check Maintenance 2. Remove the paper feed unit. [1] 4686F2C501DA 3. 1. 3 Maintenance PF-502 2.000 prints B. slide and take off two feed rollers [2].1 2. 2007 2.

B. Red-painted screws • Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint. Other Field Service Ver. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied • Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming loose. 2007 3.3. refer to “SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures. • The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. Maintenance D. Removal of PWBs CAUTION • When removing a circuit board or other electrical component.1 A. 4 . be sure to ground your body. Variable resistors on board NOTE • Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting. screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not be removed or loosened. • As a general rule. • When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board. C. when two or more screws are used for a single part.0 Apr. PF-502 Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items 3. It should also be noted that. 1.

Field Service Ver.2 3.1 Disassembly/Assembly procedure Paper feed unit 1.0 Apr.2. 1 2 3 4 5 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) PF-502 Disassembly/Assembly parts list Section Unit Exterior parts Paper feed unit Tray Paper feed unit rear cover PF drive board Paper size detect board Part name Ref.9 P.1 No. 2007 3.8 P.3 3. page P.9 3. 3. page P.7 2. See P.7 P.7 P. Remove the paper feed unit rear cover. Disconnect the connector [1]. [1] 4686F2C502DA 5 Maintenance .3.8 Board and etc.5 P. 1 2 Cleaning parts list Section Feed section Transport section Feed roller Transport roller/rolls Part name Ref. 1. NOTE • Make sure to install the ferrite core to be parallel with the PF drive board. Other 3.2.2 No.

PF-502 [1] 4686F2C506DA 4. Other Field Service Ver. Maintenance [3] [1] [2] 4686F2C503DA 5.3. and remove the two screws [3] in the front. Remove two screws [1] in the rear. and take out the paper feeder unit [1]. Open the tray 1 [1] of the main body and tray [2] of the paper feeder unit. 1.0 Apr. 2007 3. Hold the positions of the main body as illustrated to lift it up. [1] 4686F2C505DA 6 .

1.3. Slide out the tray.3. [2] [1] 3. Remove two screws [1]. Remove the screw [1] and remove the paper feed unit rear cover [2]. 2007 3.0 Apr.2 Tray 3.3 Paper feed unit rear cover [2] 1. [1] 4686F2C504DA 7 Maintenance [3] [1] 4686F2C002DA PF-502 . Other 1.Field Service Ver. two fixed metal plates [2] and remove the tray [3]. [2] 2.

[2] 4686F2C003DA 3. 2007 PF drive board 1.5 Maintenance Paper size detect board 1. Slide out the tray. See P. 1.7 [1] 2. remove the lever [2] and remove the paper size detect board [3]. [2] 4686F2C005DA 8 . Other 3. See P. Remove two screws [1] and remove PF drive board [2].3. 3. [1] 4686F2C004DA [1] [3] 4. Remove two screws [1] and remove the paper size detect board assy [2].4 PF-502 Field Service Ver.0 Apr. Remove the paper feed unit rear cover.5 2.3. [2] 3.3. Remove the paper feed unit. Disconnect the connector [1]. Disconnect all connectors on the PF drive board.

Field Service Ver. Remove the feed rollers. wipe the vertical transport rollers [1]/rolls [2] clean of dirt.1 Feed roller 1. 3. [2] 4686F2C007DA 9 . 4686F2C006DA 3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.4.4. [1] 2.0 Apr.3 [1] 2.4 Cleaning procedure PF-502 Maintenance NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Open the paper feed unit right door.2 Vertical transport rollers/rolls 1. 2007 3. wipe the two feed rollers [1] clean of dirt. See P. 1. Other 3.

2007 Maintenance PF-502 Blank Page 10 . Other Field Service Ver. 1.3.0 Apr.

etc.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. ventilation. 10. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). PC Drum. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e.0 Apr. 3.g. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. A. etc. 6. levelness of the installation site. 9. The Original Glass.Check to see if: 1. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine. B. Correct paper is being used for printing. slit glass. the following advance checks must be made. Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. 1. Advance Checks • Before attempting to solve the customer problem. 4. Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. 5. 2. Toner is not running out. 2007 4.. parts. use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit.. 2. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot. 3. How to use the adjustment section 11 . The power supply is properly grounded. 4. 8. high humidity. 7. The density is properly selected. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. or related part is dirty. 5. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image.Field Service Ver. PF-502 Adjustment / Setting 4. The units. direct sunlight. and supplies used for printing (developer. 6. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature.

Press the following keys in this order. (TRAY2-5) PAPER FEED TEST Ref. 4. 3. 3.1. 2. Service mode Field Service Ver.13 P. Select the setting value using [▲ / ▼ / / ] key or the 10-key pad. 5. 2007 5.1 1. 5. 4.13 12 . Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1 The Service mode menu screen will appear. Service Mode SERVICE’S CHOICE FUNCTION LOOP Ad. Procedure Press the Utility key.2 • Press the Reset key. Validate the selection by pressing the OK key. 5. Exiting 5. 2. 1.1. press the Back key. page P. PF-502 Service mode Service mode setting procedure 5.5.2 Adjustment / Setting Service Mode function tree NOTE • This setting menu contains only the cases in which the PF-502 is mounted. Changing the setting value in service mode functions ▼ ▲ Select the desired item using ▲ / ▼ key.3 1. To go back to previous screen.1 NOTE • Care must be used to ensure that only the personnel who are involved in service jobs know the procedure to enter the service mode.0 Apr.1.

PAPER FEED TEST • To check for correct paper passage of the paper take-up and transport system by letting the copier consecutively take up and feed paper without involving actual printing action. 3. • Press the Stop key to stop the paper feed test.Field Service Ver. • No counters are activated.6 mm) Setting/ procedure 1. [TRAY4] or [TRAY5]. select the desired setting value. • Setting range: -3. 3.9 mm (1 step: 0.3 5.3.3. Select the [FUNCTION] and press the OK key. Press OK key to define the setting value. • When a skew feed. 2007 5. 4.9 to 3. Service mode 5. Select the [LOOP Ad. 2.2 FUNCTION A. • When a paper misfeed occurs 1. 1. (TRAY2-5)] and press the OK key. fold.0 Apr. • Here are the details of operation involved in the paper passage motion. 2.0 mm”. Select the [SERVICE’S CHOICE] and press the OK key. (TRAY2-5) Functions Use • To adjust the length of the loop formed in the paper before the synchronizing roller when the optional paper feed unit is used. 4. Select the [PAPER FEED TEST] and press the OK key. Call the SERVICE MODE to the screen. 5. 5. Select the [TRAY2]. Call the SERVICE MODE to the screen.1 Setting in the service mode PF-502 SERVICE’S CHOICE A. • The Scanner does not make any scan motion. Functions Use Setting/ procedure 13 Adjustment / Setting . • Paper is fed until the corresponding paper source runs out of paper. LOOP Ad. 5. Using ▲ / ▼ key. or misfeed of paper occurs • When variations in the amount of void on the leading edge occurs • The default setting “0. Press the Start key to start the paper feed test. • This test cannot be run with the manual bypass or multiple bypass (option). [TRAY3].

PF-502 Mechanical adjustment Paper feed unit main scanning registration adjustment 6. [1] 4686F3C501DA 9. Load the tray2 with A4 crosswise paper.0 Apr. 2. Call the SERVICE MODE to the screen. 7. If width A is greater than the specified range. 4686F3C502DA 14 . 5. 2007 6. perform the following steps to make an adjustment. 4. Select the [FUNCTION] and press the OK key.0 mm A 4686F3C500DA Adjustment / Setting 8. 1. Slide out the tray2 and loosen the screw [1]. Select the [PRN TEST PATTERN] and press the OK key. Select [PATTERN 1] and press OK key to print out the test pattern. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.6. Check width A on the test pattern. Select the [TRAY2] and press the OK key.1 NOTE • This adjustment is to be made when the PH unit has been replaced. If width A falls outside the specified range. 6. 3. Specifications: 20 ± 2. move the edge guide in the direction of the arrow.

4686F3C503DA 12. After the adjustment has been properly made. 1. 2007 6. After the adjustment has been made.Field Service Ver. tighten the screw [1]. [1] 4686F3C501DA 15 Adjustment / Setting PF-502 . produce a new test pattern and check for deviation.0 Apr. If width A is smaller than the specified range. move the edge guide in the direction of the arrow. 11. Mechanical adjustment 10.

2007 PF-502 Adjustment / Setting Blank Page 16 .0 Apr. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.6.

and close the cover.1 Misfeed display PF-502 4686F4E501DA 7. Display message PAPER JAM OPEN 2nd SIDE COVER PAPER JAM OPEN 3rd SIDE COVER PAPER JAM OPEN 4th SIDE COVER PAPER JAM OPEN 5th SIDE COVER Misfeed/paper location Tray2 paper feed/vertical transport section of the paper feed unit Tray3 paper feed/vertical transport section of the paper feed unit Ref.Field Service Ver.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure • Open the corresponding cover.1. 2007 7. Page P. the error indicator lights up steadily and the display gives a corresponding message.0 Apr. Jam display • When a paper misfeed occurs. 1. 17 Troubleshooting .20 Tray4 paper feed/vertical transport section of the paper feed unit Tray5 paper feed/vertical transport section of the paper feed unit 7. clear the sheet of paper misfed. Jam display Troubleshooting 7.

Jam display Field Service Ver.2 PF-502 Sensor layout [1] [2] 4686F4C500DA Troubleshooting [1] [2] Registration sensor (PS1) Paper feed sensor (PS2) 18 .7. 2007 7.0 Apr. 1.

3. Correct or change the defective actuator. deformed. 19 Troubleshooting . Action Is a foreign object present along the paper path. Jam display 7.Field Service Ver. paper path deformed or worn? Are the rolls/rollers dirty. 2007 7. first check the following initial check items.1 Solution PF-502 Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs. Instruct the user in correct paper storage.3 7. Change the paper. or worn? Are the edge guide and trailing edge stop at the correct position to accommodate the paper? Are the actuators found operational when checked for correct operation? Clean or change the defective roll/roller. 1.0 Apr. Change the paper. wavy. or is the Clean or change the paper path. Check Item Does the paper meet product specifications? Is paper curled. or damp. Set as necessary.

1. • The registration sensor (PS1) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has unblocked the registration sensor (PS1). 2007 Misfeed at the tray2 to 5 paper feed/vertical transport section A. • The paper feed sensor (PS2) is blocked at timing when the power switch is turned ON.2 PF-502 Field Service Ver. the cover is opened and closed. Jam display 7. Action Relevant electrical parts Registration sensor (PS1) Paper feed solenoid (SD1) Paper feed sensor (PS2) PF drive board (PFDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PRCB PJ17PRCB-3 (ON) PFDB PJ3PFDB A-1 (ON) PFDB PJ3PFDB B-2 (ON) — — Location (Electrical component) — bizhub 163/163f/ 181/211/220 C-5 C to D-4 C to D-6 — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 Initial check items PS1 sensor check SD1 operation check PS2 sensor check Replace DFDB Replace PRCB Troubleshooting 20 . Detection timing Type Paper feed/ vertical transport section misfeed detection Size error detection Paper left at the paper feed/ vertical transport section Description • The leading edge of the paper does not unblock the registration sensor (PS1) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper feed solenoid (SD1) has been energized.3.0 Apr. or a paper misfeed or malfunction is reset. B.7.

1.04 Ver.0 .SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE 2007.

0 has been changed in Ver.0 has not been changed in Ver. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. Therefore. • When a page revised in Ver.0 are left as they are. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. 2. 2. 3. the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance.Revision history After publication of this service manual. • To indicate clearly a section revised. show 1 to the left of the revised section. 2.0: The revision marks for Ver. 3. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.0 Service manual Ver.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 3. • When a page revised in Ver. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual.0: The revision marks for Ver. 2007/04 Date 1. — Revision mark Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision . a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.0 deleted. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. 2. Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised. show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.

..................................... 7 Paper feed solenoid ........ 20 Mechanical adjustment ........................ 3 2..2...............2 3..................................................................... 7 Disassembly/Assembly parts list................... 12 Removal and disassembly of the paper feed mechanical clutch......................1.....................................................3................................ 1 MB-501 2................................................ 20 Exiting ...............3.................. 6 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts)....................................................................... 6 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ........... 3 Replacing the feed roller .........................2............................................................................... 20 Procedure ...........................................................1 3............................................................................. 3 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ...... 2........1.....1 3. 6......1 i General Maintenance ......................................................................2 Other ............. 21 5.......................................................1 3....................1 Periodical check ....... 20 5.......4......... 5........................................................................3...............1. 7 Multi bypass tray ..............2 3.............................3 3...... Product specification ................................................................................................................................................... 20 Setting in the service mode ...................... 16 Feed roller ... 5............................................1................................................2 5............... 16 Adjustment/Setting 4.........1 5.....................................................................1.3 6....................... 20 SERVICE’S CHOICE ............................1 3.. 1...........................1 How to use the adjustment section . 20 Service mode setting procedure...................................... 7 Adjustment / Setting Troubleshooting Maintenance 3........................................................ 2007 CONTENTS MB-501 General 1......................................................0 Apr......4 3...................................................... 19 Service Mode ......................................3 5.........2 3........... 7 Cleaning parts list ...............4.................................3 3.................... 20 Changing the setting value in service mode functions......... 21 Multiple Bypass main scanning Registration Adjustment ....3..............................................1 Service Mode function tree........... 16 Bypass transport roller/rolls .....................................................................................................................................................................2 3...................... 3 Replacing the separation roller assy ...........2 5.............4. 13 Separation roller........................ 17 Cleaning procedure ..................Field Service Ver......................... 3.............3 Disassembly/Assembly procedure..........................................1 2..............................................................................

.............................. 27 Initial Check Items ....................................1 7.......3..................... 23 Troubleshooting 7....................... 28 7.........................................................Field Service Ver...... 7..................................2 7...1......................1 7..............0 Apr.....................................................1 General 7............................................ 2007 6......................3 Jam Display...................................................................... 26 Solution ..... 27 Misfeed at the multiple bypass paper feed section ........................3........2 MB-501 Multiple bypass mechanical clutch adjustment................2 Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance ii ........... 1.................................................................................................... 25 Display resetting procedure ..................... 25 Sensor layout.................................................. 25 Misfeed display ..

Paper General Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) OHP film Type Thick paper (91 to 157 g/m2) Postcards and labels Envelopes Recycled paper (60 to 90 g/m2) Size Sizes Width Length 10 sheets 100 sheets 90 X 297 mm 140 X 432 mm 20 sheets 100 sheets A3.1 kg (6. B5S. Product specification . Ledger. FLS.75 lb) D. Machine specifications Registration Capacity Power requirements Power consumption Dimensions Mass Center 100 sheets (80 g/m2) DC24 V.25 inch (W) x 17. A5S. 1.5 inch (H) 3. Operating environment • Conforms to the operating environment of the main body. Type Name Installation Multiple bypass tray Screwed to the copier B. 8K. and 16K C.25 inch (D) x 5.Field Service Ver. 16KS. DC5 V (supplied from the copier) 9 W or less 439 mm (W) x 435 mm (D) x 137 mm (H) 17. Letter. A4S. NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice.0 Apr. A5. 1 MB-501 1. Legal. InvoiceS. 2007 1. LetterS. Product specification General A. B4. B5. A4. 11 x 14. Invoice.

1.1. 2007 General MB-501 Blank Page 2 . Product specification Field Service Ver.0 Apr.

Remove two screws [1] and remove the separation roller assy [2].Field Service Ver. 1.1 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) Replacing the separation roller assy A. Remove two screws [1] and remove the lower cover [2].0 Apr.000 prints B. Replacing procedure 1. Replacing procedure 1.000 prints B.1. Periodical check Maintenance 2. [2] 4687F2C526DA 3. Open the right door. Periodical check . Remove the multi bypass tray.2 Replacing the feed roller A.1. 2.7 [1] 2. 2007 2. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Feed roller: Every 150. See P. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Separation roller assy: Every 150. reverse the order of removal.1 2. [1] 2. To reinstall. [2] 4687F2C504DA 3 Maintenance MB-501 2.

and remove the paper feed assy [3]. [1] 4687F2C523DA 4 .2. 2007 3. Snap off three C-rings [1] and slide the shaft to remove the gear [2]. 1. Periodical check [1] MB-501 [1] Field Service Ver. Maintenance [1] [2] 4687F2C522DA 5. Remove two bearings [1] and remove the feed roller assy [2]. disconnect the connector [2]. [3] [2] 4687F2C521DA [2] [1] [1] 4. Remove four screws [1].0 Apr.

Periodical check 6. reverse the order of removal. [3] [2] 4687F2C524DA 7.0 Apr. To reinstall. 1. 2007 [1] 2. Snap off the C-clip [1] and two Crings [2] and remove the feed roller [3].Field Service Ver. 5 Maintenance MB-501 .

6 . MB-501 Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items 3. refer to “SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.1 A. • The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. Other Field Service Ver. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied • Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming loose.0 Apr.3. C. only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint. screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not be removed or loosened. be sure to ground your body. Maintenance D. B. • As a general rule. Red-painted screws • Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. when two or more screws are used for a single part. Variable resistors on board NOTE • Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting. • When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board. 2007 3. It should also be noted that. Removal of PWBs CAUTION • When removing a circuit board or other electrical component. 1.

1 Disassembly/Assembly procedure Multi bypass tray Maintenance A.3.17 3. 1 2 3 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) MB-501 Disassembly/Assembly parts list Section Unit Others Part name Multi bypass tray Paper feed solenoid Paper feed mechanical clutch Ref. page P. Remove the wire saddle [1] and disconnect two connectors [2]. page P.16 P. Open the right cover. Remove two screws [1] and remove the right rear cover [2] of the main body.2.13 3. [1] 4687F2C501DA 7 . 2007 3.12 P.7 P. 1. 1 2 3 Cleaning parts list Section Feed section Transport section Part name Separation roller Feed roller Bypass transport roller/rolls Ref.2 No. Other 3.0 Apr. Removal procedure 1. [2] [1] 4687F2C500DA [2] 2.3 3.Field Service Ver.2.16 P. 3.2 3.1 No.

0 Apr. Maintenance [2] 4687F2C002DA [1] 6. 1. [2] 4687F2C502DA 8 .3. Remove four screws [1] and remove the multiple bypass [2]. [2] 4687F2C001DA [1] 5. Remove two screws [1] and remove the upper cover [2]. Other [1] MB-501 Field Service Ver. Remove two screws [1] and remove the guide plate [2]. 2007 4.

[2] 4687F2C504DA 9 Maintenance MB-501 1. Reinstallation procedure 3. 4687F2C503DA [1] 3. 2007 B. .0 Apr. 1. Remove two screws [1] and remove the right rear cover [2] of the main body. Other [2] [1] 4687F2C500DA [1] [2] 2.Field Service Ver. Remove two screws [1] and remove the lower cover [2]. Remove two screws [1] and remove the upper cover [2].

[1] [2] 4687F2C506DA [2] 6. 2007 4. Remove the screw [1] and remove the rear cover [2]. MB-501 [2] [1] 4687F2C505DA [3] Maintenance 5.3. Other Field Service Ver. NOTE • Put the middle hook [3] of the multiple bypass on the right door. [1] 4687F2C501DA 10 . Install wire saddle [1] and two connectors [2]. 1. Install the multiple bypass [2] and temporarily tighten the four screws [1].0 Apr.

9. MB-501 [2] 4687F2C507DA [1] 4687F2C508DA 10. Firmly tighten the four screws to fix the multiple bypass [1] in position. NOTE • Save the positioning pin that has been removed. Other 7. [1] 4687F2C509DA 11 Maintenance 8. Open the right door and remove the positioning pin.Field Service Ver. 11. 1. . Correctly position the multiple bypass with reference to the positioning pin.0 Apr. Open the right door and install the positioning pin [1] at the position as illustrated. Install the guide plate assy [2] with two screws [1]. Close the right door. 2007 [1] 3.

3. Make the lever [1] contact the gear shaft [2].2 Paper feed solenoid 1.7 [1] 2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the lower cover [2].0 Apr. 14.3. Remove the multi bypass tray. [2] 4687F2C504DA 12 . and upper cover. Loosen the screw [1] shown. Maintenance [2] [1] 4687F2C511DA 15. Other Field Service Ver.3. lower cover. See P. MB-501 [1] 4687F2C510DA [3] 0 mm 13. 2007 12. Reinstall the rear cover. Tighten the screw [3] to fix it. 1.

1. Other 3. [1] [2] 4687F2C514DA 13 Maintenance 4. NOTE • Use care not to lose the two springs. 2007 [1] 3. Remove the paper feed solenoid. Remove four screws [1] and remove feed roller assy [2]. Snap off the E-ring [1] and remove the paper feed mechanical clutch [2].3 Removal and disassembly of the paper feed mechanical clutch 1.12 2.0 Apr.3.Field Service Ver. See P. 5. Remove the screw [3] and remove the paper feed solenoid [4]. NOTE • Do not remove the flapper from the solenoid. MB-501 . Remove two wire saddle [1] and disconnect the connector [2]. [1] [2] 4687F2C512DA [2] [4] [1] [3] 4687F2C513DA 3.

0 Apr. 2007 3. Remove the coupling [1]. Maintenance [1] 4687F2C516DA 5. Remove the torque limiter [1] from the gear. 1. [1] 4687F2C517DA 14 .3. MB-501 [1] 4687F2C515DA 4. Other Field Service Ver. Remove the collar [1].

Other [1] [2] [4] [2] [3] 4687F2C518DA 15 Maintenance MB-501 Precautions for reassembly of the paper feed mechanical clutch • At reassembly. make sure that the protrusions on both ends [2] of the torque limiter [1] fit into the center slit in the collar [3] and coupling [4].0 Apr. 2007 3. 1.Field Service Ver. .

Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 1. Remove the separation roller assy.4. wipe the feed roller [1] clean of dirt. wipe the separation roller [1] clean of dirt.3 2.3 2. Maintenance [1] 4687F2C519DA 3.4. See P. 2007 3. See P. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. [1] 4687F2C520DA 16 . Other Field Service Ver.4 MB-501 Cleaning procedure NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol.1 Separation roller 1.3. Remove the separation roller assy.0 Apr.2 Feed roller 1. 3.

3 Bypass transport roller/rolls 3. 1. wipe the bypass transport roller [1] clean of dirt. Open the right door. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Remove two screws [1] and remove the guide plate [2]. 4687F2C003DA 17 Maintenance 3. [1] 2. [2] 4687F2C502DA [1] 4687F2C527DA [1] 4.0 Apr.Field Service Ver. 2007 3.4. wipe the bypass transport rolls [1] clean of dirt. Other 1. MB-501 .

Other Field Service Ver.0 Apr.3. 2007 Maintenance MB-501 Blank Page 18 . 1.

7. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. 6. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e. 8. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine. Correct paper is being used for printing. Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures.0 Apr. MB-501 Adjustment / Setting 4. PC Drum. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature. use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit. levelness of the installation site. Advance Checks • Before attempting to solve the customer problem.Field Service Ver. etc. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. etc. 2. 4. 5. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. high humidity. parts. The density is properly selected. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. 5. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. ventilation. or related part is dirty. The units. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot.g. 2. direct sunlight. B. 4.. the following advance checks must be made. The Original Glass. slit glass. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. The power supply is properly grounded. A. 10.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. 1. 9. and supplies used for printing (developer. 6. How to use the adjustment section 19 . 2007 4. 3. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON.. 3.Check to see if: 1. Toner is not running out.

20 5. Service Mode Field Service Ver. fold.1 Setting in the service mode SERVICE’S CHOICE A. press the Back key. 2. Select the [LOOP Ad. Select the setting value using [▲ / ▼ / / ] key or the 10-key pad. or misfeed of paper occurs • When variations in the amount of void on the leading edge occurs • The default setting is “0.1. Procedure Press the Utility key. (BYPASS) Ref. 20 . 2. (BYPASS) Functions Use • To adjust the length of the loop formed in the paper before the regist Roller when the Manual Bypass is used. • When a skew feed. To go back to previous screen.1.1 1. select the desired setting value. 2.3.3 1. Validate the selection by pressing the OK key. Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1 The Service mode menu screen will appear.3 5. Service Mode SERVICE’S CHOICE LOOP Ad. • Setting range: -3.0 Apr. 3. 4. MB-501 Service Mode Service mode setting procedure 5. Select the [SERVICE’S CHOICE] and press the OK key.0 mm”. Press the OK key to validate the setting value selected in step 4. Press the following keys in this order. 5.6 mm) Setting/ procedure 1. 2007 5. 1.1 NOTE • Care must be used to ensure that only the personnel who are involved in service jobs know the procedure to enter the service mode. 5.9 to 3. Exiting 5. 5.9 mm (1 step: 0.5. LOOP Ad. Call the SERVICE MODE to the screen. 5. 3. (BYPASS)] and press the OK key.2 • Press the Reset key. page P.1. Using [ ▲ / ▼ ] key. Changing the setting value in service mode functions ▼ ▲ Select the desired item using ▲ / ▼ key. 4. 3. 4.2 Adjustment / Setting Service Mode function tree NOTE • This setting menu contains only the cases in which the MB-501 is mounted.

0 Apr. Select the [TRAY1] and press the OK key. .Field Service Ver. 1. 2007 6. 6. 1. 7. Load A4 paper [1] in the multiple bypass and make a test copy. Load the paper feed tray1 with A4 paper. Select [PATTERN 1] and press OK key. 4. 5. 6.1 Mechanical adjustment MB-501 Multiple Bypass main scanning Registration Adjustment NOTE • This adjustment is to be made when the PH Unit has been replaced. 2. [1] 4687F3C501DA [1] 4687F3C502DA 21 Adjustment / Setting 8. Select the [PRN TEST PATTERN] and press the OK key. Mechanical adjustment 6. then the test pattern will be printed out. Call the SERVICE MODE to the screen. Place the test pattern [1] produced on the original glass. Select the [FUNCTION] and press the OK key. 3.

Turn the screw [1] of the multiple bypass as necessary to adjust the position of the multiple bypass table. Make another copy of the test pattern and check for any error in width A.0 Apr. • If width A on the copy is smaller than width A on the test pattern.6. 1. [1] 4687F3C500DA Adjustment / Setting 11.0 mm MB-501 A 4686F3C500DA 10. 22 . If width A falls outside the specified range. perform the following steps to make an adjustment. 2007 9. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. turn the screw counterclockwise. Check width A on the copy of the test pattern. Specifications: 20 ± 2. turn the screw clockwise. • If width A on the copy is greater than width A on the test pattern.

13 2.2 Multiple bypass mechanical clutch adjustment MB-501 • The assembled position of the collar/coupling on the torque limiter of the paper feed Mechanical clutch is varied so that the clutch operates properly. NOTE • This adjustment is to be made when a paper feed failure occurs in the multiple bypass. 3. Remove the paper feed mechanical clutch. Reinstall the paper feed mechanical clutch and make copies using the multiple bypass. 2007 6. 1.Field Service Ver. repeat steps 1 through 3. Fit the convex part B [5] of the torque limiter [1] to either of three notches [7] of the collar [6] to install. See P.0 Apr. 23 Adjustment / Setting . Fit the convex part [2] of the torque limiter [1] to either of three notches [4] of the coupling [3] to install. If a paper feed failure occurs again. [1] [5] [3] [2] [4] [7] [6] 4687F2C525DA 4. 1. Mechanical adjustment 6.

2007 MB-501 Adjustment / Setting Blank Page 24 .0 Apr. 1.6. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver.

25 Troubleshooting .1 Misfeed display MB-501 4687F4E502DA 7.1. and close the cover. 2007 7. Jam Display • When a paper misfeed occurs.1 Display resetting procedure • Open the corresponding cover. Display message PAPER JAM OPEN 1st SIDE COVER Misfeed/paper location Paper feed section of the multiple bypass P. Jam Display Troubleshooting 7. the error indicator lights up steadily and the display gives a corresponding message. clear the sheet of paper misfed. page 7.Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr.28 Ref.

2007 7.0 Apr. 1. Jam Display Field Service Ver.7.2 MB-501 Sensor layout [1] 4687F4C501DA Troubleshooting [1] Registration sensor (PS1) 26 .

Set as necessary. 27 Troubleshooting . Change the paper. wavy.3 7. 1. Action Is a foreign object present along the paper path. Jam Display 7. Instruct the user in correct paper storage.Field Service Ver. or worn? Are the edge guide and trailing edge stop at the correct position to accommodate the paper? Are the actuators found operational when checked for correct operation? Clean or change the defective roll/roller. paper path deformed or worn? Are the rolls/rollers dirty.3. deformed. Check Item Does the paper meet product specifications? Is paper curled. 2007 7.0 Apr.1 Solution MB-501 Initial Check Items • When a paper misfeed occurs. Correct or change the defective actuator. or is the Clean or change the paper path. Change the paper. or damp. first perform the following initial checks.

Jam Display 7. Action Relevant electrical components Registration sensor (PS1) Paper feed solenoid (SD1) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Operations Control signal — PRCB PJ17PRCB-3 (ON) Location (Electrical components) — bizhub 163/163f/ 181/211/220 C-5 bizhub 163/163f/ 181/211/220 P-4 — 1 2 Initial checks PS1 sensor check 3 4 SD1 operation check Replace PRCB PRCB PJ12PRCB-2 (REM) — Troubleshooting 28 . 1. Detection timing Type Paper feed section misfeed detection Description • The leading edge of the paper does not unblock the registration sensor (PS1) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper feed solenoid (SD1) has been energized. Size error detection • The registration sensor (PS1) is blocked before the lapse of a given period of time.7.2 MB-501 Field Service Ver. 2007 Misfeed at the multiple bypass paper feed section A. B.0 Apr.3. • The registration sensor (PS1) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has unblocked the registration sensor (PS1).

04 Ver.SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE 2007.0 . 1.

• When a page revised in Ver. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised. 2. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual.0 has been changed in Ver. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required. 2.0: The revision marks for Ver.0 only are shown with those for Ver. — Revision mark Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision .0 are left as they are. 3.0: The revision marks for Ver. 2007/04 Date 1. 2. show 1 to the left of the revised section. 3. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. • To indicate clearly a section revised. 3.0 deleted. show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.0 has not been changed in Ver.Revision history After publication of this service manual. 2. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.0 Service manual Ver. Therefore. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted. • When a page revised in Ver.

........................................ 7 Bin switching motor ......2 2....1 3............ 4 2.......3........................................................................................... 4 Paper detecting board.. 9 Disassembly/Assembly procedure...................... 12 Solution......................... Product specification ..0 Apr................................................1 2................................. 1 JS-503 2....2 2........................................... 3 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts)...........1 i Maintenance General Maintenance ... 3..................................................................................... 11 Trouble code ....................... 1....................................................................................................3 Other .. 2007 CONTENTS JS-503 General 1...............................................Field Service Ver.................................... 4 Disassembly/Assembly parts list....................................................2.............................................3...........1 2......................................................................... 3 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ............................... 11 Trouble code list..................................... 14 C0B60: Bin switching motor malfunction...........................3 Malfunction code .........................3............................ 14 Troubleshooting 3.....................................1 2....................................................................3 Troubleshooting 3..... 4 JS drive board ...2 3............ 2..................................................................................3..............................

2007 Maintenance General JS-503 Blank Page Troubleshooting ii .Field Service Ver. 1.0 Apr.

NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice. 75 sheets (other than A4S) C. Product specification .0 Apr. 75 sheets (other than A4S) 10 sheets 20 sheets Upper drawer 100 sheets (A4S). DC5 V (supplied from the copier) 24 W or less D. labels. Type Type Installation Paper storage system Add-on drawer Built into the exit section of the copier Moving drawer system B. Product specification General A. 1. 2007 1. Machine specifications Power requirements Power consumption DC24 V. Recycled paper (60 to 90 g/m2) 50 sheets (other than A4S) Load height up to 22 mm 150 sheets (A4S).Field Service Ver. 1 General JS-503 1. 50 sheets (other than A4S) Load height up to 22 mm Lower drawer 150 sheets (A4S). Operating environment • Conforms to the operating environment of the main body. and envelopes 100 sheets (A4S). Paper Type Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) OHP film Thick paper (91 to 157 g/m2) Postcards.

2007 General JS-503 Blank Page 2 . 1.1.0 Apr. Product specification Field Service Ver.

1. Red-painted screws • Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint. refer to “SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures. when two or more screws are used for a single part. • As a general rule. D. Variable resistors on board Maintenance NOTE • Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting. • When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board. • The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. 3 . It should also be noted that. B. Removal of PWBs CAUTION • When removing a circuit board or other electrical component.0 Apr. screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not be removed or loosened. Other Maintenance 2. C. 2007 2. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied • Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming loose. be sure to ground your body.Field Service Ver.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items JS-503 2. Other A.

[1] 2.4 P. Remove the right cover.7 P.3 2. Disconnect the connector [1]. 1 2 3 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) Disassembly/Assembly parts list Section Board and etc.1 Disassembly/Assembly procedure JS drive board 1.3. [1] 4689F2C500DA 4 . Remove the control panel.2 2. 4.9 2. and remove the total counter. Other Field Service Ver.42 of the main body service manual.1 JS-503 No.48 of the main body service manual.0 Apr. [2] 5. See P. Maintenance 4689F2C001DA 3. 1. 2007 2. disconnect the connector [2]. page P.2.2. Other JS drive board Paper detecting board Bin switching motor Part name Ref. Remove the screw [1]. See P. See P.43 of the main body service manual. Remove the front cover.

[1] 4689F2C004DA 5 JS-503 .0 Apr. Maintenance [2] 4689F2C003DA 9. 1. Remove the screw [1] and remove the sensor assy mounting bracket [2]. Remove the harness from two edge covers [1] and remove the sensor assy [3]. Disconnect the connector [1]. Other 6.Field Service Ver. 2007 2. [2] [1] 4689F2C002DA [1] [3] 7. Disconnect two connectors [1]. 8.

1. Disconnect four connectors [1] from the JS drive board. Disconnect the connector [1] from the main body. JS-503 [1] 4689F2C005DA [2] 11. 2007 10.2.0 Apr. Maintenance [1] 4689F2C006DA 12. [1] 4689F2C505DA 6 . Other Field Service Ver. Remove two screws [1] and remove the JS drive board assy [2].

See P. [1] [3] 4689F2C506DA 2.2 Paper detecting board 1. Holding onto both ends. Disconnect the connector [1]. and remove the JS drive board [3]. two PWB supports [2].0 Apr. 2007 [2] 2.Field Service Ver. Maintenance 4689F2C001DA [1] 2.42 of the main body service manual. Other 13. Remove the control panel. 1. [1] 4689F2C007DA 7 JS-503 . remove the indicator lamp cover [1].3. 3. Remove two screws [1].

Maintenance [2] [1] 4689F2C009DA [1] 6. 2007 4. Other Field Service Ver. JS-503 [2] [1] 4689F2C008DA 5. Press down the tab [1] and remove the paper detecting board [2]. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the paper detecting board [2]. 1. Remove the screw [1] and remove the paper detecting board assy [2].2. [2] 4689F2C010DA 8 .0 Apr.

Remove the control panel. Remove the screw [1]. Disconnect the connector [1].43 of the main body service manual. disconnect the connector [2]. See P.3. Other [1] 2. and remove the total counter. 2007 2.42 of the main body service manual. Remove two screws [1] and remove the sensor assy mounting plate [2]. 4.3 Bin switching motor 2.48 of the main body service manual. See P.0 Apr. Remove the right cover. 4689F2C001DA [2] 5. [1] 4689F2C002DA 9 Maintenance 3. 1. Remove the front cover. JS-503 1.Field Service Ver. See P. . [1] 4689F2C500DA [2] 6.

2. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove two screws [2] and remove the bin switching motor [3]. Take the harness out of the two edge covers [2] and remove the sensor assy. [1] JS-503 [3] [2] 4689F2C003DA [3] [1] 9. Other Field Service Ver. Disconnect two connectors [1]. Maintenance [2] 4689F2C011DA 10 . 2007 7. 1.0 Apr. 8.

Field Service Ver. gives the corresponding malfunction code on the touch panel.1 Trouble code JS-503 4689F4C500DA 3. Malfunction code Troubleshooting 3. on detecting a malfunction. 2007 3. 11 Troubleshooting . 1. Malfunction code • The main unit's cpu performs a self-diagnostics function that.0 Apr.

it is regarded as abnormal. the bin switching motor (M1) starts turning backward. • If the lower home position sensor (PS2) does not go HIGH for a given period of time after the bin switching motor (M1) has started turning backward. If the upper home position sensor (PS1) does not go LOW for a given period of time after the bin switching motor (M1) has started turning backward. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. If the upper home position sensor (PS1) does not go LOW after the motor has started turning backward. it is regarded as abnormal. If the lower home position sensor (PS2) is LOW during an initial operation: • If the upper home position sensor (PS1) does not go LOW for a given period of time after the bin switching motor (M1) has started turning backward. it is regarded as abnormal.0 Apr. it is regarded as abnormal. If the lower home position sensor (PS2) does not go HIGH for a given period of time after the bin switching motor (M1) has started turning backward.2 JS-503 Trouble code list Description Detection timing If the upper home position sensor is LOW during an initial operation: • The lower home position sensor (PS2) is LOW when the bin switching motor (M1) starts turning forward. • If the lower home position sensor (PS2) does not go LOW for a given period of time after the bin switching motor (M1) has started turning forward. 1. • If the upper home position sensor (PS1) does not go HIGH for a given period of time after the bin switching motor (M1) has started turning forward. • When the lower home position sensor (PS2) goes LOW. Code C0B60 Bin switching motor malfunction Troubleshooting 12 . it is regarded as abnormal. • When the lower home position sensor (PS2) goes LOW.3. the bin switching motor (M1) starts turning backward. the bin switching motor (M1) is kept deenergized for a given period of time and then energized again to turn backward. it is regarded as abnormal. 2007 3.

Field Service Ver. it is regarded as abnormal. C0B60 Bin switching motor malfunction 13 Troubleshooting JS-503 . • When the lower home position sensor (PS2) goes LOW. it is regarded as abnormal. the bin switching motor (M1) starts turning backward. If the lower home position sensor (PS2) does not go HIGH for a given period of time after the bin switching motor (M1) has started turning backward. • When the lower home position sensor (PS2) goes LOW. If the upper home position sensor (PS1) does not go LOW after the motor has started turning backward. 1. the bin switching motor (M1) starts turning backward.0 Apr. Malfunction code Detection timing If both the upper home position sensor (PS1) and the lower home position sensor (PS2) are HIGH during an initial operation: • If the lower home position sensor (PS2) does not go LOW for a given period of time after the bin switching motor (M1) has started turning forward. the bin switching motor (M1) is kept deenergized for a given period of time and then energized again to turn backward. it is regarded as abnormal. 2007 Code Description 3. If the upper home position sensor (PS1) does not go LOW for a given period of time after the bin switching motor (M1) has started turning backward.

3. M1 operation check Control signal — — — Location (Electrical components) — — — bizhub 163/163f/ 181/211/220 L-2 bizhub 163/163f/ 181/211/220 P-1 bizhub 163/163f/ 181/211/220 P-1 — — 1 2 3 4 JSDB PJ2JSDB-1 to 4 5 PS1 sensor check JSDB PJ4DSDB-3 (ON) 6 PS2 sensor check Change JSDB Change PRCB JSDB PJ4DSDB-6 (ON) — — Troubleshooting 7 8 14 . 1.0 Apr. Malfunction code Field Service Ver.1 JS-503 Solution C0B60: Bin switching motor malfunction Relevant electrical parts Bin switching motor (M1) Upper home position sensor (PS1) Lower home position sensor (PS2) JS drive board (JSDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check sensor connectors for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check M1 for correct drive coupling and correct as necessary.3. Check M1 connectors for proper connection and correct as necessary.3 3. 2007 3.

1.04 Ver.0 .SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE 2007.

• When a page revised in Ver. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.Revision history After publication of this service manual.0: The revision marks for Ver.0 has not been changed in Ver.0 deleted. 2. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required. the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.0: The revision marks for Ver.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2. show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page. 2007/04 Date 1. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. — Revision mark Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision . 3. • To indicate clearly a section revised. 3. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. show 1 to the left of the revised section.0 are left as they are. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted. 3. Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised. 2. • When a page revised in Ver. Therefore.0 Service manual Ver.

.................................................................................... 6 Disassembly/Assembly procedure............Field Service Ver....................... 9 4............2 Troubleshooting 4............................................................................................................. Product specifications ..................1 3.... 2007 CONTENTS SF-501 General 1.2 3...................................................................... 4 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ...........3.......................................................... 2.............................. 1 SF-501 2............0 Apr.......................... 9 C0B80: Shift motor malfunction .......1 3.................1 3........ 4................................... 3 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ......................3..........1 Troubleshooting i Maintenance General Maintenance ...........1 3... 5 Disassembly/Assembly parts list.... 1.......... 9 Solution.......................................3 Periodical check ......1........................... 5 3............................................................ 4 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts)...... 5 SF drive board .............................................................1 Malfunction code ............................................................. 5 Shift motor..............................................2.................................................................................................................................. 3 Other ........................................ 3..................................

0 Apr.Field Service Ver. 1. 2007 Maintenance General SF-501 Blank Page Troubleshooting ii .

SF-501 1.Field Service Ver. 2007 1. Product specifications General A. Operating environment • Conforms to the operating environment of the main body. 1. Machine specifications Shifting amount Paper capacity Power consumption 28 mm 250 sheets Less than 63 W NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice. Product specifications . 1 General B.0 Apr.

Product specifications Field Service Ver.0 Apr. 2007 General SF-501 Blank Page 2 . 1.1.

2007 2. 1.1 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) SF-501 2.0 Apr. Periodical check Maintenance 2. 3 Maintenance .Field Service Ver. Periodical check • Periodically replaced parts are not employed.

C. 2007 3. • The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.1 A. Red-painted screws • Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. 4 . when two or more screws are used for a single part. • When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board. Maintenance D. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied • Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming loose. 1. be sure to ground your body. Variable resistors on board NOTE • Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting. screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not be removed or loosened. B. Other Field Service Ver. only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint. SF-501 Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items 3.3. refer to “SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures. It should also be noted that.0 Apr. • As a general rule. Removal of PWBs CAUTION • When removing a circuit board or other electrical component.

43 of the main body service manual.5 P.0 Apr.2. 3. 1.3. See P. 2. Shift motor SF drive board Part name Ref.6 3.48 of the main body service manual. Maintenance 4. remove the screw [2] and remove the shift motor assy [3]. Other 3.2 3. Remove two screws [1] and remove the shift motor [2].1 Disassembly/Assembly procedure Shift motor 1. 1 2 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) SF-501 Disassembly/Assembly parts list Section Others Board and etc.3 3.Field Service Ver. Remove the right cover. Remove the control panel.42 of the main body service manual. [2] 4690F2C001DA 5 . page P. See P. [1] [2] [3] 4690F2C502DA [1] 5. 2007 3.1 No. See P. Disconnect two connectors [1]. Remove the front cover.

Disconnect two connectors [1].3. 3. See P. Remove two screws [1] and remove SF drive board assy [2].48 of the main body service manual. [1] Maintenance 4690F2C503DA [1] 5. See P. Remove the front cover. 4. See P. Disconnect the connector [1] from SF drive board. [1] 4690F2C505DA 6 . Other 3. 2. 4690F2C504DA [2] 6. 2007 SF drive board 1.2 SF-501 Field Service Ver. 1. Remove the control panel.43 of the main body service manual.42 of the main body service manual. Remove the right cover.3.0 Apr.

[3] [1] 4690F2C501DA 7 Maintenance . 2007 [1] 3. Other 7.Field Service Ver. two PWB supports [2]. and the SF drive board [3].0 Apr. Disconnect two connectors [1]. Remove two screws [1]. 1. SF-501 4690F2C500DA [2] 8.

1. 2007 Maintenance SF-501 Blank Page 8 . Other Field Service Ver.3.0 Apr.

1. Malfunction code .Field Service Ver. Change MFPB. Check M1 connectors for proper connection and correct as necessary. Detection timing Trouble code Description • The home sensor (PS1) is LOW at a timing immediately before the shift motor (M1) starts turning backward. — — — SFDB PJ2SFDB-1 to 4 SFDB PJ3SFDB-3 (ON) — — — K to L-4 K to L-4 to 5 — — 9 Troubleshooting — SF-501 4.0 Apr.1 4. C0B80 B. Action Relevant Electrical Components Shift motor (M1) Home sensor (PS1) SF drive board (SFDB) MFP board (MFPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Operations Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Check PS1 connectors for proper connection and correct as necessary. 2007 4. Check M1 for correct drive coupling and correct as necessary. • The home sensor (PS1) is LOW after the lapse of a given period of time after the shift motor (M1) has started turning backward.1 Solution C0B80: Shift motor malfunction A.1. M1 operation check PS1 sensor check Change SFDB. Malfunction code Troubleshooting 4.

1.0 Apr.4. 2007 SF-501 Blank Page Troubleshooting 10 . Malfunction code Field Service Ver.

0 . 1.04 Ver.SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE 2007.

the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance.0 are left as they are. 2. show 1 to the left of the revised section. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted. — Revision mark Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision . Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised.Revision history After publication of this service manual. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0: The revision marks for Ver. 2. 2.0 Service manual Ver. 3.0: The revision marks for Ver. 2007/04 Date 1.0 deleted. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. 3. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. • To indicate clearly a section revised. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. • When a page revised in Ver. Therefore.0 only are shown with those for Ver. • When a page revised in Ver. show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.

................ 12 Utility Mode function tree .....................2 3............................................................................. 11 Utility Mode ............................................................................... 9 Disassembly/Assembly procedure................................................ 2....................................................................................................2..... 1 Network printing (NC-503)......................... 3............................................................1 2.............................................................................2 How to use the adjustment section ......... 13 ADMIN..........................2....................1 Adjustment/Setting 4.................2 Setting in the UTILITY MODE.................... 5...................................................................................................................................................................................................3 5.. 10 Image controller/Network interface card ............... 1....................... 2007 CONTENTS IC-206/NC-503 General 1... 5 2..................................... 7 Firmware rewriting ............................1 5....................................................... 10 3.... 1....................1............................1 6.............2.. 1 Printing (IC-206) ......... 14 Troubleshooting 6.................... MANAGEMENT. 13 Changing the setting value in UTILITY MODE functions .............2.....3............... 5...... 1 General Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance IC-206/NC-503 Maintenance 2................................... 21 Troubleshooting procedure overview .................3 5..........................................................................0 Apr...................................................................................................................................................................................... 21 i ......................................................2...................1 1................................1 3.......................2 Other ....... 13 Procedure ....... 3 Installing the driver ............................1 2...............3 Product specifications ...................1 5.............................................................Field Service Ver............1 2................................ 3 Updating method.......... 14 SCAN SETTING ........................................................................2................ 21 Troubleshooting procedure chart ..... 3 Preparations for firmware rewriting ..............2 Troubleshooting ................................. 5 Procedure when upgrading the firmware has failed..............3..........................................2 Firmware upgrade ............ 12 Utility mode function setting procedure................ 6............................ 1 Scan to E-mail/Scan to Server (FTP) (IC-206/NC-503)....................................................................................................... 9 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ......................2 1........... 20 5.....................1 5...2 5................ 13 Exiting ................................

Field Service Ver....3 IC-206/NC-503 Action taken if network print cannot be done ....0 Apr. 1..................................... 22 Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General ii ........ 2007 6....

Product specifications 1.1 Product specifications Printing (IC-206) bizhub 163 16 ppm (when printing on A4/Letter paper at 600 x 600 dpi) bizhub 181 18 ppm (when printing on A4/Letter paper at 600 x 600 dpi) bizhub 211/220 21 ppm (when printing on A4 paper at 600 x 600 dpi) 20 ppm (when printing on Letter paper at 600 x 600 dpi) Ethernet 10/100Base T /TX (RJ-45) Compatible USB Revision 2. 802. Raw Socket. Driver-compatible operatWindows 2000 (Service Pack 4 or later). 600 x 600 dpi E-mail format: MIME Attached file format: TIFF.3 SNAP. PCL6 emulation 53 Western-language fonts Print speed *1 Interface TCP/IP service Netware services Printer language Font Windows Server 2003. Windows 98 SE or ing systems Windows Terminal Server (Windows 2000 Server/Windows Server 2003) *1: The print speed is measured under the following printing conditions. Ipr/lpd.2. TCP/IP FTP transmission: FTP. Windows XP (Service Pack 2 or later). IPP. PDF MH. MR. DHCP. AutoDetect) Interface TCP/IP service Netware services 1. 802. MMR Ethernet LAN (10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX connections) Communication protocol Resolution Data format Compression encoding method Network 1 General IC-206/NC-503 General . SLP. HTTPd1.Field Service Ver. BootP. BootP.3. Ethernet-II. Ipr/lpd.3. DHCP. • Paper is fed from Tray 1. TCP/IP 150 x 150 dpi. 1.1. 1. 1. NDPS Frame Type (802. HTTPd1. NDS. NDS.3 SNAP. Ethernet-II. Pserver mode. 802. Nprinter mode.2. AutoIP Bindery. NDPS Frame Type (802. 802.0 Apr.1. IPP.3 Scan to E-mail/Scan to Server (FTP) (IC-206/NC-503) E-mail transmission: SMTP.0 ARP. 2007 1. AutoDetect) PCL5e. Raw Socket. Windows Me. SLP.2 Network printing (NC-503) Ethernet 10/100Base T /TX (RJ-45) ARP. Nprinter mode. 300 x 300 dpi. AutoIP Bindery. Pserver mode.

2007 General IC-206/NC-503 Blank Page 2 .1.0 Apr. 1. Product specifications Field Service Ver.

Installation of the GDI printer/TWAIN driver For Windows XP Start the host computer. and then click [OK]. Click [Next] and then [Finish]. and then click [OK]. Use a USB cable to connect the machine to host computer. Under “Search for the best driver in these locations”. 7.1. Firmware upgrade 2. • If the TWAIN driver has already been installed.1 2. 8.0 Apr. proceed with the section on “Firmware rewriting” to upgrade the firmware. Click [Browse]. choose “Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended)”. Click [OK]. 8. and then click [Next]. 2. In the “Found New Hardware Wizard” dialog box. (1) 1. In the “Install Hardware Device Printers” dialog box. Use a USB cable to connect the machine to host computer. and then click [Next]. 3 Maintenance IC-206/NC-503 Maintenance . 2007 2. choose “Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)”. 6. See P. The “Found New Hardware Wizard” dialog box will appear again: Repeat steps 4~7 to install all drivers. and copy them to PC. Turn on the power switch of the machine. For Windows 2000 Prepare the files necessary for upgrading the firmware. 4.5 A. and then click [Browse]. 3. 10. continue following the instructions in the dialog boxes that will appear until the “Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard” dialog box appears. The “Found New Hardware Wizard” dialog box will appear. specify “\(name of any given language)\Win2000” in the folder in which the TWAIN driver is stored. • If the TWAIN driver has not been installed. Turn on the power switch of the machine. 3. use the procedure below to install it. 5. 2.1 Firmware upgrade Preparations for firmware rewriting Installing the driver NOTE • The TWAIN driver must previously be installed in the host computer that is used to upgrade the firmware. choose “Include this location in the search”. 7. and then click [Next].Field Service Ver. Specify “\(name of any given language)\WinXP” in the folder in which the TWAIN driver is stored. Start the host computer. In the “Locate Driver Files” dialog box. 6. 4. The “Found New Hardware Wizard” dialog box will appear again: Repeat steps 4~8 to install all drivers. 9. Click [Finish]. choose “Specify a location”. 2. 1. (2) 1. 5. Then.

Field Service Ver. 9. Choose “Specify a location”. and then click [Next]. Click [Next]. Start the host computer. continue following the instructions in the dialog boxes that will appear until the “Finish” button appears. click [Next]. in the dialog box that will then appear. and then click [OK]. Firmware upgrade (3) 1.0 Apr. Turn on the power switch of the machine. 7. Maintenance IC-206/NC-503 4 . 10. 2. choose “Search for the best driver for your device (recommended)”. 2007 6. With Windows Me. and copy them to PC. Then. 4. Specify “\(name of any given language)\Win9X” in the folder in which the TWAIN driver is stored. Use a USB cable to connect the machine to host computer. Click [Finish]. The “Add New Hardware Wizard” dialog box will appear. 8.2. and then click [Next]. 1. The “Add New Hardware Wizard” dialog box will appear again: Repeat steps 4~8 to install all drivers. choose “Specify the location of the driver (Advanced)”. For Windows Me/98SE Prepare the files necessary for upgrading the firmware. With Windows 98. 3. 5. Then. and then click [Browse].

1. Connect the machine to the host computer using a USB cable. Click the [Browse] button.) 5. Double-click the “Update” file in the “Update Software” folder. Open “Properties” of “My Computer. Then. 3. A09AF2C623DA 5 . 6. Start the host computer. A09AF2C622DA 7. Firmware upgrade 2. Turn ON the power switch of the machine. 2007 2.2 2. The “TenryuS Update F/W-VXXX” screen will appear.” Then select System Properties/Hardware/Device Manager/Imaging devices to check that the “XXXXXXXXXXX” (Model Name) icon has been added. (Wait until the hardware is detected. 2. Copy the “Update Software” folder and “Update” file to drive C.) 4. (Copy them into the highest directory on drive C.0 Apr.Field Service Ver.2.1 Firmware rewriting Updating method IC-206/NC-503 Maintenance A09AF2E627DA 1. select the “Update” file that has been copied onto drive C in step 3.

2007 Maintenance IC-206/NC-503 8.) 9. 6 . (Wait until data transfer is completed. Click the [OK] button to quit “TenryuS Update F/W-VXXX. When the following message appears in the display.0 Apr. Turn OFF and ON the power switch of the machine. it indicates that upgrading of the firmware has been completed. A09AF2E636DA NOTE • NEVER turn OFF and ON the power switch as long as the above screens are being displayed.2. 10. A09AF2E637DA 11. Click the [Update] button to start the transfer of the firmware data. and confirm the firmware version. Check the display for status of the firmware upgrading sequence. 1. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver.” A09AF2C626DA 12.

1. Prepare the USB device driver (TWAIN/printer driver) for the firmware upgrade. (The new hardware wizard dialog box will appear. 2. (Copy them into the highest directory on drive C. (Wait until data transfer is completed. A09AF2C623DA 9.2 Procedure when upgrading the firmware has failed 2. Start the host computer. Click the [Browse] button.0 Apr. Turn ON the power switch of the machine while pressing the Utility key on the control panel. The “TenryuS Update F/W-VXXX” screen will appear. Check to make sure that [TENRYU-S BOOTROM] is displayed on the control panel. 2007 2. select the “Update” file that has been copied onto drive C in step 5. Double-click the “Update” file in the “Update Software” folder.) 7. Firmware upgrade NOTE • Perform the following procedure only when upgrading from PC using ordinary USB connection has failed and the machine has not started properly. and install the driver that has been copied onto the host computer in step 1. 5. Click the [Update] button to start the transfer of the firmware data. • Prepare the special USB device driver because it is not possible to upgrade the firmware with the usual TWAIN/printer driver.) 6. Connect the machine to the host computer using a USB cable. and copy the USB device driver to the host computer. 3. Then.2. 1.) 7 Maintenance IC-206/NC-503 . A09AF2E638DA 4.Field Service Ver. Copy the “Update Software” folder and “Update” file to drive C. A09AF2C622DA 8.

1. 8 . it indicates that upgrading of the firmware has been completed.” A09AF2C626DA 13. When the following message appears in the display. IC-206/NC-503 A09AF2E636DA Maintenance NOTE • NEVER turn OFF and ON the power switch as long as the above screens are being displayed.2. 11. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. Click the [OK] button to quit “TenryuS Update F/W-VXXX. Turn OFF and ON the power switch of the machine. 2007 10. A09AF2E637DA 12. and confirm the firmware version. Check the display for status of the firmware upgrading sequence.0 Apr.

1. Red-painted screws • Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. refer to “SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures. 3. • The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. C. B. Variable resistors on board NOTE • Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting.Field Service Ver. Other 3. only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint.1 Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items IC-206/NC-503 Maintenance A. 9 . Removal of PWBs CAUTION • When removing a circuit board or other electrical component. It should also be noted that. D. screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not be removed or loosened. when two or more screws are used for a single part.0 Apr. 2007 3. • When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board. • As a general rule. be sure to ground your body. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied • Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming loose.

2. Remove nine screws [1] and then remove the rear cover [2] of the main body. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the image controller or network interface card [2]. 2007 3. [1] A0CJF2C508DA [2] 3. 1.2 IC-206/NC-503 Disassembly/Assembly procedure Image controller/Network interface card [2] 3.3. Other Field Service Ver. NOTE • Make sure that the screws illustrated right with arrows have washers when installing.1 [1] 1.0 Apr. [1] 4688F2C517DA [1] Maintenance 2. Remove two screws [1]. [1] A0CJF2C502DA 10 .

etc. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. direct sunlight. the following advance checks must be made. 2. 1. or related part is dirty. The density is properly selected. 10. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature. How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine. 9. 8. The units. The Original Glass. The power supply is properly grounded. Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e. Advance Checks • Before attempting to solve the customer problem. etc. 11 Adjustment / Setting IC-206/NC-503 Adjustment/Setting . parts. 3. How to use the adjustment section 4. slit glass. 7. A. Toner is not running out.. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field.0 Apr. PC Drum. 6.Field Service Ver. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. levelness of the installation site. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. 3. 2007 4. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. and supplies used for printing (developer. 6. elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). 5.. 4. 2. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot. use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit. Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. 4. Correct paper is being used for printing. B. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image.Check to see if: 1.g. ventilation. 5. high humidity. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it.

1 • Utility mode is used to make settings for the utility functions.15 P.18 P.17 P. MANAGEMENT NETWORK SETTING IP ADDRESS SETTING DNS CONFIG.20 P.18 P.19 P.15 P. page P. POP3 PORT NO.18 P.15 P.18 P.14 P.16 P.16 P. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 12 .15 P.16 P. GATEWAY TX *1 WEB SETTING LPD SETTING SLP SETTING SNMP SETTING E-MAIL SETTING 1 SENDER NAME E-MAIL ADDERSS SMTP SERVER ADDR.5. UTILITY MODE ADMIN. POP3 TIMEOUT POP3 ACCOUNT POP3 PASSWORD AUTO RECEPTION *1 REPLY ADDRESS *1 HEADER PRINT *1 USER SETTING NTP SERVER ADDRESS *2 TIME ZONE *2 SCAN SETTING RESOLUTION IMAGE FORMAT CODING METHOD *1: FIt will be displayed only when the FK-506 is mounted.16 P.19 P.20 Adjustment / Setting POP BEFORE SMTP E-MAIL MODE *1 E-MAIL SETTING 2 POP3 SERVER ADDR.20 P. 2007 5.15 P.15 P.18 P.14 P.0 Apr. 1. NOTE • The setting menu contains only the cases in which the Image Controller (IC-206) or Network Interface Card (NC-503) is mounted. SMTP TIMEOUT TEXT INSERT DEFAULT SUBJECT Ref.17 P. IC-206/NC-503 Utility Mode Utility Mode function tree 5. SMTP PORT NO.19 P. *2: FIt will be displayed only when the FK-506 is unmounted.16 P.19 P.19 P.16 P.

3 1. 5. Select the setting value using [▲ / ▼ / / ] key or the 10-key pad.0 Apr. 13 Adjustment / Setting . 4. 2. Changing the setting value in UTILITY MODE functions ▼ ▲ Select the desired item using [ ▲ / ▼ ] key.1 Utility mode function setting procedure Procedure IC-206/NC-503 1. Press the Utility key.2 5. 2. Utility Mode 5. press the Back key. 1. Validate the selection by pressing the OK key. 5. To go back to previous screen.Field Service Ver.2 Exiting • Press the Reset key.2.2. 2007 5. The UTILITY MODE screen will appear.2. 3.

• Use this function when [SPECIFY] is selected for [IP ADDRESS SETTING]. the IP address is automatically acquired from the DHCP server. NETWORK SETTING (1) IP ADDRESS SETTING Functions Use • This function is used to specify the IP address for the copier. [0 to 255].1 A. “AUTO” SPECIFY Setting/ Procedure • If [AUTO] is selected. select [ENABLE]. • The default setting is “AUTO”. NOTE • Please consult customer’s network administrator for information about the IP address to use. • SUBNET MASK Functions Use • This function is used to specify the subnet mask value for the network. NOTE • Please consult customer’s network administrator for information about the subnet mask to use. enter the IP address of the DNS server. [0 to 255] Setting/ Procedure • GATEWAY Adjustment / Setting Functions Use • This function is used to specify the default gateway (IP address) of a router on the network. • IP address version 4 format [0 to255]. MANAGEMENT 5. select [DISABLE]. 1. “DISABLE” ENABLE 14 . 2007 5.5. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. If you are using the DNS server of an Internet service provider (ISP) or some other DNS server located outside your local network. [0 to 255]. NOTE • Please consult customer’s network administrator for details. • If the DNS server is located within your local network. the screen for entering the IP address appears. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is “DISABLE”. • If [SPECIFY] is selected. [1 to 255] (2) DNS CONFIG.0 Apr.3 IC-206/NC-503 Setting in the UTILITY MODE ADMIN. NOTE • Please consult customer’s network administrator for information about the gateway to use. Setting/ Procedure • IP address version 4 format [1 to 126. If there is a DNS server on your network. 128 to 254]. [0 to 255].3. • Use this function when [SPECIFY] is selected for [IP ADDRESS SETTING]. Functions Use • This function is used to enable or disable the DNS (Domain Name System) setting. [0 to 255].

Field Service Ver. • The default setting is “DISABLE”. “DISABLE” ENABLE 5. • The default setting is “ENABLE”.0 Apr. 15 Adjustment / Setting IC-206/NC-503 . 1. Utility Mode Setting/ Procedure (4) WEB SETTING Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function is used to enable access to Page Scope Web Connection. NOTE • FIt will be displayed only when the FK-506 is mounted. DISABLE “ENABLE” (6) SLP SETTING Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function is used to set the protocol that enables the function such as search of services on TCP/IP network or auto setting of client. • The default setting is “ENABLE”. DISABLE “ENABLE” (5) LPD SETTING Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function is used to set the protocol that makes a printing via TCP/IP network. DISABLE “ENABLE” (7) SNMP SETTING Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function is used to set the control protocol on TCP/IP network. • The default setting is “ENABLE”. • The default setting is “ENABLE”. E-MAIL SETTING 1 (1) SENDER NAME Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function is used to specify the sender's name. 2007 (3) GATEWAY TX Functions Use • This function is used to enable the direct fax function. DISABLE “ENABLE” B. • Up to 20 characters can be entered for the sender name.

] must have been specified before specifying the host name for the SMTP server. when sending scan data as an E-mail attachment. 1.5. • The default setting is “60sec. NOTE • Please consult customer's network administrator for information about the email address to use. Setting/ Procedure (3) SMTP SERVER ADDR. Functions Use • This function is used to enter the port number (1 to 65535) for the SMTP server. • The [DNS CONFIG. NOTE • Please consult customer's network administrator for information about the port number to use. NOTE • Please consult customer's network administrator for information about the IP address to use.” (30-300sec) (6) TEXT INSERT Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function is used to specify whether or not to insert text explaining that an image has been attached to an e-mail message. when sending scan data as an e-mail attachment. • Up to 64 characters can be entered for the sender address. “OFF” ON (7) DEFAULT SUBJECT Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function is used to specify the default subject line.0 Apr. • Up to 64 characters can be entered for the host name. 16 . • The default setting is “OFF”. 2007 • This function is used to specify the e-mail address of the sender. Functions Use • This function is used to enter the IP address or host name of an SMTP server. (1-65535) Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure (5) SMTP TIMEOUT Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function is used to specify the length of time (in seconds) before the connection to the SMTP server times out. • Up to 20 characters can be entered for the default subject. Setting/ Procedure (4) SMTP PORT NO. Utility Mode (2) E-MAIL ADDERSS IC-206/NC-503 Functions Use Field Service Ver. • The default setting is “25”.

1. B4. “OFF” ON 5. “BASIC” ADVANCED Description BASIC A4 STD/TEXT. Utility Mode • When [ON] is selected. that particular transmission is carried out with the values selected in E-Mail mode set as default both for [BASIC] and [ADVANCED] mode.) Coding method: Transmitted as MH at all times • The following operations are performed if [ADVANCED] is selected. [FINE/TEXT] is the best possible resolution. 2007 (8) POP BEFORE SMTP Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function is used to set whether or not to use POP before SMTP.Field Service Ver. Paper size: Scans a size larger than A4 Transmitted with data reduced to A4 Scans a size smaller than A4 Data transmitted as A4 Resolution: [FINE/TEXT] or [STD/TEXT] is specified using the Quality key or other function Transmitted with the selected resolution [S-FINE/TEXT] is specified using the Quality key or other function Transmitted in [FINE/TEXT] (In [BASIC] mode. set the time (second) for POP BEFORE SMTP. • The default setting is BASIC. MMR Function Maximum TX size Resolution to be transmitted Coding method NOTE • If the settings are not changed for IFAX transmission. The default setting is “5sec”. Selecting [SFINE/TEXT] is not accepted and data is transmitted as [FINE/TEXT] even if [SFINE/TEXT] is selected. MR. A3 FINE/TEXT. (0-60sec) (9) E-MAIL MODE Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function is used to specify the default settings for the Basic and Advanced transmission modes when sending a document by Internet fax (using the 10 key pad to enter the destination). S-FINE/TEXT MH. • The default setting is “OFF”. Paper size: Scans A4/B4/A3 size Data transmitted as the same size as the original Scans a size smaller than A4 Data transmitted as A4 Resolution: Resolution is specified using the Quality key or other function Transmitted with the selected resolution Coding method: Transmitted by the selected coding method (MH/MR/MMR) • FIt will be displayed only when the FK-506 is mounted. 17 Adjustment / Setting IC-206/NC-503 . • The following operations are performed if [BASIC] is selected. FINE/TEXT MH ADVANCED A4.0 Apr.

NOTE • Please consult customer's network administrator for information about the password to use. Setting/ Procedure (5) POP3 PASSWORD Functions Use • This function is used to enter the password associated with the account name used to log in to the POP3 server. 1. • Up to 64 characters can be entered for the account name. NOTE • Please consult customer's network administrator for information about the IP address to use. (30-300sec) Adjustment / Setting (4) POP3 ACCOUNT Functions Use • This function is used to enter the account name used to log on to the POP3 server. (1-65535) Setting/ Procedure (3) POP3 TIMEOUT Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function is used to specify the length of time (in seconds) before the connection to the POP3 server times out. • The default setting is “110”. • The default setting is “60sec”. 18 . • The [DNS CONFIG. Setting/ Procedure • Up to 32 characters can be entered for the password. E-MAIL SETTING 2 (1) POP3 SERVER ADDR.0 Apr. Functions Use • This function is used to enter the port number for the POP3 server. • Up to 64 characters can be entered for the host name.] must have been specified before specifying the host name for the POP3 server. Setting/ Procedure (2) POP3 PORT NO. NOTE • Please consult customer's network administrator for information about the port number to use.5. Utility Mode C. 2007 IC-206/NC-503 • This function is used to enter the IP address or host name of an POP3 server. NOTE • Please consult customer's network administrator for information about the account name to use. Functions Use Field Service Ver.

and press OK key. D. • Up to 64 characters can be entered for the reply address. (2) TIME ZONE Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function is used to set the time gap from the standard time added to the mail header at mail sending.Field Service Ver. 19 Adjustment / Setting “OFF” ON IC-206/NC-503 . when Auto Reception is enabled. (7) REPLY ADDRESS Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function is used to enter the e-mail address to be used when sending notification of an error. and press OK key. NOTE • FIt will be displayed only when the FK-506 is unmounted. (1-60min) NOTE • FIt will be displayed only when the FK-506 is mounted. 2007 (6) AUTO RECEPTION Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 5. NOTE • FIt will be displayed only when the FK-506 is unmounted. NOTE • FIt will be displayed only when the FK-506 is mounted. • Select the corresponding time zone. NOTE • FIt will be displayed only when the FK-506 is mounted. (8) HEADER PRINT Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function is used to specify whether or not to print header information when printing E-mails that have been received. • The default setting is “OFF”. 1. • This function is used to set the precise time from the NTP server. The default setting is “15 min”. Utility Mode • This function is used to specify the time interval (in minutes) for checking E-mail. USER SETTING (1) NTP SERVER ADDRESS Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • This function is used to enter NTP server address. • The default setting is OFF. set the interval time (minute) to check a mail.0 Apr. • Input the address of NTP server using the 10-key. • This function is used to change the time gap from the standard time. “OFF” ON • When [ON] is selected. if an error occurs while receiving an Internet fax.

RESOLUTION Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • The default settings for resolution used by the scan to e-mail functions can be specified. 2007 SCAN SETTING A. CODING METHOD Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • The default settings for coding method. 1. “TIFF” PDF C. Utility Mode 5. IMAGE FORMAT Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • The default settings for data format used by the scan to e-mail functions can be specified.3. “MH” MR MMR Adjustment / Setting 20 . • The default setting is “300x300dpi”.5. 150x150dpi “300x300dpi” 600x600dpi B.2 IC-206/NC-503 Field Service Ver.0 Apr. • The default setting is “MH”. • The default setting is “TIFF”. used by the scan to e-mail functions can be specified.

• If it does not appear even after you wait for several seconds. Troubleshooting 6.2 Troubleshooting procedure chart 1. NO END Change the Network Interface Card. NO NO • It takes several minutes for [NETWORK SETTING] to appear after the power switch has been turned ON. replace the defective part or parts. the network or telephone line is probably defective.0 Apr. NOTE • Network setting and line checks should be made by the network administrator (system administrator). If the symptom persists. • If it is not possible to transfer data correctly with the various settings made on [NETWORK SETTING].Field Service Ver. 1. 6. 21 Troubleshooting [NETWORK SETTING] is not displayed on the [ADMIN. YES Take necessary action according to the trouble shooting procedures for the machine. 6. Turn on the power switch The machine does not start up even if reset is repeated over and over again. check them by following the flowchart below. YES IC-206/NC-503 Troubleshooting . check the Network Interface Card for proper connection. check the board and connectors for proper connection. If network settings are not correct.1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting procedure overview • If the following symptoms occur when the machine is restarted after the Network Interface Card (NC-503) or Image Controller (IC-206) has been mounted. MANAGEMENT] screen. 2007 6. The symptom disappears after the board has been properly reconnected.

The driver has not been correctly installed. Computer operate erratically only temporarily. Restart the computer. toner.0 Apr. Troubleshooting Field Service Ver. The network cable is disconnected. 1. A wrong print destination port has been set. etc. Follow the correct procedure to uninstall the driver. Restart the computer. or the relay device is faulty.6.3 IC-206/NC-503 Step 1 Action taken if network print cannot be done Check Has the print job reached the copier? Result Yes No Possible cause A copier error (paper running out. and then reinstall it correctly. and subnet mask. Go to step 2. Erroneously set IP address Set the correct IP address and subnet mask. 2007 6. Troubleshooting 22 . or restart or replace the relay device. Set the correct port.) Data is yet to reach the copier. Make the correct connector connection. Action Check the copier and correct the cause of the error. 2 Is a response received to ping from the computer to the Network I/F Card? Yes No Computer operates erratically only temporarily.

© 2007 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES. Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information. INC. Printed in Japan DDA09A-M-FE1-1050 .